chrysler canada owners - 3 understanding the features of …owners.mopar.ca/en/manuals/2010/town and...

TABLE OF CONTENTSSECTION PAGE

1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9

3 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99

4 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213

5 STARTING AND OPERATING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307

6 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391

7 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411

8 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 465

9 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 483

10 INDEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 493

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

INTRODUCTION

CONTENTS

� Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4

� How To Use This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4

� Warnings And Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6

� Vehicle Identification Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6

� Vehicle Modifications/Alterations . . . . . . . . . . . . 7

1

INTRODUCTIONCongratulations on selecting your new Chrysler GroupLLC vehicle. Be assured that it represents precisionworkmanship, distinctive styling, and high quality - allessentials that are traditional to our vehicles.

This Owner’s Manual has been prepared with the assis-tance of service and engineering specialists to acquaintyou with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle.It is supplemented by a Warranty Information Booklet,located on the DVD, and various customer-orienteddocuments. Please take the time to read these publica-tions carefully. Following the instructions and recom-mendations in this manual will help assure safe andenjoyable operation of your vehicle.

NOTE: After you read the manual, it should be storedin the vehicle for convenient referencing and remainwith the vehicle when sold, so that the new owner willbe aware of all safety warnings.

When it comes to service, remember that your authorizeddealer knows your vehicle best, has factory-trained tech-nicians and genuine Mopar parts, and cares about yoursatisfaction.

HOW TO USE THIS MANUALConsult the Table of Contents to determine which sectioncontains the information you desire.

Since the specification of your vehicle depends on theitems of equipment ordered, certain descriptions andillustrations may differ from your vehicle’s equipment

The detailed index at the back of this Owner’s Manualcontains a complete listing of all subjects.

Consult the following table for a description of thesymbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughoutthis Owner’s Manual:

4 INTRODUCTION

INTRODUCTION 5

WARNINGS AND CAUTIONSThis Owner’s Manual contains WARNINGS against op-erating procedures that could result in an accident orbodily injury. It also contains CAUTIONS against proce-dures that could result in damage to your vehicle. If youdo not read this entire manual, you may miss importantinformation. Observe all Warnings and Cautions.

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBERThe Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is found on theleft front corner of the instrument panel, visible throughthe windshield. This number also appears on the Auto-mobile Information Disclosure Label affixed to a windowon your vehicle, the vehicle registration and title. NOTE: It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN.

Vehicle Identification Number

6 INTRODUCTION

VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS

WARNING!

Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle couldseriously affect its roadworthiness and safety andmay lead to an accident resulting in serious injury ordeath.

1

INTRODUCTION 7

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

CONTENTS

� A Word About Your Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12

▫ Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . 12

� Sentry Key� . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14

▫ Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

� Vehicle Security Alarm — If Equipped . . . . . . . . 16

▫ Rearming Of The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

� Illuminated Entry System — If Equipped . . . . . . 18

� Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) — If Equipped . . . 19

▫ Using The RKE Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20

� Remote Starting System — If Equipped . . . . . . . 27

▫ How To Use Remote Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27

� Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30

▫ Manual Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30

▫ Power Door Locks — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . 32

� Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35

▫ Power Vent Windows — If Equipped . . . . . . . 35

▫ Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36

2

� Sliding Side Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40

▫ Power Sliding Side Door — If Equipped . . . . . 41

▫ Sliding Side Door Child Protection Lock . . . . . 44

� Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46

▫ Power Liftgate — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . 47

� Occupant Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50

▫ Lap/Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

▫ Automatic Locking Retractors (ALR)Mode — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58

▫ Seat Belt Pretensioners — If Equipped . . . . . . 58

▫ Supplemental Rear Impact Active HeadRestraints (AHR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59

▫ Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System(BeltAlert�) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

▫ Seat Belts And Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . 64

▫ Seat Belt Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64

▫ Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) -Airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65

▫ Airbag System Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65

▫ Advanced Front Airbag Features . . . . . . . . . . 66

▫ Airbag Deployment Sensors And Controls . . . 70

▫ Event Data Recorder (EDR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77

▫ Integrated Child Booster Seat — If Equipped . . 79

▫ Integrated Child Seat — If Equipped . . . . . . . 81

▫ Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82

10 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

� Rear Seat Delete Feature(Commercial Vehicles Only) — If Equipped . . . . . 91

▫ Restraining Infants And Small ChildrenWith Seat Delete Feature(Commercial Vehicles Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93

� Engine Break-In Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . 95

� Safety Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95

▫ Transporting Passengers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95

▫ Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96

▫ Safety Checks You Should Make Inside TheVehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97

▫ Periodic Safety Checks You Should MakeOutside The Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98

2

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 11

A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYSYour vehicle uses a keyless ignition system. This systemconsists of a Key Fob with Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter and a Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) withintegral ignition switch. You can insert the Key Fob intothe ignition switch with either side up.

Wireless Ignition Node (WIN)The Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) operates similarly toan ignition switch. It has four operating positions, threewith detents and one that is spring-loaded. The detentpositions are LOCK, ACC, and ON. The START positionis a spring-loaded momentary contact position. Whenreleased from the START position, the switch automati-cally returns to the ON position.

1 — LOCK2 — ACCESSORY3 — ON4 — START


Key FobThe Key Fob operates the ignition switch. It also containsthe Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter and anemergency key, which stores in the rear of the Key Fob.

The emergency key allows for entry into the vehicleshould the battery in the vehicle or the RKE transmittergo dead. The emergency key is also for locking the lowerglove compartment. You can keep the emergency keywith you when valet parking.

To remove the emergency key from the Key Fob, slide themechanical latch at the top of the Key Fob sideways withyour thumb and then pull the key out with your otherhand. NOTE: You can insert the double-sided emergency key

into the lock cylinder with either side up.

Emergency Key Removal

2


Removing Key Fob From IgnitionPlace the shift lever in PARK. Turn the Key Fob to theLOCK position and then remove the Key Fob.

NOTE: Power window switches will also remain activefor up to 90 seconds after the ignition switch has beenturned to LOCK, depending upon the accessory delaysetting. Opening the front door will cancel this feature.

WARNING!

NEVER leave children alone in a vehicle. Leavingunattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for anumber of reasons. A child or others could be seri-ously or fatally injured. Do not leave the Key Fob inthe ignition. A child could operate power windows,other controls, or move the vehicle

CAUTION!

An unlocked car is an invitation to thieves. Alwaysremove the Key Fob from the ignition and lock alldoors when leaving the vehicle unattended.

Key-In-Ignition ReminderOpening the driver’s door when the Key Fob is in theignition and the ignition switch position is LOCK orACC, a chime will sound to remind you to remove thekey.

NOTE: The Key-In-Ignition reminder only soundswhen the Key Fob is placed in the LOCK or ACC ignitionposition.

SENTRY KEY�The Sentry Key� Immobilizer system prevents unautho-rized vehicle operation by disabling the engine. Thesystem does not need to be armed or activated. Operation


is automatic, regardless of whether the vehicle is lockedor unlocked.

The system uses Key Fob with factory-mated RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) transmitter and Wireless IgnitionNode (WIN) to prevent unauthorized vehicle operation.Therefore, only Key Fobs that are programmed to thevehicle can be used to start and operate the vehicle. Thesystem will shut the engine off in two seconds if aninvalid Key Fob is used to start the engine.

After turning the ignition switch to the ON position, theVehicle Security Light will turn on for three seconds for abulb check. If the light remains on after the bulb check, itindicates that there is a problem with the electronics. Inaddition, if the light begins to flash after the bulb check,it indicates that someone used an invalid Key Fob to startthe engine. Either of these conditions will result in theengine being shut off after two seconds.

If the Vehicle Security Light turns on during normalvehicle operation (vehicle running for longer than 10 sec-onds), it indicates that there is a fault in the electronics.Should this occur, have the vehicle serviced as soon aspossible by an authorized dealer.

NOTE: The Sentry Key� Immobilizer system is notcompatible with aftermarket remote starting systems.Use of these systems may result in vehicle startingproblems and loss of security protection.

All of the Key Fobs provided with your new vehicle havebeen programmed to the vehicle electronics.

Replacement Keys

NOTE: Only Key Fobs that are programmed to thevehicle electronics can be used to start and operate thevehicle. Once an Key Fob is programmed to a vehicle, itcannot be reprogrammed to any other vehicle.

2


CAUTION!

Always remove the Key Fobs from the vehicle andlock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.

At the time of purchase, the original owner is providedwith a four-digit Personal Identification Number (PIN).Keep the PIN in a secure location. This number isrequired for authorized dealer replacement of Key Fobs.Duplication of Key Fobs may be performed at an autho-rized dealer, this procedure consists of programming ablank Key Fobs to the vehicle electronics. A blank KeyFob is one that has never been programmed.

NOTE: When having the Sentry Key� Immobilizersystem serviced, bring all vehicle Key Fobs with you tothe authorized dealer.

Customer Key ProgrammingProgramming of Key Fobs may be performed at anauthorized dealer.

General InformationThe Sentry Key� system complies with FCC rules Part 15and with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation issubject to the following conditions:

• This device may not cause harmful interference.

• This device must accept any interference that may bereceived, including interference that may cause undes-ired operation.

VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM — IF EQUIPPEDThe Vehicle Security Alarm monitors the vehicle doorsfor unauthorized entry and the ignition switch for unau-thorized operation. When the alarm is activated, theVehicle Security Alarm provides both audible and visiblesignals. For the first three minutes, the headlights, parklamps and/or turn signals will flash and Vehicle SecurityLight will flash repeatedly and the horn will sound. Foran additional 15 minutes, only the headlights, park lampsand/or turn signals and Vehicle Security Light will flash.


The engine will run only if a valid key is used to start thevehicle.

Rearming Of The SystemThe Vehicle Security Alarm will rearm itself after the 15additional minutes of headlights and Vehicle SecurityLight flashing, if the Vehicle Security Alarm has not beendisabled. If the condition which initiated the alarm is stillpresent, the Vehicle Security Alarm will ignore thatcondition and monitor the remaining doors and ignition.

Arming The SystemRemove the key from the ignition switch and either pressa power door lock switch while the driver or passengerdoor is open, or press the LOCK button on the RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. After all the doors arelocked and closed, the Vehicle Security Light in theinstrument cluster will flash rapidly to signal that theVehicle Security Alarm is arming. The Vehicle SecurityLight in the instrument panel cluster will flash rapidly for

about 16 seconds to indicate that the alarm is being set.After the alarm is set, the Vehicle Security Light will flashat a slower rate to indicate that the Vehicle SecurityAlarm is armed.

NOTE: If the Vehicle Security Light stays on continu-ously during vehicle operation, have the system checkedby your authorized dealer.

Disarm The SystemEither press the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitteror insert a valid ignition key into the ignition switch.

NOTE:• The driver’s door key cylinder and the liftgate button

on the RKE transmitter cannot arm or disarm theVehicle Security Alarm.

• The Vehicle Security Alarm remains armed duringliftgate entry. Pressing the liftgate button will not

2


disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm. If someone entersthe vehicle through the liftgate and opens any door thealarm will sound.

• When the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed, the interiorpower door lock switches will not unlock the doors.

The Vehicle Security Alarm is designed to protect yourvehicle; however, you can create conditions where thesystem will give you a false alarm. If one of the previ-ously described arming sequences has occurred, theVehicle Security Alarm will arm regardless of whetheryou are in the vehicle or not. If you remain in the vehicleand open a door, the alarm will sound. If this occurs,disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm.

If the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed and the batterybecomes disconnected, the Vehicle Security Alarm willremain armed when the battery is reconnected; theexterior lights will flash, the horn will sound. If thisoccurs, disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm.

Tamper AlertIf something has triggered the Vehicle Security Alarm inyour absence, the horn will sound three times when youunlock the doors and the Vehicle Security Light will flashfor 30 seconds. Check the vehicle for tampering.

Security System Manual OverrideThe Vehicle Security Alarm will not arm if you lock thedoors using the manual door lock plunger.

ILLUMINATED ENTRY SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPEDThe courtesy lights will turn on when you use theRemote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter or open thedoors. This feature is only available if you have RKE.

The lights will fade to off after approximately 30 secondsor they will immediately fade to off once the ignitionswitch is turned ON.


NOTE:• The front courtesy overhead console and liftgate lights

do not turn on if the dimmer control is in the interiorlights ON position (extreme top position).

• The Illuminated Entry System will not operate if thedimmer control is in the extreme downward position.

REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (RKE) — IFEQUIPPEDThis system allows you to lock or unlock the doors andliftgate, and activate the Panic Alarm, optional powerliftgate, left power sliding door, and right power slidingdoor from distances up to approximately 66 ft (20 m)using a hand-held Key Fob with RKE transmitter. TheRKE transmitter does not need to be pointed at thevehicle to activate the system.

NOTE: Inserting the Key Fob with RKE transmitter intothe ignition switch disables all buttons on that RKEtransmitter; however, the buttons on the remaining RKEtransmitters will continue to work. Driving at speeds5 mph (8 km/h) and above disables all RKE transmitterbuttons for all RKE transmitters.

Two RKE transmitters may be supplied with the vehicle.Vehicles built without the powered options will beequipped from the factory with three-button RKE trans-mitters, and those built with power options will beequipped with up to seven-button RKE transmitters.

2


Using the RKE TransmitterThree-button RKE transmitters will provide basic UN-LOCK, LOCK and PANIC functions.

Seven-button RKE transmitters will provide functionsthat allow the same basic operation as the three-button,but may also be used to operate the power liftgate

(optional), power sliding doors, Remote Start feature(optional). Some features can be programmed to thecustomers preferences. For example, flash headlights orsound horn on LOCK.

Key Fob With Three-Button RKE TransmitterKey Fob With Seven-Button RKE Transmitter


Remote Unlock Doors and LiftgatePress and release the UNLOCK button on the RKEtransmitter once to unlock the driver’s side or twice tounlock all doors and liftgate. The Illuminated Entrysystem also turns on.

Remote Key Unlock on First PressThis feature lets you program the system to unlock eitherthe driver’s side, or all doors, on the first press of theUNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter.

• For vehicles equipped with an “Electronic VehicleInformation Center (EVIC),” refer to “Remote KeyUnlock,” under “Personal Settings (Customer-Pro-grammable Features)” in Section 4.

• For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC, the RemoteUnlock feature can be enabled or disabled by perform-ing the following steps:

1. Perform this operation while standing outside thevehicle.

2. Press and hold the LOCK button on a programmedRKE transmitter for at least 4 seconds, but no longer than10 seconds. Then, press and hold the UNLOCK buttonwhile still holding the LOCK button.

3. Release both buttons at the same time.

4. Test the feature while outside of the vehicle by press-ing the LOCK/UNLOCK buttons on the RKE transmitterwith the ignition switch in the LOCK position and theKey Fob removed.

5. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature toits previous setting.

NOTE: Pressing the LOCK button on the RKE transmit-ter while you are inside the vehicle will activate theVehicle Security Alarm. Opening a door with the VehicleSecurity Alarm activated will cause the alarm to sound.Press the UNLOCK button to deactivate the VehicleSecurity Alarm.

2


Remote Lock Doors and LiftgatePress and release the LOCK button on the RKE transmit-ter to lock all doors and liftgate. The horn will chirp onceto acknowledge the signal.Express Down Window FeatureThis feature allows you to remotely lower both front doorwindows at the same time. To use this feature, press andrelease the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter andthen immediately press and hold the UNLOCK buttonuntil the windows lower to the level desired or until theylower completely.Sound Horn with Remote LockThis feature will cause the horn to chirp when the doorsare locked with the RKE transmitter. This feature can beturned on or turned off. To change the current setting,proceed as follows:• For vehicles equipped with the EVIC, refer to “Sound

Horn with Lock,” under “Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Features),” under “Electronic VehicleInformation Center (EVIC)” in Section 4.

• For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC, perform thefollowing steps:


2. Press the LOCK button on a programmed RKE trans-mitter for at least 4 seconds, but no longer than 10 sec-onds. Then, press the PANIC button while still holdingthe LOCK button.


4. Test the feature while outside of the vehicle by press-ing the LOCK button on the RKE transmitter with theignition switch in the LOCK position and the Key Fobremoved.



NOTE: Pressing the LOCK button on the RKE transmit-ter while you are in the vehicle will activate the VehicleSecurity Alarm. Opening a door with the Vehicle SecurityAlarm activated will cause the alarm to sound. Press theUNLOCK button to deactivate the Vehicle Security Alarm.

Using the Panic AlarmTo turn the Panic Alarm feature on or off, press and holdthe PANIC button on the RKE transmitter for at least onesecond and release. When the Panic Alarm is on, theheadlights and park lights will flash, the horn will pulseon and off, and the interior lights will turn on.

The Panic Alarm will stay on for three minutes unlessyou turn it off by pressing the PANIC button a secondtime, or you turn the ignition switch to the ON position.

NOTE: When you turn off the Panic Alarm by pressingthe PANIC button a second time, you may have to becloser to the vehicle due to the Radio Frequency (RF)noises of the system.

Power Open/Close Power Liftgate — If EquippedPress the LIFTGATE button twice on the RKE transmitterwithin five seconds to Open/Close the Power Liftgate.The liftgate will beep for three seconds and then open/close. If the button is pushed while the liftgate is beingpower closed, the liftgate will reverse to the full openposition.

If the liftgate is locked and is not equipped with apowered liftgate, pressing the LIFTGATE button twicewill result in the liftgate becoming unlocked for 30 sec-onds allowing you to manually access the liftgate area.

The power liftgate may also be opened and closed bypressing the LIFTGATE button located on the overheadconsole.

If equipped with a rear interior switch on the left rearpillar, pushing this switch once will close the liftgate only.The liftgate cannot be opened from this switch.

2


Power Open/Close Left Power Sliding Door — IfEquippedPress the LEFT Power Sliding Door button twice on theRKE transmitter within five seconds to Power Open/Close the Left Power Sliding Door. If the button on theRKE transmitter is pushed while the door is beingpower-closed, the door will reverse to the full openposition.

Power Open/Close Right Power Sliding Door — IfEquippedPress the RIGHT Power Sliding Door button twice on theRKE transmitter within five seconds to Power Open/Close the Right Power Sliding Door. If the button on theRKE transmitter is pushed while the door is beingpower-closed, the door will reverse to the full openposition.

Turn Off Flash Lights with RKE Lock — IfEquippedThis feature will cause the turn signal lights to flash whenthe doors are locked or unlocked with the RKE transmit-ter. This feature can be turned on or turned off. To changethe current setting, proceed as follows:

• For vehicles equipped with the EVIC, refer to “FlashLight With Lock,” under Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Features),” under “Electronic VehicleInformation Center (EVIC)” in Section 4.

• For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC, perform thefollowing steps:



2. Press and hold the UNLOCK button on a programmedRKE transmitter for at least 4 seconds, but no longer than10 seconds. Then, press and hold the LOCK button whilestill holding the UNLOCK button.


4. Test the feature while outside of the vehicle by press-ing the LOCK/UNLOCK buttons on the RKE transmitterwith the ignition switch in the LOCK position and theKey Fob removed.


NOTE: Pressing the LOCK button on the RKE transmit-ter while you are in the vehicle will activate the VehicleSecurity Alarm. Opening a door with the Vehicle SecurityAlarm activated will cause the alarm to sound. Press theUNLOCK button to deactivate the Vehicle SecurityAlarm.

The following table explains the Lamp Flash options.

Function Which TurnSignal Lamps

Number ofFlashes

Lock All 1Unlock 1st Press Left Side 2Unlock All Doors All 2Left Side Left Side 2Right Side Right Side 2Liftgate All 2

Programming Additional TransmittersIf you do not have a programmed RKE transmitter,contact your authorized dealer for details.

Replacing the Transmitter BatteryThe recommended replacement battery is one CR2032battery.

2


NOTE:• Perchlorate Material — special handling may apply.

See: www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.

• Do not touch the battery terminals that are on the backhousing or the printed circuit board.

1. With the RKE transmitter buttons facing down, use aflat blade to pry the battery door and transmitter housingapart. Make sure not to damage the seal during removal.

2. Remove and replace the battery. Avoid touching thenew battery with your fingers. Skin oils may causebattery deterioration. If you touch a battery, clean it withrubbing alcohol.

3. To assemble the RKE transmitter case, snap the batterydoor and transmitter housing together.

General InformationThis device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules andRSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to thefollowing conditions:


• This device must accept any interference received,including interference that may cause undesiredoperation.

If your RKE transmitter fails to operate from a normaldistance, check for these two conditions.

1. A weak battery in the RKE transmitter. The expectedlife of the battery is approximately three years.

2. Closeness to a radio transmitter such as a radio stationtower, airport transmitter, and some mobile or CB radios.


REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPEDThis system uses the Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) transmitter to start the engine conve-niently from outside the vehicle while stillmaintaining security. The system has a range of

approximately 328 ft (100 m).

NOTE: The vehicle must be equipped with an auto-matic transmission to be equipped with Remote Start.

How to Use Remote StartAll of the following conditions must be met before theengine will Remote Start:

• Shift lever in PARK

• Doors closed

• Hood closed

• Liftgate closed

• Hazard switch off

• Brake switch inactive (brake pedal not pressed)

• Ignition key removed from ignition switch

• Battery at an acceptable charge level

• RKE PANIC button not pressed

WARNING!

• Do not start or run an engine in a closed garage orconfined area. Exhaust gas contains Carbon Mon-oxide (CO) which is odorless and colorless. Car-bon monoxide is poisonous and can cause seriousinjury or death when inhaled.

• Keep Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmittersaway from children. Operation of the Remote StartSystem, windows, door locks or other controlscould cause serious injury or death.

2


To Enter Remote Start ModePress and release the REMOTE START buttonon the RKE transmitter twice within five sec-onds. The vehicle doors will lock, parkinglights will flash and horn will chirp twice (if

programmed). Then, the engine will start and the vehiclewill remain in the Remote Start mode for a 15-minutecycle.

NOTE:• If your power door locks were unlocked, Remote Start

will automatically lock the doors.

• The park lights will turn on and remain on duringRemote Start mode.

• For security, power window and power sunroof op-eration (if equipped) are disabled when the vehicle isin the Remote Start mode.

• The engine can be started two consecutive 15-minutecycles with the RKE transmitter. However, the ignitionswitch must be turned to the ON position before youcan repeat the start sequence.

To Enter the Vehicle After Remote StartTo enter the vehicle while the engine is running during aRemote Start, you must first unlock the vehicle using theUNLOCK button on the transmitter. After the vehicle isunlocked, you can enter the vehicle, insert the Key Fobinto the ignition switch and move it to the ON position,otherwise the engine will shut off at the end of 15- minutecycle.

To Exit Remote Start Mode and Drive the VehicleBefore the end of the 15-minute cycle, press and releasethe UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter to unlockthe doors and disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm (ifequipped). Then, prior to the end of the 15-minute cycle,insert the Key Fob into the ignition switch and turn theswitch to the ON position.


NOTE:• The ignition switch must be in the ON position in

order to drive the vehicle.

• For vehicles equipped with the Electronic VehicleInformation Center (EVIC), the message “Insert Key/Turn to ON” will flash in the EVIC until you insert theKey Fob. Once inserted, the message “Turn to ON”will flash in the EVIC until you turn the Key Fob toON.

Cancel Remote StartRemote Starting will also cancel if any of the followingoccur:

• The engine stalls or engine speed exceeds 2500 rpm

• Any engine warning lights come on

• The hood is opened

• The hazard switch is pressed

• The shift lever is moved out of PARK

• The engine is allowed to run for the entire 15-minutecycle

To Turn Off the Engine While in Remote StartModePress and release the REMOTE START button one time orallow the engine to run for the entire 15 minute cycle.

NOTE: To avoid unintentional shutdowns while in theRemote Start Mode, the system will not allow the RemoteStart button to shutdown the engine for two seconds afterreceiving a valid Remote Start request.

2


When to Reset Remote StartThe vehicle can be started remotely up to a maximum oftwo times. The vehicle is also allowed a maximum of onefailed start, where the Remote Starting sequence wasinitiated but the engine stopped cranking without start-ing. After either of these conditions, or if the VehicleSecurity Alarm system is alarming, or if the PANICbutton was pressed, the vehicle must be reset by insertinga valid Key Fob into the ignition switch and rotating theKey Fob to the ON position, and then rotating the KeyFob back to the LOCK/OFF position.

DOOR LOCKS

Manual Door LocksLock the doors by pushing down on the lock plungers oneach door trim panel.

Manual Door Lock


If the lock plunger is down when you shut the door, thedoor will lock. Make sure the keys are not inside thevehicle before closing the door.

WARNING!

• For personal security and safety in the event of anaccident, lock the vehicle doors as you drive aswell as when you park and leave the vehicle.

• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the keyfrom the ignition switch, and lock your vehicle.Do not leave unattended children in the vehicle, orwith access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsuperviseduse of vehicle equipment may cause severe per-sonal injuries and death.

Sliding Door Lock

2


Power Door Locks — If EquippedA power door lock switch is on each front door trimpanel. Use this switch to lock or unlock the doors.

If you press the power door lock switch while the KeyFob is in the ignition, and any front door is open, thepower locks will not operate. This prevents you from

accidentally locking your keys in the vehicle. Removingthe Key Fob or closing the door will allow the locks tooperate. A chime will sound if the Key Fob is in theignition switch and a door is open, as a reminder toremove the Key Fob.

Driver Power Door Lock Switches

1 - Unlock 2 - LockFront Passenger Power Door Switches

1 - Window Open/Close 3 - Doors Unlock2 - Doors Lock


If you press the power door lock switch while the slidingdoor is open, the sliding door will lock.

Lock Doors Automatically — If EquippedIf the Lock Doors Automatically feature is enabled, thedoor locks will lock automatically when the vehicle’sspeed exceeds 15 mph (24 km/h).

The Lock Doors Automatically feature is enabled whenyour vehicle is shipped from the assembly plant and canbe disabled by using the following procedure:

• On vehicles equipped with the optional ElectronicVehicle Information Center (EVIC), refer to �PersonalSettings (Customer-Programmable Features)� in the“Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC),” inSection 4 of this manual.

• On vehicles not equipped with the optional EVICperform the following steps:

1. Enter your vehicle and close all doors.

2. Fasten your seat belt. (Fastening the seat belt willcancel any chiming that may confuse you during thisprogramming procedure.)

3. Place the Key Fob into the ignition.

4. Within 15-seconds, cycle the ignition Key Fob from theLOCK position to the ON/RUN position a minimum offive times, ending in the ON position (do not start theengine).

5. Within 30 seconds, press the driver’s door lock switchin the LOCK direction.

6. A single chime will be heard to indicate the feature hasbeen disabled.

7. To reactivate this feature, repeat the above steps.

8. If a chime is not heard, the program mode wascanceled before the feature could be disabled. If neces-sary, repeat the previous procedure.

2


The Lock Doors Automatically at 15 mph (24 km/h)feature can be reactivated by repeating the above men-tioned procedure or by performing the procedure in theEVIC (if equipped), Personal Settings (Customer-Pro-grammable Features) section.

Unlock Doors Automatically On Exit — IfEquippedThe Unlock Doors Automatically On Exit feature unlocksall of the vehicle doors when any door is opened. Thiswill occur only after the shift lever has been shifted intothe PARK position, after the vehicle has been driven (theshift lever has been shifted out of PARK and all doorsclosed).

The Unlock Doors Automatically On Exit feature will notoperate if there is any manual operation of the powerdoor locks (lock or unlock).

• On vehicles equipped with the optional ElectronicVehicle Information Center (EVIC), refer to �PersonalSettings (Customer-Programmable Features)� in the“Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC),” inSection 4 of this manual.

• On vehicles not equipped with the optional EVICperform the following steps:

1. Enter your vehicle and close all doors.

2. Fasten your seat belt. (Fastening the seat belt willcancel any chimes that may be confusing during thisprogramming procedure.)

3. Insert the Key Fob into the ignition switch.

4. Within 15-seconds, cycle the ignition Key Fob from theLOCK position to the ON/RUN position a minimum offive times ending in the ON position (do not start theengine).


5. Within 30 seconds, press the driver’s door lock switchin the UNLOCK direction.

6. A single chime will sound to indicate the feature hasbeen changed.

7. To reactivate this feature, repeat the above steps.

8. If a chime is not heard, the program mode wascanceled before the feature could be changed. If neces-sary, repeat the previous procedure.

The Unlock Doors Automatically On Exit feature can bereactivated by repeating the above mentioned procedureor by performing the procedure in the EVIC, Customer-Programmable Features section on vehicles so equipped.

NOTE: Use the Lock Doors Automatically at 15 mph(24 km/h) and Unlock Doors Automatically On Exitfeatures in accordance with local laws.

WINDOWS

Power Vent Windows — If EquippedSwitches on the driver’s door trim panel let the driveroperate the two vent windows from the driver’s seat.

Power Vent Window Switches

1 – Open 2 – Close

2


Power WindowsYou can control either the front or rear windows usingswitches located on the driver’s door trim panel. Theswitches will operate only when the ignition switch is inthe ON or ACC position and during power accessory delay.

NOTE: Power Window switches will also remain activefor up to 10 minutes after the ignition switch has beenturned to LOCK, depending upon the accessory delaysetting. Opening a front door will cancel this feature.

Power Window Lockout Switch — If EquippedThe driver may lock out all power windows by depress-ing the bar switch just below the power windowswitches.

Driver’s Power Window Switches

1 – Left Rear 3 – Left Front2 – Right Rear 4 – Right Front


Front Passenger Power Window SwitchThere is a single switch on the front passenger’s doortrim panel which operates the passenger door windowand locks and unlocks all doors. The switch will operateonly when the ignition switch is in the ON or ACCposition and during power accessory delay.

Sliding Side Door Power Window Switch — IfEquippedSecond row passengers may power the sliding doorwindow by a single switch on the door handle assembly.

Power Window Lockout Switch Front Passenger Power Window Switches

1 - Window Open/Close 3 - Doors Unlock2 - Doors Lock

2


The switches will operate only when the ignition switchis in the ON or ACC position and during power acces-sory delay.

NOTE: The sliding door windows do not fully open,stopping several inches above the window sill.

Auto-Down Feature — If EquippedThe front window switches may be equipped with anAuto-Down feature. Press the window switch past thedetent, release, and the window will go down automati-cally.

To open the window part way, press the window switchpart way and release it when you want the window tostop.

The power window switches remain active for up to10 minutes (depending on the accessory delay setting)after the ignition switch has been turned to LOCK.Opening a vehicle front door will cancel this feature.

Auto Up Feature With Anti–Pinch Protection — IfEquippedThe front Driver switch may be equipped with an AutoUp feature. Lift the window switch to the second detent,release, and the window will go up automatically.

Sliding Door Power Window Switch


To stop the window from going all the way up during theAuto Up operation, push down on the switch briefly.

To close the window part way, lift the window switch tothe first detent and release when you want the window tostop.

NOTE:• If the window runs into any obstacle during auto-

closure, it will reverse direction and then go backdown. Remove the obstacle and use the windowswitch again to close the window.

• Any impact due to rough road conditions may triggerthe auto reverse function unexpectedly during auto-closure. If this happens, pull the switch lightly to thefirst detent and hold to close window manually.

WARNING!

There is no anti-pinch protection when the windowis almost closed. To avoid personal injury be sure toclear your arms, hands, fingers and all objects fromthe window path before closing.

Auto Up Reset — If EquippedTo reactivate the Auto Up feature, perform the followingsteps after vehicle power is restored:

1. Pull the window switch up to close the windowcompletely and continue to hold the switch up for anadditional two seconds after the window is closed.

2. Push the window switch down firmly to the seconddetent to open the window completely and continue tohold the switch down for an additional two seconds afterthe window is fully open.

2


Wind BuffetingWind buffeting can be described as the perception ofpressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in theears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with thewindows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certainopen or partially open positions. This is a normal occur-rence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs withthe rear windows open, open the front and rear windowstogether to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurswith the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening tominimize the buffeting.

SLIDING SIDE DOORThe sliding door may be opened from the inside or theoutside. Pull outward on exterior handle to open thesliding door. The sliding door inside handle functions byrocking forward and back. Rocking the handle back-wards opens the door and rocking forward releases thehold open latch in order to close the door.

To keep your door operating properly, observe the fol-lowing guidelines:

• Always open the door smoothly.

• Avoid high impacts against the door stop when open-ing the door. This is very important when your vehicleis parked on an incline as the door will slide faster inthe downhill direction.

• There is a hold-open latch that is activated when thesliding door is fully opened. This latch will keep yoursliding door open on any incline. To close the slidingdoor after the hold-open latch is activated, you mustrock the inside handle forward or pull outward on theoutside handle.

Always make sure that the sliding door is fully latchedanytime the vehicle is in motion.


NOTE: The left side sliding door cannot be openedwhile the fuel door is open. This feature operates onlywhen the sliding door is fully closed prior to opening thefuel door.

Power Sliding Side Door — If EquippedThe power sliding door may be opened or closed manu-ally or by using the buttons on the RKE transmitter,overhead console switch, or rear door switch. Pulling theinside or outside power sliding door handle will alsopower open or close the power sliding door.

NOTE: Pulling the outside power sliding door handle asecond time while the sliding door is power opening orpower closing will allow the sliding door to be opened orclosed manually.

Press the button on the RKE transmitter twice within fiveseconds to open a power sliding door. When the door isfully open, pressing the button twice within five secondsa second time will close the door.

There are power sliding side door switches located on thetrim panel just in front of the power sliding door for therear seat passengers and in the overhead console for thedriver and passengers. Pressing the switch once willopen the power sliding door. When the door is fully openpressing the switch a second time will close the door.

2


NOTE: The power sliding side door must be unlockedbefore the power sliding door switches will operate.

If the inside or outside door handles are used while thepower sliding side door is activated, the power slidingdoor feature will be canceled.

To avoid unintentional operation of the power slidingdoors from the rear seats, press the power sliding doormaster lock button, located in the overhead console, todisable the switches and handles for the rear seat passen-gers.

NOTE:• The power sliding side door switches will not open if

the shift lever is in gear or the vehicle speed is above0 mph (0 km/h). To close the power sliding door withthe shift lever in gear and vehicle speed at 0 mph(0 km/h), the brake must be pressed

• If anything obstructs the power sliding side doorwhile it is closing or opening, the door will automati-cally reverse to the closed or open position, providedit meets sufficient resistance.

Power Sliding Door

1 — Heated Seat 4 — Door Handle2 — Power Window 5 — Power Sliding Door3 — Manual Lock


• If the power sliding side door is not in the full open orclose position, it will fully open when a power slidingdoor switch is pressed. To close the door, wait until itis fully open and then press the switch again.

• If the power sliding door encounters multiple obstruc-tions within the same cycle, the system will automati-cally stop and must be opened or closed manually.

WARNING!

You, or others, could be injured if caught in the pathof the sliding door. Make sure the door path is clearbefore closing the door.

Power Sliding Side Door Open FlashThe left and right exterior hazard lights will flash for12 seconds when either sliding door is opened. This willalert other drivers in the area that passenger(s) could beentering or exiting the vehicle.

The Sliding Side Door Open Flash can be enabled ordisabled by performing the following procedure:

1. Place the Key Fob in the ignition switch.

2. Cycle the ignition switch ON/LOCK five times endingin the ON position (do not start the engine).

3. Within 10 seconds of the final cycle, press the HAZ-ARD switch.

4. A single chime will sound to signify that you havesuccessfully completed the programming.

You can turn the feature back on by repeating the previ-ous procedure.

Power Sliding Side Door Master Lock SwitchTo provide a safer environment for small children ridingin the rear seats, the second row sliding door switchesand handles may be overridden by pressing the ON sideof the Master Lock Out Switch located in the frontoverhead console.

2


When the power sliding door master lock switch is in theON position, the power sliding side door may not beopened or closed by pressing the switch located on thetrim panel just in front of the sliding door or activatingthe inside power sliding door handle.

Sliding Side Door Child Protection LockTo provide a safer environment for small children ridingin the rear seats, the sliding doors are equipped with aChild Protection Door Lock system.

NOTE: When the Child Protection Door Lock system isengaged, the door can be opened only by using theoutside door handle even though the inside door lock isin the unlocked position.

To Engage the Child Protection Door Lock

1. Open the sliding side door.

2. Slide the Child Protection Door Lock control inward(toward the vehicle) to engage the Child Protection DoorLock.

Overhead Console Power Sliding Door Master Switch

1 — Left Door 3 — Right Door2 — Liftgate 4 — Master Lock


3. Repeat Steps 1 and 2 on the opposite sliding door.

NOTE:• After engaging the Child Protection Door Lock, al-

ways test the door from the inside to make certain it isin the desired position.

• When the Child Protection Door Lock system is en-gaged, (even if the inside door lock is in the unlockedposition) the door can be opened only by using theoutside door handle, the RKE transmitter, the switcheson the overhead console or the switches located on thetrim panel just in front of the power sliding door.

• The power sliding side door will operate from theswitches located on the trim panel just in front of thepower sliding door, regardless of the Child ProtectionDoor Lock lever position. To avoid unintentionaloperation of the power sliding door from the rearseats, press the ”ON” Master Lock Out Switch lo-cated in the front overhead console, next to thedriver.

Child Protection Door Lock

2


WARNING!

Avoid trapping anyone in the vehicle in a collision.Remember that the sliding doors can only be openedfrom the outside door handle or the switches locatedon the trim panel just in front of the power slidingdoor when the Child Protection Door Locks areengaged.

To Disengage the Child Protection Door Lock

1. Open the sliding side door.

2. Slide the Child Protection Door Lock control outward(away from the vehicle) to disengage the Child ProtectionDoor Lock.

3. Repeat Steps 1 and 2 on the opposite sliding door (ifequipped).

NOTE:• After setting the Child Protection Door Lock system,

always test the door from the inside to make certain itis in the desired position.

• The power sliding side door switches will not open thepower sliding doors if the vehicle is in gear or thevehicle speed is above 0 mph (0 km/h).

• The power sliding door will operate from the outsidedoor handle, the RKE transmitter, the switches on theoverhead console, or the switches located on the trimpanel just in front of the power sliding door when theshift lever is in PARK, regardless of the child lock leverposition.

LIFTGATEOn vehicles equipped with power locks, the liftgate canbe unlocked using the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter button, or by activating the power door lockswitches located on the front doors.


To open the liftgate, depress the liftgate release handlelocated on the underside of the license plate bar and pullthe liftgate open with one fluid motion.

If the liftgate is locked and is not equipped with thepower liftgate feature, pressing the button on the RKEtransmitter will result in the liftgate becoming unlockedfor 30 seconds allowing you to manually access theliftgate area.

Power Liftgate — If EquippedThe power liftgate may be opened manually or by usingthe button on the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmit-ter. Press the button on the transmitter twice within fiveseconds, to open the power liftgate. When the liftgate isfully open, pressing the button twice within five seconds,a second time, will close the liftgate.

Liftgate Handle Location

2


The power liftgate may also be opened and closed bypressing the button located on the overhead console.

The power liftgate may be closed by pressing the button,located in the upper left trim in the liftgate opening.Pushing once will only close the liftgate. This buttoncannot be used to open the liftgate.

Overhead Console Master Power Switch

1 — Left Door 3 — Right Door2 — Liftgate 4 — Master Lock Rear Power Liftgate Switch


When the RKE transmitter button is pressed and theFlash Lights feature is enabled, the tail lights will flash tosignal that the liftgate is opening or closing.

WARNING!

During power operation, personal injury or cargodamage may occur. Ensure the liftgate travel path isclear. Make sure the liftgate is closed and latchedbefore driving away.

NOTE:• If anything obstructs the power liftgate while it is

closing or opening, the liftgate will automaticallyreverse to the closed or open position, provided itmeets sufficient resistance.

• There are also pinch sensors attached to the side of theliftgate opening. Light pressure anywhere along thesestrips will cause the liftgate to return to the open position.

• The power liftgate must be in the full open or closepositions for any of the buttons to operate. If theliftgate is not in the full open or close positions, it mustbe opened or closed manually.

• If the liftgate release button is activated while thepower liftgate is closing, the liftgate will reverse to thefull open position.

• The power liftgate buttons will not operate if the shiftlever is in gear or the vehicle speed is above 0 mph(0 km/h).

• The power liftgate will not operate in temperaturesbelow �12°F (�24°C) or temperatures above 143°F(62°C). Be sure to remove any buildup of snow or icefrom the liftgate before pressing any of the powerliftgate buttons.

2


• If the power liftgate encounters multiple obstructionswithin the same cycle, the system will automaticallystop and must be opened or closed manually.

WARNING!

• Driving with the liftgate open can allow poison-ous exhaust gases into your vehicle. You and yourpassengers could be injured by these fumes. Keepthe liftgate closed when you are operating thevehicle.

• If you are required to drive with the liftgate open,make sure that all windows are closed, and theclimate control blower switch is set at high speed.DO NOT use the recirculation mode.

Gas props support the liftgate in the open position.However, because the gas pressure drops with tempera-ture, it may be necessary to assist the props whenopening the liftgate in cold weather.

OCCUPANT RESTRAINTSSome of the most important safety features in yourvehicle are the restraint systems:

• Three-point lap and shoulder belts for all seatingpositions

• Advanced Front Airbags for driver and front passen-ger

• Supplemental Rear Impact Active Head Restraints(AHR) located on top of the front seats (integrated intothe head restraint)

• Supplemental Side Airbag Inflatable Curtains (SABIC)that span the front, second, and third row seating forthe driver and passengers seated next to a window —if equipped

• Supplemental Side Seat Airbags — if equipped


• An energy-absorbing steering column and steeringwheel

• Knee bolsters/blockers for front seat occupants

• Front seat belts incorporate pretensioners to enhanceoccupant protection by managing occupant energyduring an impact event — if equipped

If you will be carrying children too small for adult-sizedseat belts, the seat belts or the Lower Anchors and Tetherfor CHildren (LATCH) feature also can be used to holdinfant and child restraint systems.

NOTE: The Advanced Front Airbags have a multistageinflator design. This allows the airbag to have differentrates of inflation based on severity and type of collision.

Please pay close attention to the information in thissection. It tells you how to use your restraint systemproperly, to keep you and your passengers as safe aspossible.

WARNING!

In a collision, you and your passengers can suffermuch greater injuries if you are not properly buckledup. You can strike the interior of your vehicle or otherpassengers, or you can be thrown out of the vehicle.Always be sure you and others in your vehicle arebuckled up properly.

Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, evenon short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor driverand cause a collision that includes you. This can happenfar away from home or on your own street.Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and theycan reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision. Someof the worst injuries happen when people are thrownfrom the vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility ofejection and the risk of injury caused by striking theinside of the vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle shouldbe belted at all times.

2


Lap/Shoulder BeltsAll seats in your vehicle are equipped with lap/shoulderbelts.

The belt webbing in the retractor is designed to lockduring very sudden stops or collisions. This featureallows the shoulder part of the belt to move freely withyou under normal conditions. But in a collision, the beltwill lock and reduce the risk of you striking the inside ofthe vehicle or being thrown out.

WARNING!

• It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, peopleriding in these areas are more likely to be seri-ously injured or killed.

• Do not allow people to ride in any area of yourvehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts.

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and

using a seat belt properly.• Wearing a seat belt incorrectly is dangerous. Seat

belts are designed to go around the large bones ofyour body. These are the strongest parts of yourbody and can take the forces of a collision the best.

• Wearing your belt in the wrong place could makeyour injuries in a collision much worse. You mightsuffer internal injuries, or you could even slide outof part of the belt. Follow these instructions towear your seat belt safely and to keep your pas-sengers safe, too.

• Two people should never be belted into a singleseat belt. People belted together can crash into oneanother in a collision, hurting one another badly.Never use a lap/shoulder belt or lap belt for morethan one person, no matter what their size.


Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions

1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back andadjust the seat.

2. The seat belt latch plate is near the seatback of thefront seats and next to your arm in the rear seats. Graspthe latch plate and pull out the belt. Slide the latch plateup the webbing as far as necessary to allow the belt to goaround your lap.

Pulling Out Belt and Latch Plate

2


WARNING!

• A belt that is worn under your arm is very danger-ous. Your body could strike the inside surfaces ofthe vehicle in a collision, increasing head and neckinjury. A belt worn under the arm can causeinternal injuries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulderbones. Wear the belt over your shoulder so thatyour strongest bones will take the force in acollision.

• A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protectyou from injury during a collision. You are morelikely to hit your head in a collision if you do notwear your shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder beltare meant to be used together.

3. When the belt is long enough to fit, insert the latchplate into the buckle until you hear a “click”.

Inserting Latch Plate into Buckle


WARNING!

• A belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle willnot protect you properly. The lap portion could ridetoo high on your body, possibly causing internalinjuries. Always buckle your belt into the bucklenearest you.• A belt that is too loose will not protect you as well.In a sudden stop you could move too far forward,increasing the possibility of injury. Wear your seatbelt snugly.

4. Position the lap belt across your thighs, below yourabdomen. To remove slack in the lap belt portion, pull upon the shoulder belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is too tight,tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap belt. A snug beltreduces the risk of sliding under the belt in a collision.

Removing Slack from Belt

2


WARNING!

• A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk ofinternal injury in a collision. The belt forces won’t beat the strong hip and pelvic bones, but across yourabdomen. Always wear the lap belt as low as pos-sible and keep it snug.• A twisted belt can’t do its job as well. In a collision,it could even cut into you. Be sure the belt is straight.If you can’t straighten a belt in your vehicle, take it toyour authorized dealer and have it fixed.

5. Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it iscomfortable and not resting on your neck. The retractorwill withdraw any slack in the belt.

6. To release the belt, push the red button on the buckle.The belt will automatically retract to its stowed position.If necessary, slide the latch plate down the webbing toallow the belt to retract fully.

WARNING!

A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision andleave you with no protection. Inspect the belt systemperiodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts.Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Donot disassemble or modify the system. Seat beltassemblies must be replaced after a collision if theyhave been damaged (bent retractor, torn webbing,etc.).

Third Row Center Shoulder Belt InstructionsThe shoulder belt for the third row center seat is locatedin the headliner slightly behind the third row seat.

Pull the strap down and secure the small latch plate ofthe lap belt into the small buckle until you hear a “click”.

Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it iscomfortable and not resting on your neck. When the belt


is long enough to fit, insert the large latch plate into thebuckle until you hear a “click.” The retractor shouldwithdraw any slack in the belt.

To release the small latch plate, position the end of thelarge latch plate against the red button on the small latchplate and push upward. Reinstall the latch plates into theheadliner.

Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt AnchorageIn the front seats and the second row outboard seats, theshoulder belt anchorage can be adjusted upward ordownward to help position the belt away from yourneck. The upper anchorage can be adjusted upward bypushing anywhere on the anchorage. To move the an-chorage downward, squeeze the actuation buttons whilesimultaneously pushing down on the anchorage assem-bly.

As a guide, if you are shorter than average you willprefer a lower position, and if you are taller than averageyou will prefer a higher position. When you release theanchorage, try to move it up or down to make sure thatit is locked in position.

Adjustable Anchorage

2


Automatic Locking Retractors (ALR) Mode — IfEquippedIn this mode, the shoulder belt is automatically pre-locked. The belt will still retract to remove any slack inthe shoulder belt. The Automatic Locking Mode is avail-able on all passenger-seating positions with a combina-tion lap/shoulder belt.

When to Use the Automatic Locking ModeUse the Automatic Locking Mode anytime a child safetyseat is installed in a passenger seating position. Children12 years old and younger should always ride buckled upin the rear seat.

How to Use the Automatic Locking Mode

1. Buckle the combination lap/shoulder belt.

2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward untilthe entire belt is extracted.

3. Allow the belt to retract. As the belt retracts, you willhear a clicking sound. This indicates the safety belt isnow in the Automatic Locking Mode.

How to Disengage the Automatic Locking ModeDisconnect the combination lap/shoulder belt and allowit to retract completely to disengage the AutomaticLocking Mode and activate the Vehicle Sensitive (Emer-gency) Locking mode.

Seat Belt Pretensioners — If EquippedThe seat belts for both front seating positions areequipped with pretensioning devices that are designed toremove slack from the seat belt in the event of a collision.These devices improve the performance of the seat beltby assuring that the belt is tight about the occupant earlyin a collision. Pretensioners work for all size occupants,including those in child restraints.


NOTE: These devices are not a substitute for proper seatbelt placement by the occupant. The seat belt still must beworn snugly and positioned properly.

The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Re-straint Controller (ORC). Like the airbags, the pretension-ers are single use items. After a collision deploys theairbags and/or pretensioners, a deployed airbag and/orpretensioner must be replaced immediately.

Supplemental Rear Impact Active Head Restraints(AHR)These head restraints are passive, deployable compo-nents, and vehicles with this equipment can not bereadily identified by any markings, only through visualinspection of the head restraint. The head restraint will besplit in two halves, with the front half being soft foamand trim, the back half being decorative plastic.

How the Active Head Restraints (AHR) workThe Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) determineswhether the severity or type of rear impact require theActive Head Restraints (AHR) to deploy. In case of AHRdeployment both driver and passenger seat AHR’s willbe deployed.

When AHR’s deploy during a rear impact, the headrestraint front half extends forward to minimize the gapbetween the back of the head and the AHR. This systemis designed to help prevent or reduce the extent ofinjuries the driver and front passenger in certain types ofrear end impacts.

NOTE: The Active Head Restraints (AHR) may or maynot deploy in the event of a front or side impact.However if during a front impact, a secondary rear

2


impact occurs, the AHR may deploy based on the sever-ity and type of the impact.

CAUTION!

All occupants, including the driver, should not oper-ate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s seat until the headrestraints are placed in their proper positions in orderto minimize the risk of neck injury in the event of anaccident.

NOTE: For more information on properly adjusting andpositioning the head restraint, refer to Section 3 “Adjust-ing Active Head Restraints”.

Resetting Active Head Restraints (AHR)If the Active Head Restraints are triggered in an accident,you must reset the head restraint on the driver’s andfront passenger seat. You can recognize when the ActiveHead Restraint has been triggered by the fact that theyhave moved forward (as shown in step three of theresetting procedure).

Active Head Restraint (AHR) Components

1 — Head Restraint FrontHalf (Soft Foam and Trim)

3 — Head Restraint BackHalf (Decorative Plastic RearCover)

2 — Seatback 4 — Head Restraint GuideTubes


1. Grasp the deployed AHR from the rear seat.

2. Position the hands on the top of the deployed AHR ata comfortable position.

3. Pull down then rearward towards the rear of thevehicle then down to engage the locking mechanism.

Hand Positioning Points On AHRDown And Rearward Reset Movement

2


4. The AHR front soft foam and trim half should lockinto the back decorative plastic half.

NOTE:• If you have difficulties or problems resetting the head

restraints, see an authorized dealer.

• For safety reasons, have the Active Head Restraintschecked by a qualified specialist at an authorizeddealer.

Down Movement To Engage Locking Mechanism AHR In Reset Position


Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System(BeltAlert�)If the driver’s seat belt has not been buckled within60 seconds of starting the vehicle and if the vehicle speedis greater than 5 mph (8 km/h), the BeltAlert� will alertthe driver to buckle the seat belt. The driver should alsoinstruct all other occupants to buckle their seat belts.Once the warning is triggered, the BeltAlert� will con-tinue to chime and flash the Seat Belt Reminder Light for96 seconds or until the driver’s seat belt is buckled. TheBeltAlert� will be reactivated if the driver’s seat belt isunbuckled for more than 10 seconds and the vehiclespeed is greater than 5 mph (8 km/h).

BeltAlert� will be reactivated if the driver’s seat belt isunbuckled for more than 10 seconds and the vehiclespeed is greater than 5 mph (8 km/h).

BeltAlert� ProgrammingBeltAlert� can be enabled or disabled by your authorizeddealer or by following these steps:

NOTE: The following steps must occur within the first60 seconds of the ignition switch being turned to the ONor START position. Chrysler Group LLC does not recom-mend deactivating BeltAlert�.

1. With all doors closed and the ignition switch in anyposition except ON or START, buckle the driver’s seatbelt.

2. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position (do notstart the engine), and wait for the Seat Belt ReminderLight to turn off.

3. Within 60 seconds of turning the ignition switch to theON/RUN position, unbuckle and then re-buckle thedriver’s seat belt at least three times within 60 seconds,ending with the seat belt buckled.

2


NOTE: Watch for the Seat Belt Reminder Light to turnon while unbuckling and off while re-buckling the seatbelt.

4. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. Asingle chime will sound to signify that you have success-fully completed the programming.

BeltAlert� can be reactivated by repeating this procedure.

NOTE: Although BeltAlert� has been deactivated, theSeat Belt Reminder Light will continue to illuminatewhile the driver’s seat belt remains unbuckled orretracted.

Seat Belts and Pregnant WomenWe recommend that pregnant women use the seat beltsthroughout their pregnancy. Keeping the mother safe isthe best way to keep the baby safe.

Pregnant women should wear the lap part of the beltacross the thighs and as snug across the hips as possible.

Keep the belt low so that it does not come across theabdomen. That way the strong bones of the hips will takethe force if there is a collision.

Seat Belt ExtenderIf a seat belt is too short, even when fully extended andwhen the adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage (ifequipped) is in its lowest position, your authorizeddealer can provide you with a seat belt extender. Thisextender should be used only if the existing belt is notlong enough. When it is not required, remove the ex-tender and store it.

WARNING!

Using a seat belt extender when not needed can in-crease the risk of injury in a collision. Only use whenthe seat belt is not long enough when it is worn lowand snug, and in the recommended seating positions.Remove and store the extender when not needed.


Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) - AirbagsThis vehicle has airbags for both the driver and frontpassenger as a supplement to the seat belt restraintsystems. The driver’s front airbag is mounted in thecenter of the steering wheel. The passenger’s front airbagis mounted in the instrument panel, above the glovecompartment. The words SRS AIRBAG are embossed onthe airbag covers.

NOTE: These airbags are certified to the new Federalregulations for Advanced Airbags.

The Advanced Front Airbags have a multistage inflatordesign. This allows the airbag to have different rates ofinflation based on the severity and type of collision.

This vehicle may also be equipped with SupplementalSide Airbag Inflatable Curtains (SABIC) to protect thedriver, front, and rear passengers sitting next to a win-dow. If the vehicle is equipped with SABIC airbags, theyare located above the side windows and their covers arealso labeled: SRS AIRBAG.

NOTE: Airbag covers may not be obvious in the interiortrim; but they will open during airbag deployment.

Airbag System ComponentsThe airbag system consists of the following:

• Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)

• Airbag Warning Light

• Driver Front Airbag

• Front Passenger Airbag

• Supplemental Rear Impact Active Head Restraint forDriver and Front Passenger

• Front and Side Impact Sensors

• Steering Wheel and Column

• Instrument Panel

• Knee Impact Bolster

2


• Front Seat Belt Pretensioners — if equipped

• Supplemental Side Airbag Inflatable Curtains (SABIC) —if equipped

• Supplemental Side Seat Airbags — if equipped

Advanced Front Airbag FeaturesThe Advanced Front Airbag system has multistage driverand front passenger airbags. This system provides outputappropriate to the severity and type of collision asdetermined by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC),which may receive information from the impact sensorsat the front of the car.

The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during animpact that requires airbag deployment. The timing ofthe second stage determines whether the output force islow, medium, or high. If a low output is sufficient to meetthe need, the remaining gas in the inflator is expended.

WARNING!

• Do not put anything on or around the airbagcovers or attempt to open them manually. You maydamage the airbags and you could be injuredbecause the airbags may no longer be functional.The protective covers for the airbag cushions aredesigned to open only when the airbags are inflat-ing.

• Do not drill, cut or tamper with the knee bolster inany way.

• Do not mount any accessories to the knee bolstersuch as alarm lights, stereos, citizen band radios,etc.

Supplemental Seat Side Airbags — If EquippedSupplemental seat side airbags provide enhanced protec-tion and work together with supplemental Side AirbagInflatable Curtains (SABIC) to help protect an occupant


during a side impact. The supplemental seat side airbagis marked with an airbag label sewn into the outboardside of the seat.

When the bag deploys, it opens the seam between thefront and side of the seat’s trim cover. Each bag deploys

independently, that is a left side impact deploys the leftbag only and a right-side impact deploys only the rightbag.

Supplemental Side Airbag Inflatable Curtain(SABIC) — If EquippedSABIC airbags offer side-impact and vehicle rolloverprotection to front and rear seat outboard occupants inaddition to that provided by the body structure. Eachairbag features inflated chambers placed adjacent to thehead of each outboard occupant that reduce the potentialfor side-impact head injuries. The curtains deploy down-ward, covering both windows on the impact side.

NOTE:• Should a vehicle rollover occur, the pretensioners

and/or SABIC airbags on both sides of the vehiclemay deploy.

• Airbag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim;but they will open during airbag deployment.

Supplemental Seat Side Airbag Label

2


The system includes sensors adjacent to both front andrear seat occupants that are calibrated to deploy theSABIC airbags during impacts that require airbag occu-pant protection.

WARNING!

• If your vehicle is equipped with left and right SideAirbag Inflatable Curtain (SABIC), do not stackluggage or other cargo up high enough to blockthe location of the SABIC. The area where the sidecurtain airbag is located should remain free fromany obstructions.

• Do not use accessory seat covers or place objectsbetween you and the side airbags; the performancecould be adversely affected and/or objects couldbe pushed into you, causing serious injury.

Along with seat belts and pretensioners, Advanced FrontAirbags work with the knee bolsters to provide improved

protection for the driver and front passenger. Side airbagsalso work with seat belts to improve occupant protection.

Knee Impact BolstersThe Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of thedriver and the front passenger, and position everyone forthe best interaction with the Advanced Front airbag.

Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize therisk of harm from a deploying airbag:

Children 12 years old and younger should always ridebuckled up in a rear seat.

WARNING!

Infants in rear-facing child restraints should NEVERride in the front seat of a vehicle with a passengerfront airbag. An airbag deployment can cause severeinjury or death to infants in that position.


Children that are not big enough to wear the vehicle seatbelt properly (see Section on Child Restraints) should besecured in the rear seat in child restraints or belt-positioning booster seats. Older children who do not usechild restraints or belt-positioning booster seats shouldride properly buckled up in the rear seat. Never allowchildren to slide the shoulder belt behind them or undertheir arm.

If a child from 1 to 12 years old (not in a rear facing childseat) must ride in the front passenger seat, move the seatas far back as possible and use the proper child restraint.(Refer to information on Child Restraints in this section.)

You should read the instructions provided with yourchild restraint to make sure that you are using it properly.

All occupants should ALWAYS wear their lap and shoul-der belts properly.

The driver and front passenger seats should be movedback as far as practical to allow the Advanced FrontAirbags room to inflate.

Do not lean against the door. If your vehicle has sideairbags, and deployment occurs, the side airbags willinflate forcefully into the space between you and thedoor.

If the airbag system in this vehicle needs to be modifiedto accommodate a disabled person, contact the CustomerCenter. Phone numbers are provided under �If You NeedAssistance� in Section 9 of this manual.

2


WARNING!

• Relying on the airbags alone could lead to moresevere injuries in a collision. The airbags workwith your seat belt to restrain you properly. Insome collisions, the airbags won’t deploy at all.Always wear your seat belts even though you haveairbags.

• Being too close to the steering wheel or instrumentpanel during front airbag deployment could causeserious injury, including death. Airbags needroom to inflate. Sit back, comfortably extendingyour arms to reach the steering wheel or instru-ment panel.

• Side airbags also need room to inflate. Do not leanagainst the door. Sit upright in the center of theseat.

Airbag Deployment Sensors and Controls

Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)The ORC is part of a Federally regulated safety systemrequired for this vehicle.

The ORC determines if deployment of the front and/orside airbags in a frontal or side collision is required.Based on the impact sensors signals, a central electronicORC deploys the Advanced Front Airbags, SABIC air-bags — if equipped, Supplemental Side Seat Airbags — ifequipped, and front seat belt pretensioners — ifequipped, as required, depending on severity and type ofimpact.

Advanced Front Airbags are designed to provide addi-tional protection by supplementing the seat belts incertain frontal collisions depending on the severity andtype of collision. Advanced Front Airbags are not ex-pected to reduce the risk of injury in rear, side, or rollovercollisions.


The Advanced Front Airbags will not deploy in all frontalcollisions, including some that may produce substantialvehicle damage — for example, some pole collisions,truck underrides, and angle offset collisions. On the otherhand, depending on the type and location of impact,Advanced Front Airbags may deploy in crashes withlittle vehicle front-end damage but that produce a severeinitial deceleration.

The side airbags will not deploy in all side collisions. Sideairbag deployment will depend on the severity and typeof collision.

Because airbag sensors measure vehicle deceleration overtime, vehicle speed and damage by themselves are notgood indicators of whether or not an airbag should havedeployed.

Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all colli-sions, and also are needed to help keep you in position,away from an inflating airbag.

The ORC monitors the readiness of the electronic parts ofthe system whenever the ignition switch is in the STARTor ON position. If the key is in the LOCK position, in theACC position, or not in the ignition, the airbags are noton and will not inflate.

The ORC contains a backup power supply system thatmay deploy the airbags even if the battery loses power orit becomes disconnected prior to deployment.

Also, the ORC turns on the Airbag WarningLight in the instrument panel for approxi-mately four to six seconds for a self-checkwhen the ignition is first turned on. After the

self-check, the Airbag Warning Light will turn off. If theORC detects a malfunction in any part of the system, itturns on the Airbag Warning Light, either momentarilyor continuously. A single chime will sound if the lightcomes on again after initial startup.

2


It also includes diagnostics that will illuminate the instru-ment cluster Airbag Warning Light if a malfunction isnoted. The diagnostics also record the nature of themalfunction.

WARNING!

Ignoring the Airbag Warning Light in your instru-ment panel could mean you won’t have the airbags toprotect you in a collision. If the light does not comeon, stays on after you start the vehicle, or if it comeson as you drive, have the airbag system checked rightaway.

Driver and Passenger Airbag Inflator UnitsThe Driver and Passenger Airbag/Inflator Units arelocated in the center of the steering wheel and the rightside of the instrument panel. When the ORC detects acollision requiring the airbags, it signals the inflator units.A large quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to inflate

the Advanced Front Airbags. Different airbag inflationrates are possible, based on the collision type and sever-ity. The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upperright side of the instrument panel separate and fold outof the way as the bags inflate to their full size. The bagsfully inflate in about 50 to 70 milliseconds. This is abouthalf of the time it takes to blink your eyes. The bags thenquickly deflate while helping to restrain the driver andfront passenger.

The driver front airbag gas is vented through the ventholes in the sides of the airbag. The passenger frontairbag gas is vented through the vent holes in the sides ofthe airbag. In this way, the airbags do not interfere withyour control of the vehicle.

Supplemental Seat Side Airbag Inflator Units — IfEquippedThe Side Impact (SRS) Seat-Mounted Side Airbags aredesigned to activate only in certain side collisions.


The ORC determines if a side collision requires the sideairbags to inflate based on the severity and type ofcollision.

The ORC monitors the readiness of the electronic parts ofthe system whenever the ignition switch is in the STARTor ON positions. These include all of the items previouslymentioned.

Based on the severity and type of collision, the sideairbag inflator on the crash side of the vehicle may betriggered, releasing a quantity of non-toxic gas. Theinflating side airbag exits through the seat seam into thespace between the occupant and the door. The sideairbags fully inflate in about 10 milliseconds. The sideairbag moves at a very high speed and with such a highforce, that it could injure you if you are not seatedproperly, or if items are positioned in the area where theside airbag inflates. This especially applies to children.

Supplemental Side Airbag Inflatable Curtain(SABIC) Inflator Units — If EquippedDuring collisions where the impact is confined to aparticular area of the side of the vehicle, the ORC maydeploy the SABIC Airbags, depending on severity andtype of collision. In these events, the ORC will deploy theSABIC only on the impact side of the vehicle.

A quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the sidecurtain airbag. The inflating side curtain airbag pushesthe outside edge of the headliner out of the way andcovers the window. The airbag inflates in about 30 ms(about one-quarter of the time that it takes to blink youreyes) with enough force to injure you if you are not beltedand seated properly, or if items are positioned in the areawhere the side curtain airbag inflates. This especiallyapplies to children. The side curtain airbag is only about3-1/2 in (9 cm) thick when it is inflated.

2


Because airbag sensors estimate deceleration over time,vehicle speed and damage are not good indicators ofwhether or not an airbag should have deployed.

NOTE: In a rollover the pretensioners and/or SABICairbags may deploy on both sides of the vehicle.

Front and Side Impact SensorsIn front and side impacts, impact sensors aid the ORC indetermining appropriate response to impact events. Ad-ditional sensors in the ORC determine the level of airbagdeployment and provide verification.

Enhanced Accident Response SystemIn the event of an impact causing airbag deployment, ifthe communication network remains intact, and thepower remains intact, depending on the nature of theevent the ORC will determine whether to have theEnhanced Accident Response System to perform thefollowing functions:

• Cut off fuel to the engine.

• Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power oruntil the ignition key is turned off.

• Turn on the interior lights, which remain on as long asthe battery has power or until the ignition key isremoved.

• Unlock the doors automatically.

If a Deployment OccursThe airbags are designed to deflate immediately afterdeployment.

NOTE: Front and/or side airbags will not deploy in allcollisions. This does not mean something is wrong withthe airbag system.

If you do have a collision which deploys the airbags, anyor all of the following may occur:

• The nylon airbag material may sometimes cause abra-sions and/or skin reddening to the driver and front


passenger as the airbags deploy and unfold. Theabrasions are similar to friction rope burns or thoseyou might get sliding along a carpet or gymnasiumfloor. They are not caused by contact with chemicals.They are not permanent and normally heal quickly.However, if you haven’t healed significantly within afew days, or if you have any blistering, see your doctorimmediately.

• As the airbags deflate, you may see some smoke-likeparticles. The particles are a normal by-product of theprocess that generates the non-toxic gas used forairbag inflation. These airborne particles may irritatethe skin, eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or eyeirritation, rinse the area with cool water. For nose orthroat irritation, move to fresh air. If the irritationcontinues, see your doctor. If these particles settle onyour clothing, follow the garment manufacturer’s in-structions for cleaning.

Do not drive your vehicle after the airbags have de-ployed. If you are involved in another collision, theairbags will not be in place to protect you.

WARNING!

Deployed airbags and seat belt pretensioners cannotprotect you in another collision. Have the airbags,seat belt pretensioners, and the front passenger seatbelt retractor assembly replaced by an authorizeddealer as soon as possible. Also, have the OccupantRestraint Controller (ORC) system serviced as well.

2


Maintaining Your Airbag System

WARNING!

• Modifications to any part of the airbag systemcould cause it to fail when you need it. You couldbe injured if the airbag system is not there toprotect you. Do not modify the components orwiring, including adding any kind of badges orstickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or theupper right side of the instrument panel. Do notmodify the front bumper, vehicle body structure,or add aftermarket side steps or running boards.

• It is dangerous to try to repair any part of theairbag system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone whoworks on your vehicle that it has an airbag system.

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)• Do not attempt to modify any part of your ad-

vanced airbag system. The airbag may inflateaccidentally or may not function properly if modi-fications are made. Take your vehicle to an autho-rized dealer for any advanced airbag system ser-vice. If your seat, including your trim cover andcushion, needs to be serviced in any way (includ-ing removal or loosening/tightening of seat attach-ment bolts), take the vehicle to your authorizeddealer. Only manufacturer approved seat accesso-ries may be used. If it is necessary to modify anadvanced airbag system for persons with disabili-ties, contact your authorized dealer.


Airbag Warning LightYou will want to have the airbags ready toinflate for your protection in a collision. Whilethe airbag system is designed to be mainte-nance free, if any of the following occurs, have

an authorized dealer service the system immediately.

• The Airbag Warning Light does not come on forapproximately four to six seconds when the ignitionswitch is first turned ON.

• The light remains on after the approximate four tosix-second interval.

• The light comes on and remains on while driving.

NOTE: If the speedometer, tachometer, or any enginerelated gauges are not working, the Occupant RestraintController (ORC) may also be disabled. The airbags maynot be ready to inflate for your protection. Promptlycheck the fuse block for blown fuses. Refer to the label

located on the inside of the fuse block cover for theproper airbag fuses. See your authorized dealer if thefuse is good.

Event Data Recorder (EDR)In the event of an accident, your vehicle is designed torecord up to five seconds of specific vehicle data param-eters (see list below) in an event data recorder prior to themoment of airbag deployment, or near deployment (ifapplicable), and up to a quarter second of either high-speed deceleration data or change in velocity duringand/or after airbag deployment or near-deployment.EDR data is ONLY recorded if an airbag deploys, ornearly deploys, and is otherwise unavailable.

NOTE:1. A near-deployment event occurs when the airbagsensor detects severe vehicle deceleration usually indica-tive of a crash, but not severe enough to warrant airbagdeployment.

2


2. Under certain circumstances, EDR data may not berecorded (e.g., loss of battery power).

In conjunction with other data gathered during a com-plete accident investigation, the electronic data may beused by Chrysler Group LLC and others to learn moreabout the possible causes of crashes and associatedinjuries in order to assess and improve vehicle perfor-mance. In addition to crash investigations initiated byChrysler Group LLC, such investigations may be re-quested by customers, insurance carriers, governmentofficials, and professional crash researchers, such as thoseassociated with universities, and with hospital and insur-ance organizations.

In the event that an investigation is undertaken byChrysler Group LLC (regardless of initiative), the com-pany or its designated representative will first obtainpermission of the appropriate custodial entity for thevehicle (usually the vehicle owner or lessee) before

accessing the electronic data stored, unless ordered todownload data by a court with legal jurisdiction (i.e.,pursuant to a warrant). A copy of the data will beprovided to the custodial entity upon request. Generaldata that does not identify particular vehicles or crashesmay be released for incorporation in aggregate crashdatabases, such as those maintained by the U.S. govern-ment and various states. Data of a potentially sensitivenature, such as would identify a particular driver, ve-hicle, or crash, will be treated confidentially. Confidentialdata will not be disclosed by Chrysler Group LLC to anythird party except when:1. Used for research purposes, such as to match datawith a particular crash record in an aggregate database,provided confidentiality of personal data is thereafterpreserved.2. Used in defense of litigation involving a ChryslerGroup LLC product.3. Requested by police under a legal warrant.


4. Otherwise required by law.

Data parameters that are recorded:• Diagnostic trouble code(s) and warning light status for

electronically-controlled safety systems, including theairbag system

• Vehicle speed

• Engine RPM

• Brake switch status

• Pedal position

• And other parameters depending on vehicleconfiguration

Integrated Child Booster Seat — If EquippedThe Integrated Child Booster Seat (if equipped) is locatedin each second-row passenger seat. The booster seat isdesigned for children weighing between 48 and 85 lbs (22and 39 kg) and between 47 in (119 cm) and 57 in (145 cm)tall.

The booster seat is designed to raise the child highenough to use the vehicle lap and shoulder belt. Thebooster seat latch release handle is located at the front ofthe seat cushion.

Booster Seat Release Handle

2


To position a child into the Integrated Child Booster Seatfollow these steps:

1. Pull the release handle forward to release the latch andseat cushion. Then, lift seat cushion up and push back tolock it in the booster seat position.

WARNING!

Failure to comply with the following conditionscould result in serious injury of death:• The swivel seat should be locked in the forward-

facing position when using the booster seat withthe vehicle in motion.

• Be certain that the seat cushion is locked securelyinto position before using the seat. Otherwise, theseat will not provide the proper stability for childseats and/or passengers. An improperly latchedseat cushion could cause serious injury.

2. Place the child upright in the seat with their backfirmly against the seatback.

3. Grasp the latch plate and pull out the seat belt.

4. Slide the latch plate up the webbing as far as necessaryto allow the seat belt to go around the child’s lap.

Booster Seat Position


NOTE: The lap portion of the seat belt should be low onthe hips and as snug as possible.

5. Once the seat belt is long enough to fit properly, insertthe latch plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.”

6. To remove the slack from the lap belt, pull upward onthe shoulder portion of the seat belt.

7. To release the seat belt, push the red button on thebuckle.Integrated Child Seat — If EquippedOperating instructions for the second row bench seat withIntegrated Child Seat are included with the seat. If theinstructions are not with the seat or in the Owner’s ManualPackage, replacement instruction can be obtained.

Integrated Child Booster Seat Second Row Bench Seat With Integrated Child Seat

2


To obtain Integrated Child Seat replacement instruc-tions: Refer to Publication Order Forms in Section 9 andspecify publication number 81–016–8050 when ordering.

Child RestraintsEveryone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up all thetime, including babies and children. Every state in theUnited States and all Canadian provinces require thatsmall children ride in proper restraint systems. This is thelaw, and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it.

Children 12 years and younger should ride properlybuckled up in a rear seat. According to crash statistics,children are safer when properly restrained in the rearseats rather than in the front.

WARNING!

In a collision, an unrestrained child, even a tiny baby,can become a projectile inside the vehicle. The forcerequired to hold even an infant on your lap couldbecome so great that you could not hold the child, nomatter how strong you are. The child and otherscould be badly injured. Any child riding in yourvehicle should be in a proper restraint for the child’ssize.

Infants and Small ChildrenThere are different sizes and types of restraints forchildren from newborn size to the child almost largeenough for an adult safety belt. Always check the childseat Owner’s Manual to ensure you have the right seatfor your child. Use the restraint that is correct for yourchild.


• Safety experts recommend that children riderearward-facing in the vehicle until they are at leastone year old and weigh at least 20 lbs (9 kg). Two typesof child restraints can be used rearward-facing: infantcarriers and convertible child seats. Both types of childrestraints are held in the vehicle by the lap/shoulderbelt or the LATCH child restraint anchorage system.Refer to “Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren(LATCH)” later in this section.

• The infant carrier is only used rearward-facing in thevehicle. It is recommended for children who weigh upto about 20 lbs (9 kg). Convertible child seats can beused either rearward-facing or forward-facing in thevehicle. Convertible child seats often have a higherweight limit in the rearward-facing direction thaninfant carriers do, so they can be used rearward-facingby children who weigh more than 20 lbs (9 kg) but areless than one year old.

WARNING!

Rearward-facing child seats must NEVER be used inthe front seat of a vehicle with a front passengerairbag. An airbag deployment could cause severeinjury or death to infants in this position.

• Rearward-facing child seats and infant carriers mustNEVER be used while the second row Swivel ’n Goseats are in the rearward-facing position.

WARNING!

Never place any child seat, booster seat, or infantcarrier in the Swivel ’n Go seat while it is in therearward-facing position. The swivel seat should belocked in the forward position when using any childseat, booster seat, or infant carriers, with the vehiclein motion. Failure to do so could result in seriousinjury or even death.

2


Older Children and Child RestraintsChildren who weigh more than 20 lbs (9 kg) and who areolder than one year can ride forward-facing in thevehicle. Forward-facing child seats and convertible childseats used in the forward-facing direction are for childrenwho weigh 20 to 40 lbs (9 to 18 kg) and who are olderthan one year. These child seats are also held in thevehicle by the lap/shoulder belt or the LATCH childrestraint anchorage system. Refer to “Lower Anchors andTether for CHildren (LATCH)” later in this section.

An aftermarket belt-positioning booster seat is for chil-dren weighing more than 40 lbs (18 kg), but who are stilltoo small to properly fit the vehicle’s seat belts. If thechild can not sit with knees bent over the vehicles seatcushion while the child’s back is against the seatback,they should use a belt-positioning booster seat. The childand booster seat are held in the vehicle by the lap/shoulder belt.

Children Too Large for Booster SeatsChildren who are large enough to wear the shoulder beltcomfortably, and whose legs are long enough to bendover the front of the seat when their back is against theseatback, should use the lap/shoulder belt in a rear seat.

• Make sure that the child is upright in the seat.

• The lap portion should be low on the hips and as snugas possible.

• Check belt fit periodically. A child’s squirming orslouching can move the belt out of position.

• If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck, move thechild closer to the center of the vehicle. If this doesn’thelp, move the child to the center rear seating positionand use the lap belt. Never allow a child to put theshoulder belt under an arm or behind their back.


NOTE: For additional information, refer towww.seatcheck.org or call 1–866–SEATCHECK. Cana-dian residents, should refer to Transport Canada’s web-site for additional information. http://www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety/safedrivers/childsafety/index.htm

WARNING!

• Improper installation can lead to failure of aninfant or child restraint. It could come loose in acollision. The child could be badly injured orkilled. Follow the manufacturer’s directions ex-actly when installing an infant or child restraint.

• A rearward-facing child restraint should only beused in a rear seat. A rearward-facing child re-straint in the front seat may be struck by a deploy-ing passenger airbag which may cause severe orfatal injury to the infant.

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)• Occupants riding in Swivel ’n Go seating must be

wearing their seat belt and the seat must be lockedin either the forward or rearward position. Failureto do so could result in serious injury or evendeath.

Here are some tips on getting the most out of your childrestraint:

• Before buying any restraint system, make sure that ithas a label certifying that it meets all applicable SafetyStandards. We also recommend that you make surethat you can install the child restraint in the vehiclewhere you will use it, before you buy it.

• The restraint must be appropriate for your child’sweight and height. Check the label on the restraint forweight and height limits.

2


• Carefully follow the instructions that come with therestraint. If you install the restraint improperly, it maynot work when you need it.

• The passenger seat belts are equipped with cinchinglatch plates, which are designed to keep the lapportion tight around the child restraint so that it is notnecessary to use a locking clip. Pulling up on theshoulder portion of the lap/shoulder belt will tightenthe belt. The cinching latch plate will keep the belttight; however, any seat belt system will loosen withtime, so check the belt occasionally and pull it tight ifnecessary.

• In the rear seat, you may have trouble tightening thelap/shoulder belt on the child restraint because thebuckle or latch plate is too close to the belt pathopening on the restraint. Disconnect the latch platefrom the buckle and twist the short buckle end of the

belt several times to shorten it. Insert the latch plateinto the buckle with the release button facing out.

• If the belt still can’t be tightened, or if pulling andpushing on the restraint loosens the belt, disconnectthe latch plate from the buckle, turn the bucklearound, and insert the latch plate into the buckleagain. If you still can’t make the child restraint secure,try a different seating position.

• Buckle the child into the seat according to the childrestraint manufacturer’s directions.

• When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in thevehicle with the seat belt or remove it from the vehicle.Don’t leave it loose in the vehicle. In a sudden stop orcollision, it could strike the occupants or seatbacks andcause serious personal injury.


Installing the Child Restraint SystemWe urge you to carefully follow the directions of themanufacturer when installing your child restraint. Many,but not all restraint systems will be equipped withseparate straps on each side, with each having a hook orconnector, and a means for adjusting the tension in thestrap. Forward-facing toddler restraints and somerearward-facing infant restraints will also be equippedwith a tether strap, a hook and means for adjusting thetension in the strap. Not all child restraint systems will beinstalled as described here. Again, carefully follow theinstallation instructions that are provided with the childrestraint system.

In general, you will first loosen the adjusters on the lowerstraps and tether straps so that you can more easily attachthe hook or connector to the lower anchorages and tetheranchorages. Then tighten all three straps as you push thechild restraint rearward and downward into the seat.

Not all child restraint systems will be installed as wehave described here. Again, carefully follow the instruc-tions that come with the child restraint system.

WARNING!

Improper installation of a child restraint to theLATCH anchorages can lead to failure of an infant orchild restraint. The child could be badly injured orkilled. Follow the manufacturer’s directions exactlywhen installing an infant or child restraint.

Installing the LATCH-Compatible Child RestraintSystemEach vehicle, except commercial cargo vehicles, is equippedwith the child restraint anchorage system called LATCH,which stands for Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren.Two LATCH child restraint anchorage systems are installedon all second-row seats and in the center position on allthird row fold-in-floor seats. Second-row seats also feature

2


tether strap anchorages, located in the rear surface of theseatback. In addition, all third row fold-in-floor seats areequipped with a child restraint tether anchor at the centerseating position.

NOTE:• When using the LATCH attaching system to install a

child restraint, please ensure that all seat belts not beingused for occupant restraints are stowed and out of reachof children. It is recommended that before installing thechild restraint, buckle the seat belt so the seat belt istucked behind the child restraint and out of reach. If thebuckled seat belt interferes with the child restraintinstallation, instead of tucking the seat belt behind thechild restraint, route the seat belt through the childrestraint belt path and then buckle it. This should stowthe seat belt out of the reach of an inquisitive child.Remind all children in the vehicle that the seat belts arenot toys and should not be played with, and never leaveyour child unattended in the vehicle.

• If your child restraint seat is not LATCH-compatible,install the restraint using the vehicle seat belts.

Installing the Lower Attachments:

1. The vehicle lower anchorages are round bars locatedat the rear of the seat cushion where it meets the seatback.

2. Loosen the adjusters on the lower child restraintattachment straps (reference the child restraint seat in-structions) to ease the installation.

NOTE: It is recommended to loosen the top tether strapand route it loosely prior to securing the lower anchors sothe top tether strap is not trapped between the vehicleseat and child restraint.

3. Attach the lower child restraint attachment straps tothe vehicle’s lower anchor bars. Ensure that the lowerattachment strap is firmly engaged and that the hook issecure.


4. Tighten the lower attachment strap while firmly push-ing the child restraint rearward and downward into thevehicle seat. Remove all slack in the lower attachmentstraps. Reference the child restraint instructions for infor-mation on properly removing slack.

Installing the Top Tether Strap(with either Lower Anchors or Vehicle Seat Belt):

1. Route the top tether strap under the adjustable headrestraint between the steel posts.

2. Provide enough slack (reference child restraint in-structions) for the tether strap to reach the tether anchorlocated near the bottom of the seat back.

3. Clip tether hook to tether anchor. Ensure that the hookis firmly engaged and secure.

4. Remove all slack and tighten tether strap according tochild restraint manufacturer’s instructions.

LATCH Anchorages

2


NOTE: The top tether strap is always to be secured,regardless of if the child restraint is installed with thelower anchors or the vehicle seat belt.

WARNING!

An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead toincreased head motion and possible injury to thechild. Use only the anchor positions directly behindthe child seat to secure a child restraint top tetherstrap.

Installing the Child Restraint Using the VehicleSeat BeltsThe seat belts in the passenger seating positions areequipped with either an Automatic Locking Retractor(ALR) or a cinching latch plate or both. Both types of seatbelts are designed to keep the lap portion of the seat belttight around the child restraint so that it is not necessaryto use a locking clip. The ALR will make a ratchetingnoise if you extract the entire belt from the retractor and

Rear Seat Tether Strap Mounting


then allow the belt to retract into the retractor. Foradditional information on ALR, refer to “AutomaticLocking Mode” in this section.

To install a child restraint, first, pull enough of the seatbelt webbing from the retractor to route it through thebelt path of the child restraint and slide the latch plateinto the buckle. Next, extract all the seat belt webbing outof the retractor and then allow the belt to retract into theretractor. Finally, pull on any excess webbing to tightenthe lap portion around the child restraint. Any seat beltsystem will loosen with time, so check the belt occasion-ally, and pull it tight if necessary.

Once you have completed securing the child restraintwith the seat belt secure the top tether strap. Refer to�Installing the Top Tether Strap� earlier in this section forinstructions.

Transporting PetsAirbags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet.An unrestrained pet could be thrown about and possiblyinjured, or injure a passenger during panic braking or ina collision.

Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnessesor pet carriers that are secured by seat belts.

REAR SEAT DELETE FEATURE(COMMERCIAL VEHICLES ONLY) — IF EQUIPPEDCommercial cargo vehicles are not designed for use as afamily vehicle and are not intended for carrying childrenin the front passenger seat. However, if you must carry achild in a vehicle without a rear seat, the passenger seatshould be moved to the full rearward position and thechild must be in a proper restraint system based on itsage, size and weight.

2


WARNING!

NEVER carry a child in a rear facing infant carrier ina vehicle without rear seats. In an accident, seriousinjury or death may occur from the deploying pas-senger airbag.

This vehicle is equipped with a child restraint tetheranchor located on the lower rear of the front passengerseat. Use this tether anchor to secure only forward-facing child restraints equipped with an upper tetherstrap.

WARNING!

Rearward-facing infant restraints must never be se-cured in the passenger seat of a vehicle with apassenger airbag. In an accident, a passenger airbagmay deploy causing severe injury or death to infantsriding in rearward-facing infant restraints.

Commercial Child Restraint Tether Anchor


Restraining Infants and Small Children with SeatDelete Feature (Commercial Vehicles Only)There are different sizes and types of restraints forchildren from newborn size to the child almost largeenough for an adult safety belt. Use the restraint that iscorrect for your child:

• The rearward-facing infant carrier is for babies weigh-ing up to about 20 lbs (9 kg), and less than one yearold. THIS TYPE OF SEAT CANNOT BE USED IN AVEHICLE EQUIPPED WITH THE REAR SEAT DE-LETE FEATURE (Commercial Vehicles Only).

• The forward-facing child seat is for children fromabout 20 to 40 lbs (9 to 18 kg), and more than one yearold.

• A convertible child seat, one that is designed to beused for children who are too heavy for a rearward-facing infant seat, may be used IN THE FORWARDFACING POSITION ONLY, IT MUST NEVER BE

INSTALLED FACING TO THE REAR IN A VEHICLEEQUIPPED WITH THE REAR SEAT DELETE FEA-TURE (Commercial Vehicles Only). When a convert-ible seat is properly installed facing forward, thevehicle seat should be adjusted to the rear mostposition.

• Children more than 40 lbs (18 kg) should be secured inthe passenger seat in a child restraint or belt-positioning booster seat with the seat adjusted to therear most position. Older children who do not usechild restraints or belt-positioning booster seatsshould ride properly buckled in the passenger seatwith the seat adjusted to the rearmost position. Neverallow children to slide the shoulder belt behind themor under their arm.

2


Tether Installation for Commercial Vehicles withRear Seat DeleteTo secure the child restraint upper tether strap to thevehicle, follow the instructions shown:

1. Locate the child restraint tether anchor on the lowerrear of the front passenger seat.

2. Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s directionsfor proper use of connecting the child restraint to theextended tether strap.

3. Route the tether strap under the head rest.

NOTE: Ensure that the child restraint tether strap iscentered between the headrest supports underneath thehead rest.

4. Using the hook attached to the child restraint tetherstrap, attach the child restraint tether strap to the metalanchor on the lower rear of the front passenger seat.

5. Following the child seat manufacturer’s instructions,tighten the child restraint tether strap.

6. Inspect the tether anchor strap for nicks, abrasions,discoloration, and loose threads. If these, or any othercondition that might affect the performance of the strap isobserved, DO NOT USE. Contact your authorized deal-ership for a replacement part.

WARNING!

The vehicle tether anchor is designed to be used witha child restraint only. It should not be used for anyother purpose. Before use, inspect the tether anchorstrap for nicks, abrasions, discoloration, and loosethreads. If these or any other condition that mightaffect the performance of the strap is observed, DONOT USE that strap. Personal injury may result.Contact your authorized dealership for a replacementpart.


ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONSA long break-in period is not required for the engine inyour vehicle.

Drive moderately during the first 300 miles (500 km).After the initial 60 miles (100 km), speeds up to 50 or55 mph (80 or 90 km/h) are desirable.

While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration within thelimits of local traffic laws, contributes to a good break-in.Wide-open throttle acceleration in low gear can be detri-mental and should be avoided.

The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is ahigh-quality energy conserving type lubricant. Oilchanges should be consistent with anticipated climateconditions under which vehicle operations will occur.The recommended viscosity and quality grades areshown in “Engine Oil”, under “Maintenance Procedures”in section 7 of this manual. NON-DETERGENT ORSTRAIGHT MINERAL OILS MUST NEVER BE USED.

A new engine may consume some oil during its first fewthousand miles (kilometers) of operation. This should beconsidered a normal part of the break-in and not inter-preted as an indication of difficulty.

SAFETY TIPS

Transporting PassengersNEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGOAREA.

WARNING!

• It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, peopleriding in these areas are more likely to be seri-ously injured or killed.

(Continued)

2


WARNING! (Continued)• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your

vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seatbelts.

• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat andusing a seat belt properly.

Exhaust Gas

WARNING!

Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbonmonoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless.Breathing it can make you unconscious and caneventually poison you. To avoid breathing (CO)follow these safety tips:

Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in confinedareas any longer than needed to move your vehicle in orout of the area.

If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the enginerunning, adjust your heating or cooling controls to forceoutside air into the vehicle. Set the blower at high speed.

If you are required to drive with the liftgate open, makesure that all windows are closed and the climate controlBLOWER switch is set at high speed. DO NOT use therecirculation mode.

The best protection against carbon monoxide entry intothe vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaustsystem.

Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaustsystem, when exhaust fumes can be detected inside thevehicle, or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is


damaged, have a competent mechanic inspect the com-plete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken,damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Openseams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumesto seep into the passenger compartment. In addition,inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raisedfor lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.

Safety Checks You Should Make Inside theVehicle

Seat BeltsInspect the belt system periodically, checking for cuts,frays, and loose parts. Damaged parts must be replacedimmediately. Do not disassemble or modify the system.

Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after acollision. Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced aftera collision if they have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor,torn webbing, etc.). If there is any question regarding beltor retractor condition, replace the belt.

Airbag Warning LightThe light should come on and remain on for six to eightseconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is firstturned ON. If the light is not lit during starting, see yourauthorized dealer. If the light stays on, flickers, or comeson while driving, have the system checked by an autho-rized dealer.

DefrosterCheck operation by selecting the defrost mode and placethe blower control on high speed. You should be able to feelthe air directed against the windshield. See your autho-rized dealer for service if your defroster is inoperable.

2


Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outsidethe Vehicle

TiresExamine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wearpatterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other objectslodged in the tread. Inspect the tread and sidewall forcuts and cracks. Check the wheel nuts for tightness.Check the tires (including spare) for proper pressure.

LightsHave someone observe the operation of exterior lightswhile you work the controls. Check turn signal and highbeam indicator lights on the instrument panel.

Door LatchesCheck for positive closing, latching, and locking.

Fluid LeaksCheck area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel,engine coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks. Also, if gasolinefumes are detected or if fuel, power steering fluid, orbrake fluid leaks are suspected, the cause should belocated and corrected immediately.


UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

CONTENTS

� Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104

▫ Inside Day/Night Mirror — If Equipped . . . 104

▫ Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped . . 104

▫ Outside Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105

▫ Driver’s Automatic Dimming Mirror —If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106

▫ Outside Mirror Folding Feature . . . . . . . . . . 106

▫ Power Mirrors — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . 106

▫ Heated Mirrors — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . 107

▫ Tilt Mirrors In Reverse (Available WithMemory Seat Only) — If Equipped . . . . . . . . 107

▫ Illuminated Vanity Mirrors — If Equipped . . 108

� uconnect™ phone — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . 108

� Voice Recognition (VR) System —If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108

� Blind Spot Monitoring — If Equipped . . . . . . . 108

▫ Rear Cross Path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114

▫ Modes Of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116

3

� Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117

▫ Manual Front And Second Row SeatAdjuster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118

▫ Manual Reclining Seats — If Equipped . . . . . 118

▫ Manual Lumbar Adjust Lever —If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120

▫ Eight–Way Power Seats — If Equipped . . . . . 121

▫ Heated Seats — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . 122

▫ Adjusting Active Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . 123

▫ Stow ’n Go� Seating — If Equipped . . . . . . . 126

▫ Easy Access Seating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129

▫ Swivel ’n Go™ Premium Seating — IfEquipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130

▫ Second Row Bench Seat — If Equipped . . . . 138

▫ Third Row Power Seat — If Equipped . . . . . 139

� Driver Memory Seat — If Equipped . . . . . . . . 143

▫ Setting Memory Positions And Linking RKETransmitter To Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144

▫ Easy Entry/Exit Seat(Available With Memory Seat Only) . . . . . . . 146

� To Open And Close The Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . 147

� Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149

▫ Interior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149

▫ Parking Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151

▫ Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151

▫ Automatic Headlights — If Equipped . . . . . . 152

▫ Headlights On With Wipers — If Equipped . . 153

▫ Headlight Delay — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . 153

100 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

▫ Daytime Running Lights(Canada/Fleet Vehicles Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . 154

▫ Front Fog Lights — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . 154

▫ Battery Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154

▫ Multifunction Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155

▫ Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155

▫ High/Low Beam Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156

▫ Flash-To-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156

▫ Smartbeam™ — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . 156

� Windshield Wipers And Washers . . . . . . . . . . 157

▫ Rain Sensing Wipers — If Equipped . . . . . . . 160

� Tilt Steering Column — If Equipped . . . . . . . . 161

� Adjustable Pedals — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . 162

� Electronic Speed Control — If Equipped . . . . . 164

▫ To Activate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165

▫ To Set At A Desired Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165

▫ Deactivating Electronic Speed Control . . . . . . 165

▫ Resuming Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165

▫ Varying The Speed Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166

▫ Accelerating To Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166

� Parksense� Rear Park Assist — If Equipped . . . 167

▫ Parksense� Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168

▫ Parksense� Warning Display . . . . . . . . . . . . 168

▫ Parksense� Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169

▫ Enabling/Disabling Parksense� . . . . . . . . . . 173

▫ Service Parksense� . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173

3

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 101

▫ Cleaning Parksense� . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173

▫ Parksense� System Usage Precautions . . . . . . 174

� Parkview� Rear Back Up Camera —If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176

▫ Turning Parkview� On Or Off —With Navigation Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177

▫ Turning Parkview� On Or Off —Without Navigation Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178

� Overhead Consoles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178

▫ Front Overhead Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178

� Garage Door Opener — If Equipped . . . . . . . . 181

▫ Programming HomeLink� . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183

▫ Gate Operator/Canadian Programming . . . . 186

▫ Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186

▫ Troubleshooting Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187

▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187

� Power Sunroof — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . 187

▫ Power Sunroof Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188

� Electrical Power Outlets — If Equipped . . . . . . 190

� Power Inverter — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . 193

� Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194

▫ Instrument Panel Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . 195

▫ Interior Bottle Holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195

▫ Smoker’s Package Kit — If Equipped . . . . . . 196

� Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197

▫ Glove Compartments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197

▫ Door Trim Panel Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198


▫ Driver Seatback Storage — If Equipped . . . . 198

▫ Umbrella Holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199

▫ Second Row Floor Storage Bins . . . . . . . . . . 199

▫ Storage Bin Safety Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200

▫ Center And Rear Overhead ConsoleStorage — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202

▫ Coat Hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202

▫ Cargo Area Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202

� Console Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203

▫ Basic Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203

▫ Premium Console — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . 204

� Rear Window Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208

▫ Rear Window Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208

� Load-Leveling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209

� Roof Luggage Rack — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . 209

� Sun Screens — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211

3


MIRRORS

Inside Day/Night Mirror — If EquippedA two-point pivot system allows for horizontal andvertical adjustment of the mirror. Adjust the mirror tocenter on the view through the rear window.

Headlight glare can be reduced by moving the smallcontrol under the mirror to the night position (toward therear of the vehicle). The mirror should be adjusted whileset in the day position (toward the windshield).

Automatic Dimming Mirror — If EquippedWhen using this feature the mirror will automaticallyadjust for headlight glare from vehicles behind you. Youcan turn the feature on or off by pressing the button at thebase of the mirror. A light next to the button willilluminate when the dimming feature is activated.

Manual Rearview Mirror


CAUTION!

To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning, neverspray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror.Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe themirror clean.

Outside MirrorsTo receive maximum benefit, adjust the outside mirror(s)to center on the adjacent lane of traffic with a slightoverlap of the view obtained on the inside mirror.

WARNING!

Vehicles and other objects seen in an outside convexmirror will look smaller and farther away than theyreally are. Relying too much on side convex mirrorscould cause you to collide with another vehicle orother object. Use your inside mirror when judgingthe size or distance of a vehicle seen in a side convexmirror.

Automatic Dimming Mirror

3


Driver’s Automatic Dimming Mirror — If EquippedThe driver’s outside mirror will automatically adjust forglare from vehicles behind you. This feature is controlledby the inside automatic dimming mirror and can beturned on or off by pressing the button at the base of theinside mirror. The mirror will automatically adjust forheadlight glare when the inside mirror adjusts.

Outside Mirror Folding FeatureAll outside mirrors are hinged and may be moved eitherforward or rearward to resist damage. The hinges havethree detent positions: full forward, full rearward andnormal.

Power Mirrors — If EquippedUse the mirror select switch located on the driver’s doortrim panel to adjust the view obtained in the outsidemirrors. Press the switch to the L (left) or R (right) formirror selection. Press the mirror select switch again to

guard against accidentally moving a mirror position. Themirror selection will also automatically turn off after30 seconds.

Power Side Mirror Adjust

1 — Left Mirror 3 — Adjusting Switch2 — Right Mirror


Select a mirror and press one of the four arrows for thedirection you want the mirror to move.

Driver’s side power mirror preselected positions can becontrolled by the optional Driver Memory Seat Feature.Refer to “Driver Memory Seat” in Section 3.

Heated Mirrors — If EquippedThese mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice. Thisfeature is activated whenever you turn on the rear

window defroster. Refer to “Rear Window Features” inthis section, for further information.

Tilt Mirrors in Reverse(Available with Memory Seat Only) — If EquippedTilt Mirrors in Reverse provides automatic outside mirrorpositioning which will aid the drivers view of the ground

rearward of the front doors. The driver’s outside mirrorwill move slightly downward from the present positionwhen the vehicle is shifted into REVERSE. The driver’soutside mirror will then return to the original positionwhen the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE position.Each stored memory setting will have an associated TiltMirrors in Reverse position.

NOTE: The Tilt Mirrors in Reverse feature is not en-abled when delivered from the factory. The Tilt Mirrors inReverse feature can be enabled or disabled in the Elec-tronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). Refer to “TiltMirrors in Reverse” under “Customer-ProgrammableFeatures” under “Electronic Vehicle Information Center(EVIC) in Section 4.

3


Illuminated Vanity Mirrors — If EquippedAn illuminated vanity mirror is located on the sun visor.To use the mirror, rotate the sun visor down and swingthe mirror cover upward. The lights turn on automati-cally. Closing the mirror cover turns off the lights.

uconnect™ phone — IF EQUIPPED

Refer to “uconnect™ phone” in the uconnect™ UserManual located on the DVD for further details.

VOICE RECOGNITION (VR) SYSTEM — IFEQUIPPEDRefer to “Voice Recognition (VR)” in the uconnect™ UserManual located on the DVD for further details.

BLIND SPOT MONITORING — IF EQUIPPEDThe Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) system uses two radar-based sensors, located inside the rear bumper fascia, todetect Highway licensable vehicles (automobiles, trucks,motorcycles etc.) that enter the blind spot zones from therear/front/side of the vehicle.

Illuminated Mirror


When the vehicle is started, the BSM warning light willbe momentarily illuminated in both outside rear viewmirrors to let the driver know that the system is opera-tional. The BSM system sensors operate when the vehicleis in any forward gear or REVERSE and enters stand bymode when the vehicle is in PARK.

The BSM detection zone covers approximately one laneon both sides of the vehicle (11 ft or 3.35 m). The zonestarts at the outside rear view mirror and extends ap-proximately 20 ft (6 m) to the rear of the vehicle. The BSMsystem monitors the detection zones on both sides of thevehicle when the vehicle speed has reached approxi-mately 6 mph (10 km/h) or higher and will alert thedriver of vehicles in these areas.NOTE:• The BSM system does NOT alert the driver about rapidly

approaching vehicles that are outside the detectionzones.

• The BSM system detection zone DOES NOT change ifyour vehicle is towing a trailer. Therefore, visuallyverify the adjacent lane is clear for both your vehicleand trailer before making a lane change. If the traileror other object (i.e., bicycle, sports equipment) extendsbeyond the side of your vehicle, this may result in theBSM warning light remaining illuminated the entiretime the vehicle is in a forward gear.

Rear Detection Zones

3


The area on the rear fascia where the radar sensors arelocated must remain free of snow, ice, and dirt/roadcontamination so that the BSM system can functionproperly. Do not block the area of the rear fascia wherethe radar sensors are located with foreign objects(bumper stickers, bicycle racks, etc.).

The BSM system notifies the driver of objects in thedetection zones by illuminating the BSM warning lightlocated in the outside mirrors.

Sensor Locations

BSM Warning Light


The BSM system can also be configured to sound anaudible (chime) alert and mute the radio to notify thedriver of objects that have entered the detection zones.Refer to “Modes Of Operation” in this section.

The BSM system monitors the detection zone from threedifferent entry points (Side, Rear, Front) while driving tosee if an alert is necessary. The BSM system will issue analert during these types of zone entries.

Entering From The SideVehicles that move into your adjacent lanes from eitherside of the vehicle.

Side Monitoring

3


Entering From The RearVehicles that come up from behind your vehicle on eitherside and enter the rear detection zone with a relativespeed of less than 30 mph (48 km/h).

Overtaking TrafficIf you pass another vehicle slowly (with a relative speedless than 10 mph (16 km/h) and the vehicle remains inthe blind spot for approximately 1.5 seconds, the warninglight will be illuminated. If the difference in speedbetween the two vehicles is greater than 10 mph(16 km/h), the warning light will not illuminate.

Rear Monitoring

Overtaking/Approaching


The BSM system is designed not to issue an alert onstationary objects such as guardrails, posts, walls, foliage,berms, etc. However, occasionally the system may alerton such objects. This is normal operation and yourvehicle does not require service.

Overtaking/Passing Stationary Objects

3


The BSM system will not alert you of objects that aretraveling in the opposite direction of the vehicle inadjacent lanes.

WARNING!

The Blind Spot Monitoring system is only an aid tohelp detect objects in the blind spot zones. The BSMsystem is not designed to detect pedestrians, bicy-clists, or animals. Even if your vehicle is equippedwith the BSM system, always check your vehiclesmirrors, glance over your shoulder, and use your turnsignal before changing lanes. Failure to do so canresult in serious injury or death.

Rear Cross PathThe Rear Cross Path (RCP) feature is intended to aid thedriver when backing out of parking spaces where theirvision of oncoming vehicles may be blocked. Proceedslowly and cautiously out of the parking space until therear end of the vehicle is exposed. The RCP system willthen have a clear view of the cross traffic and if anoncoming vehicle is detected, alert the driver.

Opposing Traffic


RCP monitors the rear detection zones on both sides ofthe vehicle, for objects that are moving toward the side ofthe vehicle with a minimum speed of approximately 1 to2 mph (1 km/h to 3 km/h), to objects moving a maxi-mum of approximately 10 mph (16 km/h), such as inparking lot situations.

NOTE: In a parking lot situation, oncoming vehicles canbe obscured by vehicles parked on either side. If thesensors are blocked by other structures or vehicles, thesystem will not be able to alert the driver.

When RCP is on and the vehicle is in REVERSE, thedriver is alerted using both the visual and audiblealarms, including radio muting.

WARNING!

RCP is not a Back Up Aid system. It is intended to beused to help a driver detect an oncoming vehicle in aparking lot situation. Drivers must be careful whenbacking up, even when using RCP. Always checkcarefully behind your vehicle, look behind you, andbe sure to check for pedestrians, animals, othervehicles, obstructions, and blind spots before back-ing up. Failure to do so can result in serious injury ordeath.

RCP Detection Zones

3


Modes Of OperationThree selectable modes of operation are available in theElectronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). Refer to“Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)under �Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” inSection 4.

Blind Spot AlertWhen operating in Blind Spot Alert mode, the BSMsystem will provide a visual alert in the appropriate sideview mirror based on a detected object. However, whenthe system is operating in RCP, the system will respondwith both visual and audible alerts when a detectedobject is present. Whenever an audible alert is requested,the radio is muted.

Blind Spot Alert Lights/ChimeWhen operating in Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime, theBSM system will provide a visual alert in the appropriateside view mirror based on a detected object. If the turnsignal is then activated, and it corresponds to an alertpresent on that side of the vehicle, an audible chime willalso be sounded. Whenever a turn signal and detectedobject are present on the same side at the same time, boththe visual and audio alerts will be issued. In addition tothe audible alert the radio (if on) will also be muted.

NOTE:• Whenever an audible alert is requested by the BSM

system, the radio is also muted.

• If the Hazard Flashers are on, the system will requestthe appropriate visual alert only.

When the system is in RCP, the system shall respondwith both visual and audible alerts when a detected


object is present. Whenever an audible alert is re-quested, the radio is also muted. Turn/hazard signalstatus is ignored; the RCP state always requests thechime.

Blind Spot Alert OffWhen the BSM system is turned off there will be novisual or audible alerts from either the BSM or RCPsystems.

NOTE: The BSM system will store the current operatingmode when the vehicle is shut off. Each time the vehicleis started the previously stored mode will be recalled andused.

SEATSSeats are a primary part of the Occupant Restraint Systemof the vehicle. They need to be used properly for safeoperation of the vehicle.

WARNING!

• DO NOT allow people to ride in any area of yourvehicle that is not equipped with seats and seatbelts. In a collision, people riding in these areasare more likely to be seriously injured or killed.

• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat andusing a seat belt properly.

3


Manual Front And Second Row Seat AdjusterThe adjusting bar is located under the front of the seat.Pull the bar upward and move the seat to the desiredposition. Release the bar to lock the seat into position.Using body pressure, move forward and rearward on theseat to be sure the seat adjusters have latched.

WARNING!

Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving isdangerous. The sudden movement of the seat couldcause you to lose control. The seat belt might not beproperly adjusted and you could be injured. Adjustany seat only while the vehicle is parked.

Manual Reclining Seats — If EquippedThe recliner control lever is on the outboard side of theseat. To recline, lean forward slightly, lift the lever, thenpush back to the desired position and release the lever.Lean forward and lift the lever to return the seatback toits normal position. Using body pressure, lean forwardand rearward on the seat to be sure the seatback haslatched.

Manual Seat Adjuster


WARNING!

DO NOT ride with the seatback reclined so that theshoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest.In a collision you could slide under the seat belt andbe seriously or fatally injured. Use the recliner onlywhen the vehicle is parked.

Manual Reclining Seat Control

3


Manual Lumbar Adjust Lever — If EquippedThe lumbar adjustment lever is located on the outboardside of the seat. To increase the support, rotate the leverdownward. To decrease the support, rotate the handleupward.

WARNING!


Manual Lumbar Lever


Eight–Way Power Seats — If EquippedThe power seat switches are located on the outboard sideof the seats. The front switch controls the up/down,forward/rearward and tilt adjustment. The rear switchcontrols the recline adjustment of the seatback.

WARNING!


CAUTION!

DO NOT place any article under a power seat orimpede its ability to move as it may cause damage tothe seat controls. Seat travel may become limited ifmovement is stopped by an obstruction in the seat’spath.

Driver Power Seat Switch

1 — Front Switch 2 — Rear Switch

3


Heated Seats — If EquippedThis feature heats the front driver and passenger seats.The controls for front heated seats are located on thecenter instrument panel area.

After turning the ignition ON, you can choose from High,Low, or Off heat settings. Amber indicator lights in eachswitch indicate the level of heat in use. Two indicatorlights will illuminate for High, one for Low, and none forOff.

Press the switch once to select High-level heat-ing. Press the switch a second time to selectLow-level heating. Press the switch a third timeto shut the heating elements Off.

Second row heated seat switches are located in thesliding side door handle trim panels and function thesame as front switches.

Heated Seat Switch


WARNING!

Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skinbecause of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaus-tion or other physical condition must exercise carewhen using the seat heater. It may cause burns evenat low temperatures, especially if used for longperiods of time. DO NOT place anything on the seatthat insulates against heat, such as a blanket orcushion. This may cause the seat heater to overheat.

Adjusting Active Head RestraintsActive Head Restraints can reduce the risk of injury inthe event of a rear impact. The Active Head Restraintshould be adjusted so the top of the head restraint islocated above the top of your ear.

Adjusted Head Restraint

3


To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the headrestraint (on some models, you may need to press thepush button). To lower the head restraint, press the pushbutton, located at the base of the head restraint, and pushdownward on the head restraint.

For comfort the Active Head Restraints can be tiltedforward and backward. To tilt the head restraint closer tothe back of your head, pull outward on the bottom of thehead restraint. Push rearward on the bottom of the headrestraint to move the head restraint away from yourhead.

Push ButtonActive Head Restraint (Normal Position)


NOTE:• The head restraints should only be removed by quali-

fied technicians, for service purposes only. If either ofthe head restraints require removal, see your autho-rized dealer.

• In the event of deployment of an Active Head Re-straint, refer to “Resetting Active Head Restraints(AHR)” under “Occupant Restraints” in Section 2.

WARNING!

• Driving a vehicle with the head restraints removedor improperly adjusted could cause serious injuryor death in the event of a collision. The headrestraints should always be checked prior to oper-ating the vehicle and never adjusted while thevehicle is in motion. Always adjust the headrestraints when the vehicle is in PARK.

• Do not place items over the top of the Active HeadRestraint, such as coats or seat covers. These itemsmay interfere with the operation of the ActiveHead Restraint in the event of an accident andcould result in serious injury or death.

Active Head Restraint (Tilted)

3


Stow ’n Go� Seating — If EquippedOn vehicles equipped with Stow ’n Go� seating, thesecond and third row seats may be folded into the floorfor convenient storage.

To Fold Second Row Seats

1. Move the front seat fully forward.

2. Lower the head restraints and raise the armrests on thesecond row seat.

3. Slide the storage bin locking mechanism to the�LOCK� position and then pull up on the storage bin latchto open the cover.

4. Pull up on the seatback recliner lever located on theoutboard side of the seat and fold the seatback down. Toassure the seatback is latched in the folded position,additional downward pressure on the seatback may berequired when folding.

Storage Bin Cover Lock Release


5. Pull rearward on the release strap located at the rear ofthe seat and tumble the seat forward into the storage bin.

6. Close the storage bin cover.Second Row Seatback Release Lever Second Row Seat Release Strap

3


CAUTION!

The storage bin cover must be locked and flat toavoid damage from contact with the front seat tracks,which have minimal clearance to the cover.

WARNING!

In an accident, serious injury could result if the seatstorage bin covers are not properly latched.• DO NOT drive the vehicle with the storage bin

covers open.• Keep the storage bin covers closed and latched

while the vehicle is in motion.• DO NOT use a storage bin latch as a tie down.

To Unfold Second Row Seats

1. Pull up on the storage bin latch to open the cover.

2. Pull up on the handle to lift the seat out of the storagebin and push the seat rearward to latch the seat anchors.

3. Pull upward on the seatback recliner lever, located onthe outboard side of the seat, to return the seatback to itsfull upright position.

Second Row Seat Release Handle


4. Adjust the head restraint to the desired position, closethe storage bin cover and slide the storage bin lockingmechanism to the �Unlocked� position.

Easy Access SeatingThe second row Stow ’n Go� seats can be tilted forwardfor easy access to the third row seat or rear cargo area.

To tilt the seat, pull forward on the release strap locatedon the front of the seat between the seatback and seatcushion and tilt the seat fully forward.

To return the seat to its upright position, push rearwardon the seatback until it latches. Always ensure that it isfully latched.

Second Row Seatback Release Lever

Tilting Second Row Stow ’n Go� Seat

3


WARNING!

In the event of a collision you could be injured if theseat is not fully latched.

Swivel ’n Go™ Premium Seating — If EquippedPremium second row Swivel ’n Go™ Seating featuresinclude:

• A table that installs between the second and third rowseats. The table disassembles and stows in the hiddensecond row floor storage bin

• Seats rotate to face forward or rearward

• Seat belts are integrated into the swivel seats

• Dual folding armrests

• A side storage pocket that will accommodate a phoneor handheld game

• Seats are removable

Swivel ’n Go™ Seating Features

1 — Moveable Armrest 4 — Fore-Aft Adjustment2 — Seatback Release 5 — Seat Release3 — Swivel Release


WARNING!

When the seatback release handle is lifted, the seat-back will rotate forward. To avoid injury, if you arenot seated in the seat, stay clear from the area in thepath of the rotating seatback.

To swivel the seat: Pull the lower handle on the outboardside of the seat and push the side of the seatback to beginrotation. Once the seat begins to rotate, the handle maybe released. The seat locks in position once reaching theforward or rearward positions only.

Seatbacks fold forward on an angle, not flat. This allowsthe seats to swivel when the seatbacks are folded.

Swivel Release

3


WARNING!

Failure to comply with the following conditionscould result in serious injury or even death:• NEVER place any child seat or infant carrier in the

Swivel ’n Go™ seat while it is in the rearwardfacing position.

• The swivel seat should be locked in the forwardposition when using any child seat or infantcarriers, with the vehicle in motion.

• Occupants riding in Swivel ’n Go™ seating mustbe wearing their seat belt and the seat must belocked in either the forward-facing or rearward-facing position.

• Make sure the Swivel ’n Go™ seat is in a lockedposition with the release handle fully engaged.Test the seat after it is locked to see that it doesn’tswivel.

Removing Swivel ’n Go™ Premium Seating — IfEquipped

1. Remove any obstructions from the floor behind theseat, and stow the third row seat.

2. Pull up on the release bar located at the bottom frontedge of the swivel seat.

Release Bar


3. From behind the seat, lift up on the rear of the seatcushion while pulling the seat in a rearward direction.

4. Remove the seat from vehicle through the liftgate.Rollers are part of the seat frame and will ease theremoval process.

5. Lower the release handle located at the bottom frontedge of the seat.

Each seat weighs about 90 lbs (81 kg).

NOTE: Electrical contacts for the available heated seatsautomatically disengage or engage as the seat is removedor installed. The contacts slide past each other as the seatis rolled to and from the strikers.

When reinstalling the seat, make certain to lower therelease handle to ensure the seat is latched securely.

WARNING!

In a collision, you or others in your vehicle could beinjured if seats are not properly latched to their floorattachments. Always be sure the seats are fullylatched.

3


Swivel ’n Go™ Premium Seating Table — IfEquippedThe Swivel ’n Go™ Seating Table consists of an easilyassembled post and top.

The table and leg are stored beneath the floor when not inuse. To install the table follow these steps:

1. Open the floor storage cover in front of the second rowseats.

2. Remove the pole and table top by loosening the hookand loop straps.

Second Row Seating and TableTable and Leg Storage


3. Swivel the second row seats so they are facing the rear.

4. Insert pole into base by aligning the lock button intonotch of the base.

5. Twist the pole in a clockwise rotation until it stops.

NOTE: You will hear an audible “click” when the lockbutton engages the base.

6. Place the table top over the installed pole aligningwith the mating feature of the underside of the table top.Apply pressure on the table top and press downward.

NOTE: You will hear an audible “click” when the tablelatch engages the pole.

WARNING!

Failure to comply with the following conditionscould result in serious injury or even death:• DO NOT install the table while vehicle is in

motion.• NEVER drive the vehicle with only the pole in-

stalled.

(Continued)

Installing Table Leg Into Base

1 — Table Base 2 — Lock/Release Button

3


WARNING! (Continued)• DO NOT place heavy or sharp objects on table.• DO NOT place liquid drinks on the table, use

available cupholders.• Second row seats must be locked in the rearward

facing position before installing the table.

To separate the table top from the pole, follow thesesteps:

1. Locate the release latch on the underside of the tabletop.

Table Top Release


2. Pull horizontally on the latch to activate the releasefrom the pole.

3. While pulling on the latch, pull upward to remove thetable top from the pole.

NOTE: The table top should be removed from the legprior to removing the leg from its mounting base.

4. Locate the release button on the pole. Press the releasebutton firmly to activate the release from the base.

5. While pressing the release button, twist the pole in acounterclockwise rotation until it stops. Pull upward toremove the pole from the base.

6. Place the pole on the underside of the table top andsecure with the hook and loop straps.

7. Once the pole and table top are secured, you mayplace them in the floor storage bin in front of the secondrow seats.

NOTE: Always store the table and pole in the floorstorage bin when not in use.

Plastic Grocery Bag Retainer HooksRetainer hooks which will hold plastic grocery baghandles are built into the seatbacks of all rear seats andsome front seats. The floor supports the partial weight ofthe bagged goods.

3


Second Row Bench Seat — If EquippedWhile the bench seat does not stow in the floor, it isremovable for added cargo space. Release levers arelocated on the rear leg assemblies, near the floor. Toremove the seat, squeeze each release handle and rotatedownwards to deploy the wheels. A lock indicator buttonpops up when the seat is unlocked. The seat assemblycan now be removed from the vehicle and moved on itsEasy Out� Rollers.

To reinstall the seat, align the seat into the detent posi-tions on the floor. Squeeze the release handle and rotateupward until the lock indicator button returns into thehandle.

Release Handles


WARNING!

If not properly latched, the bench seats could becomeloose. Personal injuries could result. After reinstall-ing these seats, be sure the red indicator button onthe release handles return into the handles.

Third Row Power Seat — If EquippedThe third row power seat offers the following features:

• The seatbacks can be folded forward for additionalcargo space if needed.

• Head restraints can be stowed with the seat.

• Tailgate mode flips the seat rearward to face out thetailgate.

The power recline feature, located on the side of the seatcushion, adjusts the seatback angle forward/rearwardfor occupant comfort.

Third Row Power Seat Switch — If EquippedA one-touch power folding seat switch is located in theleft rear trim panel as part of a switch bank.

Third Row Power Seat Switch

3


The switch is only functional when the liftgate is openand the vehicle is in PARK.

The rear switch bank allows multiple power folding andunfolding positions for the third row seats.

Left and right third row seats can be folded individuallyor together. The third row power folding seat adjusts tothe following positions using the switch bank located onthe left rear trim panel:

One Touch Folding Seat Third Row

Rear Panel Power Switch Bank

1 — Open to Normal 4 — Fold Flat2 — Stow 5 — Right/Left Seats3 — Tailgate 5 — Both Seats


NOTE:• Disconnect the center shoulder belt from the small

buckle and lower the head restraints before attemptingto fold/stow the power third row seats.

• To abort seat operation while seat is in motion, press adifferent seat position selector switch to stop the seat.Once the seat stops moving, then the desired positioncan be selected.

• The third row power seat system includes obstacledetection for safe operation. When the system detectsan obstacle, the motors will stop and reverse themotion a short distance to move the seat away fromthe obstacle. Should this occur, remove the obstacleand press the button again, for the desired position.

To Fold Third Row Seats Manually — If Equipped

1. Lower the head restraint to its full down position.

2. Pull release strap marked “1” located on the rear of theseat to lower the seatback.

3. Pull release strap marked “2” to release the anchors.

4. Pull release strap marked “3” and tumble the seatrearward into the storage bin.

Folding Third Row Seat Strap

3


To Unfold Third Row Seats

1. Pull up on the assist strap to lift the seat out of thestorage bin and push the seat forward until the anchorslatch.

2. Pull release strap marked “1” to unlock the recliner.

3. Pulling strap “3” releases the seatback to return to itsfull upright position.

4. Adjust the head restraint to the desired position.

WARNING!

In a collision, you or others in your vehicle could beinjured if seats are not properly latched to their floorattachments. Always be sure the seats are fullylatched.

Tailgate Mode

1. Pull release strap “2”, then pull release strap “3” torotate the entire seat rearward.

2. To restore the seat to its upright position, lift up on theseatback and push forward until the anchors latch.

Tailgate Positioning Release Straps 2 and 3


WARNING!

To avoid serious injury or death, NEVER operate thevehicle with occupants in the third row seat while inthe tailgate mode.

DRIVER MEMORY SEAT — IF EQUIPPEDThe Memory Buttons 1 and 2 on the driver’s door panelcan be programmed to recall the driver’s seat, driver’soutside mirror, adjustable brake and accelerator pedals,and radio station preset settings. Your Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) transmitters can also be programmed torecall the same positions when the UNLOCK button ispressed. Your vehicle may have been delivered with two RKE

transmitters. Only one RKE transmitter can be linked toeach of the memory positions.

Driver Memory Switch

3


Setting Memory Positions and Linking RKETransmitter to Memory

NOTE: Each time the SET (S) button and a numberedbutton (1 or 2) is pressed, you erase the memory settingsfor that button and store a new one.

1. Insert the ignition key and turn the ignition switch tothe ON position.

2. Press the driver door MEMORY button number 1 ifyou are setting the memory for driver 1, or buttonnumber 2 if you are setting the memory for driver 2. Thesystem will recall any stored settings. Wait for the systemto complete the memory recall before continuing toStep 3.

3. Adjust the driver’s seat, recliner, and driver’s side-view mirror to the desired positions.

4. Adjust the brake and accelerator pedals to the desiredpositions.

5. Turn on the radio and set the radio station presets (upto 10 AM and 10 FM stations can be set).

6. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position andremove the key.

7. Press and release the SET (S) button located on thedriver’s door.

8. Within five seconds, press and release MEMORYbutton 1 or 2 on the driver’s door. The next step must beperformed within 10 seconds if you desire to also use aRKE transmitter to recall memory positions.

9. Press and release the LOCK button on one of the RKEtransmitters.

10. Insert the ignition key and turn the ignition switch tothe ON position.

11. Select �Remote Linked to Memory� in the ElectronicVehicle Information Center (EVIC) and enter “Yes”. Refer


to the “Customer-Programmable Features” in the “Elec-tronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” section formore information.

12. Repeat the above steps to set the next Memoryposition using the other numbered Memory button or tolink another RKE transmitter to memory.

Memory Position Recall

NOTE: The vehicle must be in PARK to recall memorypositions. If a recall is attempted when the vehicle is notin PARK, a message will be displayed in the EVIC.

To recall the memory settings for driver one, pressMEMORY button 1 on the driver’s door or the UNLOCKbutton on the RKE transmitter linked to memory position 1.

To recall the memory setting for driver two, pressMEMORY button 2 on the driver’s door or the UNLOCKbutton on the RKE transmitter linked to Memory Position 2.

A recall can be cancelled by pressing any of theMEMORY buttons on the driver’s door during a recall (S,1, or 2). When a recall is cancelled, the driver’s seat,driver’s mirror, and the pedals stop moving. A delay ofone second will occur before another recall can beselected.

To Disable RKE Transmitter Linked to Memory

1. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position andremove the key.

2. Press and release MEMORY button 1. The system willrecall any memory settings stored in position 1. Wait forthe system to complete the memory recall before continu-ing to Step 3.

3. Press and release the memory SET (S) button locatedon the driver’s door. A chime will sound signaling thatyou are in the memory set mode.

3


4. Within five seconds, press and release MEMORYbutton 1 on the driver’s door. A chime will soundsignaling to you that the driver memory has been set.

5. Within five seconds, press and release the UNLOCKbutton on the RKE transmitter. A chime will soundsignaling to you that the RKE transmitter link has beensuccessfully disabled.

To disable another RKE transmitter linked to eitherMemory Position, repeat Steps 1 to 5 for each RKEtransmitter.

NOTE: Once programmed, all RKE transmitters linkedto memory can be easily enabled or disabled at one time.Refer to the Remote Linked to Memory �Customer-Programmable Features� in the Electronic Vehicle Infor-mation Center (EVIC) for more information.

Easy Entry/Exit Seat(Available with Memory Seat ONLY)This feature provides automatic driver seat positioning toenhance driver mobility when entering and exiting thevehicle.

The distance the driver seat moves depends on whereyou have the driver seat positioned when you remove thekey from the ignition switch.

• When you remove the key from the ignition switch,the driver seat will move about 2.4 in (60 mm)rearward if the driver seat position is greater than orequal to 2.7 in (67.7 mm) forward of the rear stop. Theseat will return to its previously set position when youinsert the key into the ignition switch and turn it out ofthe LOCK position.

• When you remove the key from the ignition switch thedriver seat will move to a position 0.3 in (7.7 mm)forward of the rear stop if the driver seat position is


between 0.9 – 2.7 in (22.7 – 67.7 mm) forward of therear stop. The seat will return to its previously setposition when you insert the key into the ignitionswitch and turn it out of the LOCK position.

• The Easy Entry/Easy Exit feature is disabled when thedriver seat position is less than 0.9 in (22.7 mm)forward of the rear stop. At this position, there is nobenefit to the driver by moving the seat for Easy Exitor Easy Entry.

Each stored memory setting will have an associated EasyEntry and Easy Exit Position.

NOTE: The Easy Entry/Easy Exit feature can be en-abled or disabled through the programmable features inthe Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). If yourvehicle is not equipped with an EVIC, your dealershipcan activate/deactivate this feature for you. For details,refer to “Automatically Move Seat Back on Exit,” sectionof this manual.

TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOODTo open the hood, two latches must be released.

1. Pull the hood release lever located on the instrumentpanel, below the steering column.

Hood Release

3


2. Move to the front of the vehicle and look inside thecenter of the hood opening. Locate, then push the safetycatch lever to the right, while raising the hood at the sametime.

Use the hood prop rod to secure the hood in the openposition.

CAUTION!

To prevent possible damage, do not slam the hood toclose it. Lower the hood until it is open approxi-mately 12 in (30 cm) and then drop it. This shouldsecure both latches. Never drive your vehicle unlessthe hood is fully closed, with both latches engaged.

WARNING!

If the hood is not fully latched, it could fly up whenthe vehicle is moving and block your forward vision.You could have a collision. Be sure all hood latchesare fully latched before driving.Safety Catch Location


LIGHTSAll of the lights, except the Hazard Warning lights,headlight high beams and flash-to-pass, are controlled byswitches to the left of the steering column on the instru-ment panel.

Interior LightingInterior lights are turned on when a door or liftgate isopened, the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter isactivated, or when the dimmer control is moved to theextreme top.

The interior lights will automatically turn off in approxi-mately 10 minutes for the first activation and 90 secondsevery activation thereafter until the engine is started, ifone of the following occur:

• A door, sliding door or the liftgate is left open

• Any overhead reading light is left on

NOTE: The key must be out of the ignition switch or theignition switch must be in the OFF position for thisfeature to operate.

Headlight Switch With Halo Control Assembly

3


Dome Light PositionsRotate the dimmer control completelyupward to the second detent (extremetop position) to turn on the interiorlights. The interior lights will remainon when the dimmer control is in thisposition.

Interior Lighting Defeat (Off)Rotate the dimmer control to the offposition (extreme bottom). The inte-rior lights will remain off when thedoors or liftgate are open.

Parade Mode (Daytime Brightness Feature)Rotate the dimmer control to the firstdetent. This feature brightens the odom-eter, radio and overhead displays whenthe parking lights or headlights are on.

Dimmer ControlWith the parking lights or headlightson, rotating the dimmer control for theinterior lights on the instrument panelupward will increase the brightness ofthe instrument panel lights.


Halo Lights — If EquippedHalo lights are strategically placed soft lighting that helpto illuminate specific areas to aid the occupants inlocating specific features while driving at night.

To activate the Halo lights, push in the Haloswitch control knob. Pressing the switch con-trol knob in a second time will turn the Halolights off.

Parking LightsTurn the headlight switch knob to the first detentto turn the parking lights on. This also turns on all

instrument panel lighting.

HeadlightsTurn the headlight switch knob to the seconddetent to turn the headlights and parking lightson. This also turns on all instrument panellighting.

To change the brightness of the instrument panel lights,rotate the dimmer control up or down.

3


Automatic Headlights — If EquippedThis system automatically turns your headlights on or offbased on ambient light levels. To turn the system on, turnthe headlight switch to the extreme counterclockwiseposition aligning the indicator with the “A” on theheadlight switch. When the system is on, the HeadlightTime Delay feature is also on. This means your headlightswill stay on for up to 90 seconds after you turn theignition switch OFF. To turn the Automatic System off,turn the headlight switch clockwise to the “O” offposition.

NOTE: The engine must be running before the head-lights will come on in the Automatic mode.

Automatic Headlights


Headlights On With Wipers — If EquippedWhen your headlights are in the Automatic mode and theengine is running, the headlights will automatically turnon when the wiper system is also turned on. Headlightson when windshield wipers are on may be found onvehicles equipped with an automatic headlight system.Refer to the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)in Section 4 under “Personal Settings (Customer-Pro-grammable Features)” for more information.

Headlight Delay — If EquippedThis feature provides the safety of headlight illuminationfor up to 90 seconds after exiting your vehicle.

To activate the delay feature, turn OFF the ignition switchwhile the headlights are still on. Then turn off theheadlights within 45 seconds. The 90 second delay inter-val begins when headlight switch is turned off. If theheadlights or parking lights are turned back on or theignition switch is turned ON, the delay will be cancelled.

When exiting the vehicle the driver can choose to havethe headlights remain on for 30, 60, or 90 seconds or notremain on. To change the timer setting, see your autho-rized dealer.

The headlight delay time is programmable on vehiclesequipped with an EVIC. Refer to “Delay Turning Head-lights Off,” under “Personal Settings (Customer-Pro-grammable Features)” under “Electronic Vehicle Infor-mation Center (EVIC)” in Section 4.

If the headlights are turned off before the ignition, theywill turn off in the normal manner.

NOTE: The headlights must be turned off within 45 sec-onds of turning the ignition OFF to activate this feature.

Lights-On ReminderIf the headlights or the parking lights are left on, or if thedimmer control is in the extreme top position after theignition switch is turned OFF, a chime will sound whenthe driver’s door is opened.

3


Daytime Running Lights(Canada/Fleet Vehicles Only)The headlights on your vehicle will illuminate when theengine is started and the transmission is in any gearexcept PARK. This provides a constant lights on condi-tion until the ignition is turned OFF. The lights illuminateat less than 50% of normal intensity. If the parking brakeis applied, the Daytime Running Lights (DRL) will turnoff. Also, if a turn signal is activated, the DRL lamp on thesame side of the vehicle will turn off for the duration ofthe turn signal activation. Once the turn signal is nolonger active, the DRL lamp will illuminate.

Front Fog Lights — If EquippedTo activate the front fog lights, turn on the parkinglights or the low beam headlights and push in theheadlight switch control knob. Pressing the head-

light switch control knob in a second time will turn thefront fog lights off.

Battery ProtectionThis feature provides battery protection to avoid wearingdown the battery if the headlights, parking lights, orfront fog lights are left on for extended periods of timewhen the ignition switch is in the LOCK position. Aftereight minutes of the ignition switch being in the LOCKposition and the headlight switch in any position otherthan OFF or AUTO, the lights will turn off automaticallyuntil the next cycle of the ignition switch or headlightswitch.

The battery protection feature will be disabled if theignition switch is turned to any other position other thanLOCK during the three minute delay.


Multifunction LeverThe multifunction lever is located on the left side of thesteering column.

The multifunction lever controls the:

• Turn Signals

• Headlight Beams Low/High

• Flash-To-Pass (Optical Horn)

• Front and Rear Wipers — Washer Functions

Turn SignalsMove the multifunction lever up or down and the arrowson each side of the instrument cluster flash to showproper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights.

NOTE: If either light remains on and does not flash, orthere is a very fast flash rate, check for a defective outsidelight bulb. If an indicator fails to light when the lever ismoved, it would suggest that the indicator bulb isdefective.

Turn Signals

3


Lane Change AssistTap the lever up or down once, without moving beyondthe detent, and the turn signal (right or left) will flashthree times then automatically turn off.

Turn Signal WarningIf the vehicle electronics sense that the vehicle hastraveled at over 18 mph (29 km/h) for approximately1 mile (1.6 km) with the turn signals on, a chime willsound to alert the driver.

High/Low Beam SwitchWhen the headlights are turned on, pushing the multi-function lever toward the instrument panel will switchfrom low beams to high beams. Pulling back to theneutral position returns the headlights to the low beamoperation.

Flash-To-PassYou can signal another vehicle with your headlights bylightly pulling the multifunction lever toward you. Thiswill turn on the high beam headlights until the lever isreleased.

SmartBeam™ — If EquippedThe SmartBeam™ system provides increased forwardlighting at night by automating high beam controlthrough the use of a digital camera mounted on theinside rearview mirror. This camera detects vehicle spe-cific light and automatically switches from high beams tolow beams until the approaching vehicle is out of view.

To Activate

1. Select “Automatic High Beams — ON” through theEVIC. Refer to “Automatic High Beams,” “PersonalSettings (Customer- Programmable Features)” under“Electronic Vehicle Information Center” in Section 4.


2. Rotate the headlight switch counterclockwise to theAUTO (A) position.

3. Push the multifunction lever away from you to switchthe headlights to the high beam position. Refer to “Mul-tifunction Lever” in this section.

NOTE: This system will not activate until the vehicle isat, or above, 25 mph (40 km/h).

To DeactivatePerform either of the following steps to deactivate theSmartBeam™ system.

1. Pull the multifunction lever toward you to switch theheadlights from the high beam to the low beam position.

2. Rotate the headlight switch clockwise from the AUTO(A) to the on position.

NOTE: Broken, muddy or obstructed headlights andtaillights of vehicles in the field of view will causeheadlights to remain on longer (closer to the vehicle).Also, dirt, film and other obstructions on the windshieldor camera lens will cause the system to functionimproperly.

WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERSThe wipers and washers are operated by a switch withinthe multifunction lever. Rotate the end of the multifunc-tion lever to select the desired wiper speed.

3


NOTE: Always remove any buildup of snow that pre-vents the windshield wiper blades from returning to theoff position. If the windshield wiper switch is turned offand the blades cannot return to the off position, damageto the wiper motor may occur.

1. Mist, Front Wiper and WasherPress the end of the multifunction lever inward to thefirst detent and release to clear the windshield. Pressingthe multifunction lever inward to the second detent willcause the washers to spray for a maximum of 10 seconds,or until the multifunction lever is released, and thewipers will cycle three times.

NOTE:• If the multifunction lever is pressed while in the delay

range, the wipers will operate for several seconds afterthe multifunction lever is released, and then resumethe intermittent interval previously selected.

• If the multifunction lever is pressed while in the offposition, the wipers will operate for approximatelytwo wipe cycles and automatically turn off.

Washer And Wiper Controls

1 — Front Mist/Washer 3 — Rear Wiper/Washer2 — Wiper Speeds


2. Intermittent, Low and High Speed WipersUse the intermittent wipers when weather conditionsmake a single wiping cycle, with a variable pause be-tween cycles, desirable. Rotate the end of the multifunc-tion lever to the first detent position, then turn the end ofthe multifunction lever to select the desired delay inter-val. The delay can be regulated from approximately twoseconds, to a maximum of 20 seconds between cycles.The time delay will be doubled if the vehicle speed is lessthan 10 mph (16 km/h).

Low-speed is achieved by rotating the multifunctionlever past the intermittent settings, to the first detent.

High-speed is achieved by rotating the multifunctionlever past the intermittent settings, to the second detent.

3. Rear Wiper and WasherRotating the rotary ring to the first detent activates therear intermittent wipers. To activate the washers, rotatethe rotary ring fully forward and the washers will sprayuntil the ring is released, and then resume the intermit-tent interval.

NOTE: Rear window wipers function in the intermittentwiper speed only.

WARNING!

Sudden loss of visibility through the windshieldcould lead to an accident. You might not see othervehicles or other obstacles. To avoid sudden icing ofthe windshield during freezing weather, warm thewindshield with defroster before and during wind-shield washer use.

3


Rain Sensing Wipers — If EquippedThis feature senses moisture on the windshield andautomatically activates the wipers for the driver. Thisfeature is especially useful for road splash or oversprayfrom the windshield washers of the vehicle ahead. Rotatethe end of the multifunction lever to one of the fiveintermittent wiper sensitivity settings to activate thisfeature.

The sensitivity of the system is adjustable from themultifunction lever. Wiper sensitivity position 3 has beencalibrated for best overall wiping sensitivity. If the opera-tor desires more wiping sensitivity, they may selectsensitivity positions 4 or 5. If the operator desires lesswiping sensitivity, they may select sensitivity positions 2or 1. Place the multifunction lever in the OFF positionwhen not using the system.

NOTE:• The Rain Sensing feature will not operate when the

wiper speed is in the low or high position.

• The Rain Sensing feature may not function properlywhen ice or dried saltwater is present on the wind-shield.

• Use of Rain-X� or products containing wax or siliconemay reduce rain sensor performance.

• The Rain Sensing feature can be turned on and offthrough the EVIC (if equipped). Refer to “PersonalSettings (Customer Programmable Features)” under“Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” inSection 4.


The Rain Sensing system has protective features for thewiper blades and arms. It will not operate under thefollowing conditions:

• Low Temperature Wipe Inhibit — The Rain Sensingfeature will not operate when the ignition is firstswitched ON, and the vehicle is stationary, and theoutside temperature is below 32°F (0°C), unless thewiper control on the multifunction lever is moved, orthe vehicle speed becomes greater than 0 mph(0 km/h), or the outside temperature rises abovefreezing.

• Neutral Wipe Inhibit — The Rain Sensing feature willnot operate when the ignition is ON, and the trans-mission shift lever is in the NEUTRAL position, andthe vehicle speed is less than 5 mph (8 km/h), unlessthe wiper control on the multifunction lever is movedor the shift lever is moved out of the NEUTRALposition.

• Remote Start Mode Inhibit — On vehicles equippedwith Remote Starting system, Rain Sensing wipers arenot operational when the vehicle is in the remote startmode. Once the operator is in the vehicle and hasplaced the ignition switch in the RUN position, rainsensing wiper operation can resume, if it has beenselected, and no other inhibit conditions (mentionedpreviously) exist.

TILT STEERING COLUMN — IF EQUIPPEDThis feature allows you to tilt the steering columnupward or downward. The tilt control lever is located onthe steering column, below the steering wheel.

3


To tilt the column, push the lever downward to theunlocked position. Move the steering column up ordown, as desired. Pull the lever upward to the lockedposition to lock the steering column firmly in place.

WARNING!

Tilting the steering column while the vehicle ismoving is dangerous. Without a stable steering col-umn, you could lose control of the vehicle and havean accident. Adjust the column only while the ve-hicle is stopped. Be sure it is locked before driving.

ADJUSTABLE PEDALS — IF EQUIPPEDThis feature allows both the brake and accelerator pedalsto move toward, or away, from the driver to provideimproved position with the steering wheel. The adjust-able pedal system is designed to allow a greater range ofdriver comfort for steering wheel tilt and seat positions.The switch is located on the left side of the steeringcolumn.

Tilt Steering Column Lever

1 — Locked Position2 — Unlocked Position


Press the button forward to move the pedals forward(toward the front of the vehicle).

Press the button rearward to move the pedals rearward(toward the driver).

• The pedals can be adjusted with the ignition OFF.

• The pedals can be adjusted while driving.

• The pedals cannot be adjusted when the vehicle is inREVERSE or when the Electronic Speed Control Sys-tem is on. The following messages will be displayedon vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle In-formation System (EVIC) if the pedals are attempted tobe adjusted when the system is locked out (“Adjust-able Pedal Disabled — Cruise Control Engaged” or“Adjustable Pedal Disabled — Vehicle In Reverse”.

Adjustable Pedal Switch

3


CAUTION!

Do not place any article under the adjustable pedalsor impede its ability to move, as it may cause damageto the pedal controls. Pedal travel may become lim-ited if movement is stopped by an obstruction in theadjustable pedal’s path.

WARNING!

Do not adjust the pedals while the vehicle is moving.You could lose control and have an accident. Alwaysadjust the pedals while the vehicle is parked.

ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL — IF EQUIPPEDWhen engaged, Electronic Speed Control takes over theaccelerator operation at speeds greater than 25 mph(40 km/h).

NOTE: In order to ensure proper operation, the Elec-tronic Speed Control System has been designed to shutdown if multiple Speed Control functions are operatedsimultaneously. If this occurs, the Electronic Speed Con-trol System can be reactivated by pushing the ElectronicSpeed Control ON/OFF button and resetting the desiredvehicle set speed.

Electronic Speed Control Lever


To ActivatePush the ON/OFF button (located in the end of the lever)once, and the cruise indicator light (located in the mes-sage window of the odometer) will illuminate, showingthat the Electronic Speed Control system is on. To turnthe Electronic Speed Control system off, push the ON/OFF button a second time, and both the Electronic SpeedControl system and indicator will turn off.

WARNING!

Leaving the Electronic Speed Control system onwhen not in use is dangerous. You could accidentlyset the system or cause it to go faster than you want.You could lose control and have an accident. Alwaysleave the Electronic Speed Control system off whenyou are not using it.

To Set At A Desired SpeedWhen the vehicle has reached the desired speed, pressthe SET lever downward and then release. Lift your footoff the accelerator and the vehicle will operate at theselected speed.

Deactivating Electronic Speed ControlA soft tap on the brake pedal or pulling the ElectronicSpeed Control lever (CANCEL) toward you will deacti-vate the Electronic Speed Control without erasing the setspeed memory. Pushing the ON/OFF button to the OFFposition or turning OFF the ignition erases the set speedmemory.

Resuming SpeedTo resume a previously set speed, raise the ElectronicSpeed Control lever (RESUME ACCEL) upward, andrelease. Resume can be used at any speed above 25 mph(40 km/h).

3


Varying The Speed SettingWhen the Electronic Speed Control is set, you can in-crease speed by pushing up and holding the ElectronicSpeed Control lever in RESUME ACCEL. If the lever isheld in the RESUME ACCEL position, the set speed willcontinue to increase in 5 mph(10 km/h) increments untilthe lever is released. When the Electronic Speed Controllever is released, a new set speed will be established.

Tapping the Electronic Speed Control lever to RESUMEACCEL once will result in a 1 mph (1.6 km/h) speedincrease. Each time the Electronic Speed Control lever istapped speed increases, so tapping the Electronic SpeedControl lever three times will increase speed by 3 mph(4.8 km/h), etc.

To decrease speed while Electronic Speed Control is set,push down and hold the Electronic Speed Control leverin SET DECEL. If the lever is continually held in the SETDECEL position, the set speed will continue to decrease

in 5 mph (10 km/h) increments until the lever is released.Release the Electronic Speed Control lever when thedesired speed is reached, and a new set speed will beestablished.

Tapping the Electronic Speed Control lever to SET DE-CEL once will result in a 1 mph (1.6 km/h) speeddecrease. Each time the Electronic Speed Control lever istapped, speed decreases.

Accelerating To PassPress the accelerator as you normally would. When thepedal is released, the vehicle will return to the set speed.

NOTE: The Electronic Speed Control system maintainsspeed up and down hills. A slight speed change onmoderate hills is normal.


Your vehicle may experience a downshift (automatictransmissions only) while climbing uphill or descendingdownhill. This downshift is necessary to maintain vehicleset speed.

On steep hills, a greater speed loss or gain may occur, soit may be preferable to drive without Electronic SpeedControl.

WARNING!

Electronic Speed Control can be dangerous where thesystem cannot maintain a constant speed. Your ve-hicle could go too fast for the conditions, and youcould lose control. An accident could be the result.Do not use Electronic Speed Control in heavy trafficor on roads that are winding, icy, snow-covered, orslippery.

PARKSENSE� REAR PARK ASSIST — IFEQUIPPEDThe ParkSense� Rear Park Assist system provides visualand audible indications of the distance between the rearfascia and the detected obstacle when backing up. Referto ParkSense� System Usage Precautions for limitationsof this system and recommendations.

ParkSense� will remember the last system state (enabledor disabled) from the last ignition cycle when the ignitionis changed to the RUN/ON position.

ParkSense� can be active only when the shift lever is inREVERSE. If ParkSense� is enabled at this shift leverposition, the system will be active until the vehicle speedis increased to approximately 11 mph (18 km/h) orabove. The system will be active again if the vehiclespeed is decreased to speeds less than approximately10 mph (16 km/h).

3


ParkSense� SensorsThe ParkSense� sensors, located in the rear fascia/bumper, monitor the area behind the vehicle that iswithin the sensors’ field of view.

The sensors can detect obstacles from approximately12 in (30 cm) up to 79 in (200 cm) from the rearfascia/bumper in the horizontal direction, depending onthe location, type and orientation of the obstacle.

ParkSense� Warning DisplayThe ParkSense� Warning screen will only be displayed ifSound and Display is selected from the Customer-Programmable Features section of the Electronic VehicleInformation Center (EVIC). Refer to “Personal Settings(Customer-Programmable Features)” under “ElectronicVehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in Section 4.

The ParkSense� Warning Display is located in the Instru-ment cluster’s EVIC display. It provides both visual andaudible warnings to indicate the distance between therear fascia/bumper and the detected obstacle.


ParkSense� DisplayWhen the vehicle is in REVERSE, the warning displaywill turn ON indicating the system status.

ParkSense� Warning Display

Park Assist ON

3


The system will indicate a detected obstacle by showingthree solid arcs and will produce a 1⁄2 second tone. As thevehicle moves closer to the object the EVIC display willshow fewer arcs and the sound tone will change fromslow, to fast, to continuous.

Park Assist Disabled Slow Tone


The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the EVIC displayshows one flashing arc and sounds a continuous tone.

The following chart shows the warning display operationwhen the system is detecting an obstacle:

Fast Tone Continuous Tone

3


WARNING DISPLAY DISTANCES

DISPLAY MESSAGE OBSTACLE DISTANCE FROM: ARC’s AUDIBLE SIGNALREAR CORNERS REAR CENTER

Park Assist ON None NoneWarning Object Detected 78.7 in (200 cm) 3 Solid Yes, 1/2 secondWarning Object Detected 39.3 in (100 cm) 3 Flashing Slow ToneWarning Object Detected 27.5 in (70 cm) 31.4 in (80 cm) 3 Flashing Slow ToneWarning Object Detected 25.5 in (65 cm) 25.5 in (65 cm) 2 Flashing Fast ToneWarning Object Detected 19.7 in (50 cm) 19.7 in (50 cm) 2 Flashing Fast ToneWarning Object Detected 15.7 in (40 cm) 15.7 in (40 cm) 2 Flashing Fast ToneWarning Object Detected 11.8 in (30 cm) 11.8 in (30 cm) 1 Flashing Continuous Tone

NOTE: ParkSense� will MUTE the radio, if on, when the system is sounding an audio tone.


Enabling/Disabling ParkSense�You can turn ParkSense� ON or OFF through the EVIC.The available choices are: OFF, Sound Only, or Sound andDisplay. For details, refer to “Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)” under “Electronic Vehicle Infor-mation Center (EVIC)” in Section 4.

As soon as the system is disabled, the instrument clusterwill display the “PARK ASSIST DISABLED” message,refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)”.When the shift lever is moved to REVERSE and thesystem is disabled, the EVIC will display the “PARKASSIST DISABLED” message for as long as the vehicle isin REVERSE.

Service ParkSense�When the ParkSense� system is defective, the instrumentcluster will actuate a single chime, once per ignitioncycle, and it will display the “SERVICE PARK ASSIST

SYSTEM” message. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Informa-tion Center (EVIC)” in Section 4. When the shift lever ismoved to REVERSE and the system has detected afaulted condition, the EVIC will display the “SERVICEPARK ASSIST SYSTEM” message for as long as thevehicle is in REVERSE. Under this condition ParkSense�will not operate.

If “SERVICE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM” appears in theElectronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) after mak-ing sure the rear fascia/bumper is free from snow, ice,mud, dirt and debris, see your authorized dealer.

Cleaning ParkSense�Clean the ParkSense� sensors with water, car wash soapand a soft cloth. Do not use rough or hard cloths. Do notscratch or poke the sensors. Otherwise, you could dam-age the sensors.

3


ParkSense� System Usage Precautions

NOTE:• Ensure that the rear bumper is free of dirt and debris

to keep the ParkSense� Rear Park Assist system oper-ating properly.

• Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vibrations couldaffect the performance of the ParkSense� system.

• When you turn ParkSense� off, the instrument clusterwill display “PARK ASSIST DISABLED.” Further-more, once you turn ParkSense� off, it remains offuntil you turn it on again, even if you cycle the ignitionkey.

• When you move the shift lever to the REVERSEposition and ParkSense� is turned off, the instrumentcluster will display “PARK ASSIST DISABLED” mes-sage for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE.

• ParkSense�, when on, will MUTE the radio when it issounding a tone.

• If a ParkSense� system malfunction occurs, a singlechime will sound once per ignition cycle. In addition,the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) willdisplay “SERVICE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM”. If thisoccurs making sure the rear fascia/bumper is freefrom snow, ice, mud, dirt and debris, see your autho-rized dealer.

• Clean the ParkSense� sensors regularly, taking carenot to scratch or damage them. The sensors must notbe covered with ice, snow, slush, mud, dirt, or debris.Failure to do so can result in the ParkSense� systemnot working properly. The ParkSense� system mightnot detect an obstacle behind the fascia/bumper, or itcould provide a false indication that an obstacle isbehind the fascia/bumper.


• Objects must not be within 12 in (30 cm) from the rearfascia/bumper while driving the vehicle. Failure to doso can result in the system misinterpreting a closeobject as a sensor problem, causing the “SERVICEPARK ASSIST SYSTEM” message to be displayed inthe instrument cluster.

CAUTION!• ParkSense� is only a parking aid and it is unable

to recognize every obstacle, including small ob-stacles. Parking curbs might be temporarily de-tected or not detected at all. Obstacles locatedabove or below the ParkSense� sensors will not bedetected when they are in close proximity.

• The vehicle must be driven slowly when usingParkSense� to be able to stop in time when theobstacle is detected. It is recommended that thedriver looks over his/her shoulder when usingParkSense�.

WARNING!

• Drivers must be careful when backing up evenwhen using the ParkSense� Rear Park Assist sys-tem. Always check carefully behind your vehicle,look behind you, and be sure to check for pedes-trians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions, andblind spots before backing up. You are responsiblefor safety and must continue to pay attention toyour surroundings. Failure to do so can result inserious injury or death.

(Continued)

3


WARNING! (Continued)• Before using the ParkSense� Rear Park Assist

system, it is strongly recommended that the ballmount and hitch ball assembly is disconnectedfrom the vehicle when the vehicle is not used fortowing. Failure to do so can result in injury ordamage to vehicles or obstacles because the hitchball will be much closer to the obstacle than therear fascia when the warning display turns on thesingle flashing arc and sounds the continuoustone. Also, the sensors could detect the ball mountand hitch ball assembly, depending on its size andshape, giving a false indication that an obstacle isbehind the vehicle.

PARKVIEW� REAR BACK UP CAMERA — IFEQUIPPEDYour vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView� RearBack Up Camera that allows you to see an on-screenimage of the rear of your vehicle whenever the shift leveris put into REVERSE. The image will be displayed on theNavigation/Multimedia radio display screen. The Park-View� camera is located in the light bar over the rearlicense plate.

WARNING!

Drivers must be careful when backing up even whenusing the ParkView� Rear Back Up Camera. Alwayscheck carefully behind your vehicle, and be sure tocheck for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, ob-structions, or blind spots before backing up. You areresponsible for the safety of your surroundings andmust continue to pay attention while backing up.Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death.


CAUTION!

• To avoid vehicle damage, ParkView� should onlybe used as a parking aid. The camera is unable toview every obstacle or object in your drive path.

• To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must bedriven slowly when using ParkView� to be able tostop in time when an obstacle is seen. It is recom-mended that the driver look frequently over his/her shoulder when using ParkView�.

NOTE: If snow, ice, mud, or anything else builds up onthe camera lens, clean the lens, rinse with water, and drywith a soft cloth. Do not cover the lens.

Turning ParkView� On or Off — With NavigationRadio

1. Press the �menu� hard key.

2. Select �system setup� soft key.

3. Press the “camera setup” soft key.

4. Enable or disable the rear camera feature by selecting�enable rear camera in reverse� soft key.

5. Press the “save” soft key.

6. When the vehicle is shifted into REVERSE, an image ofthe rear of the vehicle will appear with a caution note to�check entire surroundings� displayed across the top ofthe screen. After five seconds this note will disappear.

7. When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE, the rearcamera mode is exited and the navigation or audio screenappears again.

3


Turning ParkView� On or Off — WithoutNavigation Radio

1. Press the �menu� hard key.

2. Select �system setup� soft key.

3. Enable or disable the rear camera feature by selecting�enable rear camera in reverse� soft key.

4. When the vehicle is shifted into REVERSE, an image ofthe rear of the vehicle will appear with a caution note to�check entire surroundings� displayed across the top ofthe screen. After five seconds this note will disappear.

5. When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE, the rearcamera mode is exited and the audio screen appearsagain.

OVERHEAD CONSOLES

Front Overhead ConsoleTwo versions of the overhead console are available. Thebase front overhead console model featured fixed incan-descent courtesy/reading lights, flip-down sunglass stor-age and conversation mirror. The premium front over-head console model features a LED focused light thatilluminates the instrument panel cupholders, InfraredAutomatic Temperature Control Sensor (ATC equippedonly), two swiveling LED lights, flip-down sunglassstorage, conversation mirror, optional power sliding doorswitches and an optional power liftgate switch.

NOTE: Premium sunroof console models include all ofabove except sunglass storage.


Courtesy/Interior LightingAt the forward end of the console are two courtesy lights(standard dome light has two buttons). The lights turn on

when a front door, a sliding door or the liftgate is opened.If your vehicle is equipped with Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) the lights will also turn on when the UNLOCKbutton on the RKE transmitter is pressed.

The courtesy lights also function as reading lights. Pressin on each lens to turn these lights on while inside thevehicle. Press a second time to turn each light off. Youmay adjust the direction of these lights by pressing theoutside ring, which is identified with four directionalarrows (LED lamps only).

The area around the instrument panel cupholders is alsoilluminated from a light in the overhead console (pre-mium console only). This light is turned on when theheadlight switch is on, and will adjust in brightness whenthe dimmer control is rotated up or down.

Sunglass Storage (non-sunroof only)At the rear of the front overhead console, a compartmentis provided for the storage of two pairs of sunglasses.

Front Premium Overhead Console Features

1 — Cupholder LED 4 — Storage/Mirror2 — ATC Sensor 5 — Switch Bank3 — Interior Lights

3


From the closed position, press the door over-travel latchto open the compartment. The door will slowly rotate tothe full open position. From this position, the door can befully closed or, by rotating upward about 3/4 of the wayand releasing, positioned for conversation mirror use.

From the �conversation mirror� position, the door canonly be closed. To return to the full open position, thedoor must first be closed and then opened by pressingthe over-travel latch again to release.

NOTE: The front overhead console supplied with fac-tory sunroof, incorporates a sunroof switch.

Rear Overhead Consoles — If EquippedThe rear overhead storage system is available in twoversions: with or without sunroof.

An additional LED at the front of the rear console shinesdown on the front foot-well area while in courtesy mode,for added convenience.

Overhead Compartment Features

1 — DVD 1 5 — Storage2 — Rear HVAC 6 — DVD 1

3 — Interior Lights 7 — Interior Lights4 — Storage 8 — Halo Lighting1 If equipped, otherwise storage.


Rear Courtesy/Reading Lights — If EquippedThe overhead console has two sets of courtesy lights. Thelights turn on when a front door, a sliding door or theliftgate is opened. If your vehicle is equipped withRemote Keyless Entry (RKE) the lights will also turn onwhen the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter ispressed.

The courtesy lights also function as reading lights. Pressin on each lens to turn these lights on while inside thevehicle. Press the lens a second time to turn each light off.You may adjust the direction of these lights by pressingthe outside ring, which is identified with four directionalarrows.

Rear Console Halo LightingThe rear overhead console has recessed halo lightingaround the perimeter of the console base. This featureprovides additional lighting options while traveling andis controlled by the headlight switch. Refer to ”HaloLights — If Equipped” under “Lights” in Section 3.

GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPEDHomeLink� replaces up to three remote controls (hand-held transmitters) that operate devices such as garagedoor openers, motorized gates, lighting or home securitysystems. The HomeLink� unit operates off your vehicle’sbattery.

3


The HomeLink� buttons that are located in the headlineror sun visor designate the three different HomeLink�channels.

NOTE: HomeLink� is disabled when the Vehicle Secu-rity Alarm is active.

WARNING!

• Your motorized door or gate will open and closewhile you are training the universal transceiver.Do not train the transceiver if people, pets or otherobjects are in the path of the door or gate. Only usethis transceiver with a garage door opener that hasa “stop and reverse” feature as required by Federalsafety standards. This includes most garage dooropener models manufactured after 1982. Do notuse a garage door opener without these safetyfeatures. Call toll-free 1–800–355–3515 or, on theInternet at www.HomeLink.com for safety infor-mation or assistance.

• Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide, a dan-gerous gas. Do not run your vehicle in the garagewhile training the transceiver. Exhaust gas cancause serious injury or death.

HomeLink� Buttons


Programming HomeLink�

Before You BeginIf you have not trained any of the HomeLink� buttons,erase all channels before you begin training.

To do this, press and hold the two outside buttons for upto 20 seconds until the red indicator flashes.

It is recommended that a new battery be placed in thehandheld transmitter of the device that is being copied toHomeLink� for more efficient training and accuratetransmission of the radio-frequency signal.

Your vehicle should be parked outside of the garagewhen programming.

Begin Programming

1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position.

2. Hold the battery side of the handheld transmitteraway from the HomeLink� button you wish to program.

Place the handheld transmitter 1 to 3 in (3 to 8 cm) awayfrom the HomeLink� button you wish to program whilekeeping the indicator light in view.

3. Simultaneously press and hold both the chosenHomeLink� button and the handheld transmitter buttonuntil the HomeLink� indicator changes from a slow to arapidly blinking light, then release both the HomeLink�and handheld transmitter buttons.

Watch for the HomeLink� indicator to change flash rates.When it changes, it is programmed. It may take up to30 seconds or longer in rare cases. The garage door mayopen and close while you train.

NOTE:• Some gate operators and garage door openers may

require you to replace Step 3 with procedures noted inthe “Gate Operator/Canadian Programming” section.

3


• After training a HomeLink� channel, if the garagedoor does not operate with HomeLink� and the ga-rage door opener was manufactured after 1995, thegarage door opener may have a rolling code. If so,proceed to Step 5 “Programming A Rolling CodeSystem.”

4. Press and hold the just-trained HomeLink� buttonand observe the indicator light.

If the indicator light stays on constantly, programming iscomplete and the garage door (or device) should activatewhen the HomeLink� button is pressed.

If the indicator light blinks rapidly for two seconds andthen turns to a constant light, proceed to Step 5 “Pro-gramming A Rolling Code System.”

5. Programming A Rolling Code SystemAt the garage door opener motor (in the garage), locatethe “Learn” or “Training” button.

This can usually be found where the hanging antennawire is attached to the garage door opener motor. It isNOT the button normally used to open and close thedoor.

Training The Garage Door Opener

1 — Door Opener2 — Training Button


6. Firmly press and release the LEARN or TRAININGbutton. The name and color of the button may vary bymanufacturer.

NOTE: You have 30 seconds in which to initiate the nextstep after the LEARN button has been pressed.

7. Return to the vehicle and press the programmedHomeLink� button twice (holding the button for twoseconds each time). If the device is plugged in andactivates, programming is complete.

If the device does not activate, press the button a thirdtime (for two seconds) to complete the training.

If you have any problems, or require assistance, pleasecall toll-free 1–800–355–3515 or, on the Internet atwww.HomeLink.com for information or assistance.

To program the remaining two HomeLink� buttons,repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOTerase the channels.

Using HomeLink�To operate, press and release the programmed HomeLink�button. Activation will now occur for the trained device(i.e., garage door opener, gate operator, security system,entry door lock, home/office lighting, etc.,). The handheldtransmitter of the device may also be used at any time.

Reprogramming a Single HomeLink� ButtonTo reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,follow these steps:

1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position.

2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink� button untilthe indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do notrelease the button.

3. Without releasing the button, proceed with Program-ming HomeLink� Step 2 and follow all remaining steps.

3


Gate Operator/Canadian ProgrammingCanadian radio frequency laws require transmitter sig-nals to time-out (or quit) after several seconds of trans-mission – which may not be long enough for HomeLink�to pick up the signal during programming. Similar to thisCanadian law, some U.S. gate operators are designed totime-out in the same manner.

It may be helpful to unplug the device during the cyclingprocess to prevent possible overheating of the garagedoor or gate motor.

If you are having difficulties programming a garage dooropener or a gate operator, replace “ProgrammingHomeLink�” Step 3, with the following:

3. Continue to press and hold the HomeLink� button,while you press and release (“cycle”), your handheldtransmitter every two seconds until HomeLink� has

successfully accepted the frequency signal. The indica-tor light will flash slowly and then rapidly when fullytrained.

If you unplugged the device for training, plug it back inat this time.

Then proceed with Step 4 under “ProgrammingHomeLink�,” earlier in this section.

SecurityIt is advised to erase all channels before you sell or turnin your vehicle.

To do this, press and hold the two outside buttons for20 seconds until the red indicator flashes. Note that allchannels will be erased. Individual channels cannot beerased.

The HomeLink� Universal Transceiver is disabled whenthe Vehicle Security Alarm is active.


Troubleshooting TipsIf you are having trouble programming HomeLink�, hereare some of the most common solutions:

• Replace the battery in the original transmitter.

• Press the LEARN button on the Garage Door Openerto complete the training for a Rolling Code.

• Did you unplug the device for training, and rememberto plug it back in?

If you have any problems, or require assistance, pleasecall toll-free 1–800–355–3515 or, on the Internet atwww.HomeLink.com for information or assistance.

General InformationThis device complies with FCC rules Part 15 and IndustryCanada RSS-210. Operation is subject to the followingtwo conditions:

1. This device may not cause harmful interference.

2. This device must accept any interference that may bereceived including interference that may cause undesiredoperation.

NOTE:• The transmitter has been tested and it complies with

FCC and IC rules. Changes or modifications notexpressly approved by the party responsible for com-pliance could void the user’s authority to operate thedevice.

• The term IC before the certification/registration num-ber only signifies that Industry Canada technicalspecifications were met.

POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPEDThe power sunroof control switch is located in the frontoverhead console.

The sunroof panel tilts upward at the rear for ventilationor slides rearward under the roof.

3


Power Sunroof Operation

Opening the Sunroof ManuallyPress the switch rearward and hold, and the sunroof willopen automatically from any position. The sunroof willopen fully, then stop automatically. During this opera-tion, any release of the sunroof switch will stop thesunroof.

WARNING!

In an accident, there is greater risk of being thrownfrom a vehicle with an open sunroof. You could alsobe seriously injured or killed. Always fasten yourseat belt properly and make sure all passengers areproperly secured.

Closing the Sunroof ManuallyTo close the sunroof from an open or vent position, pressand hold the switch forward. The sunroof will close fullyand stop automatically. Release the switch to stop sun-roof travel at any point.

Sunroof Sunshade OperationThe sunroof sunshade can be opened manually. How-ever, the sunshade will open automatically as the sunroofopens.NOTE: The sunshade cannot be closed if the sunroof isopen.

WARNING!

Never leave children in a vehicle with the key in theignition switch. Occupants, particularly unattendedchildren, can become entrapped by the power sun-roof while operating the power sunroof switch. Suchentrapment may result in serious injury or death.


Express OpenPress the switch rearward and release, and the sunroofwill open automatically from any position. The sunroofwill open fully, then stop automatically. This is called“Express Open”. During Express Open operation, anymovement of the sunroof switch will stop the sunroof.

Express VentPress and release the �V� button, and the sunroof willautomatically open to the vent position. This is called“Express Vent”.

Express ClosePress the switch forward and release, and the sunroofwill close automatically from any position. The sunroofwill close fully, then stop automatically. This is called“Express Close”. During Express Close operation, anymovement of the sunroof switch will stop the sunroof.

WARNING!

Do not allow small children to operate the sunroof.Never allow your fingers, other body parts, or anyobject to project through the sunroof opening. Injurymay result.

Ignition Off OperationThe power sunroof switch will remain active for 10 min-utes after the ignition switch is turned OFF. Openingeither front door will cancel this feature.

Auto-Express with Anti-Pinch ProtectionDuring express closing, anytime an obstacle that restrictsglass movement is detected, the motor will stop andreverse travel to avoid pinching the object.

Auto Express will stop and reverse travel up to threetimes in succession. After the third time, Auto Expresswill enter a manual operation mode. This allows the

3


operator to manually control the power switch, in orderto close or open the sunroof in case of a malfunction.

Wind BuffetingWind buffeting can be described as the perception ofpressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in theears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with thewindows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certainopen or partially open positions. This is a normal occur-rence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs withthe rear windows open, open the front and rear windowstogether to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurswith the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening tominimize the buffeting or open any window.

Sunroof MaintenanceUse only a non-abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to cleanthe glass panel.

ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS — IF EQUIPPEDTwo 12 Volt power outlets are located on the lowerinstrument panel, next to the open storage bin. The upperpower outlet is controlled by the ignition switch and thelower power outlet is connected directly to the battery.The upper power outlet will also operate a conventionalcigar lighter unit (if equipped with an optional Smoker’sPackage).

NOTE: To ensure proper operation, a MOPAR� cigarknob and element must be used.


One outlet in the removable floor console shares a fusewith the lower outlet in the instrument panel and is alsoconnected to the battery. Do not exceed a maximumpower of 160 Watts (13 Amps) shared between the lowerpanel outlet and the removable floor console outlet.

The outlet in the rear quarter panel near the liftgate andthe upper outlet in the instrument panel are both con-trolled by the ignition switch. Each of these outlets cansupport 160 Watts (13 Amps). Do not exceed 160 Watts(13 Amps) for each of these outlets.

The power outlets include tethered caps, labeled with akey or battery symbol indicating the power source. Thepower outlet, located on the lower instrument panel, ispowered directly from the battery. Items plugged intothis power outlet may discharge the battery and/orprevent the engine from starting.

WARNING!

To avoid serious injury or death:• Only devices designed for use in this type of

outlet should be inserted into any 12 Volt outlet.• Do not touch with wet hands.

(Continued)

12 Volt Power Outlets

3


WARNING! (Continued)• Close the lid when not in use and while driving

the vehicle.• If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an

electric shock and failure.

CAUTION!

• Many accessories that can be plugged in drawpower from the vehicle’s battery, even when not inuse (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, ifplugged in long enough, the vehicle’s battery willdischarge sufficiently to degrade battery lifeand/or prevent the engine from starting.

(Continued)

CAUTION! (Continued)• Accessories that draw higher power (i.e., coolers,

vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.), will degrade thebattery even more quickly. Only use these inter-mittently and with greater caution.

• After the use of high power draw accessories, orlong periods of the vehicle not being started (withaccessories still plugged in), the vehicle must bedriven a sufficient length of time to allow thealternator to recharge the vehicle’s battery.

• Power outlets are designed for accessory plugsonly. Do not hang any type of accessory or acces-sory bracket from the plug. Improper use of thepower outlet can cause damage.


POWER INVERTER — IF EQUIPPEDA 110 Volt, 150 Watt inverter outlet (if equipped) convertsDC current to AC current, and is located on the left reartrim panel immediately behind the second row leftpassenger seat. This outlet can power cellular phones,electronics and other low power devices requiring powerup to 150 Watts. Certain high-end video games, such asPlaystation3 and XBox360 will exceed this power limit, aswill most power tools.

The power inverter is designed with built-in overloadprotection. If the power rating of 150 Watts is exceeded,the power inverter will automatically shut down. Oncethe electrical device has been removed from the outlet theinverter should automatically reset. If the power ratingexceeds approximately 170 Watts, the power invertermay have to be reset manually. To reset the invertermanually press the power inverter button OFF and ON.To avoid overloading the circuit, check the power ratingson electrical devices prior to using the inverter.

The power inverter switch is located near the center ofthe instrument panel below the two 12 Volt poweroutlets.

Power Inverter Outlet

3


To turn on the power outlet, press the switch once. Pressthe switch a second time to turn the power outlet off.

CUPHOLDERSThere are nine cupholders in the interior. Two cupholdersin the center front instrument panel, four in the floorconsoles and three more are located in the third rowquarter trim panel.

All liners are removable for cleaning. Pull the flexibleliner from the cupholder drawer or tray starting at oneedge for easy removal. Refer to “Cleaning The Instru-ment Panel Cupholders” in Section 7.

Power Inverter Switch


Instrument Panel CupholdersThe instrument panel cupholders are located in a pull-outdrawer just above the lower storage bin.

Pull the drawer out firmly until it stops, and place thecontainer to be held in either one of the cupholder wells.The cupholders are designed to accommodate a widevariety of container types and sizes. Press down on thecontainer to engage the cupholder retention features.

Interior Bottle HoldersThere are four bottle holders located in the interior. Onebottle holder is molded into each front interior door trimpanels, and one bottle holder is molded into each sidesliding interior door trim panel. Each holder accommo-dates up to a 20 oz (1 L) plastic bottle.

Front Cupholders

3


WARNING!

If containers of hot liquid are placed in the bottleholder, they can spill when the door is closed, burn-ing the occupants. Be careful when closing the doorsto avoid injury.

Two outboard mesh pockets are on intermediate seating.The mesh pockets are flexible enough to hold juice boxes,toys, games or MP3 players, etc.

Smoker’s Package Kit — If EquippedWith the optional authorized dealer-installed Smoker’sPackage Kit, a removable ash receiver is inserted into oneof the two cupholders in the center front instrumentpanel. To install the ash receiver, align the receiver so thethumb grip on the lid is facing rearward. Press the ashreceiver into either of the cup wells to secure. Pullupward on the ash receiver to remove for cleaningand/or storage.

The left rear trim panel cupholder is designed to accom-modate a second ash receiver, if desired.

Interior Bottle Holder


STORAGE

Glove Compartments

Upper Glove CompartmentTo open the upper compartment, press inward on therelease button (2). The door will spring open about 1 in(2.54 cm). Manually lift the front edge of the doorupward, until fully opened, and the detent is engaged.

To close the compartment door, push firmly downwardon the door’s surface to release the detent and latch thedoor closed.

Lower Glove CompartmentTo open the lower compartment, pull out on the releasehandle (3). The lower compartment handle is alsoequipped with a lock (3).

Glove Compartment Features

1 — Upper Compartment 3 — Lower Latch/Lock2 — Upper Latch 4 — Lower Compartment

3


Door Trim Panel Storage

Front Door StorageBoth interior front door panels have multiple pockets forstorage.

Driver Seatback Storage — If EquippedThe drivers seatback has a primary storage pocket on allmodels and an optional secondary mesh pocket.

Front Door Storage Features

1 — Storage Pocket 3 — Bottle Holder2 — Map Pocket 4 — Map Pocket

Driver’s Seatback Storage

1 — Bag Holder2 — Standard Pocket3 — Mesh Pocket


Umbrella HolderAn umbrella holder has been conveniently molded intothe left front door entry scuff molding.

Second Row Floor Storage BinsThe area below the floor covers, located in front of thesecond row seats, is available for storage.

Pull up on the storage bin latch to open the cover. Slidethe storage bin locking mechanism to the �unlocked�position to allow greater access to the storage bin.

Umbrella Holder Storage Bin Cover Lock Release

3


CAUTION!

The storage bin cover must lay flat and be locked toavoid damage from contact with the front seat tracks,which have minimal clearance to the cover.

WARNING!

In an accident, serious injury could result if the seatstorage bin covers are not properly latched.• Do not drive the vehicle with the storage bin

covers open.• Keep the storage bin covers closed and latched

while the vehicle is in motion.• Do not operate the storage bin covers while the

vehicle is in motion.• Do not use a storage bin latch as a tie down.

Storage Bin Safety WarningCarefully follow these warnings to help prevent personalinjury or damage to your vehicle:

WARNING!

• Always close the storage bin covers when yourvehicle is unattended.

• Do not allow children to have access to the secondrow seat storage bins. Once in the storage bin,young children may not be able to escape. Iftrapped in the storage bin, children can die fromsuffocation or heat stroke.

• In an accident, serious injury could result if theseat storage bin covers are not properly latched.

• Do not drive the vehicle with the storage bincovers open. Keep the storage bin covers closedand latched while the vehicle is in motion.

(Continued)


WARNING! (Continued)• Do not operate the storage bin covers while the

vehicle is in motion.• Do not use a storage bin latch as a tie down.

CAUTION!

The storage bin cover must be flat and locked toavoid damage from contact with the front seat tracks,which have minimal clearance to the cover.

Seat Storage Bin Cover Emergency Release LeverAs a security measure, your vehicle may be built with aStorage Bin Cover Emergency Release is built into thestorage bin cover latching mechanism.

NOTE: In the event of an individual being locked insidethe storage bin, the storage bin cover can be opened frominside of the bin by pushing on the glow-in-the-dark leverattached to the storage bin cover latching mechanism.

Storage Bin Cover Emergency Release Lever

3


Center And Rear Overhead Console Storage — IfEquippedThe overhead storage system comes in several options.

Coat HooksCoat hooks are located along the headliner for the secondand third row seating positions. The coat hook load limitis 10 lbs (4.5 kg). Exceeding the recommended load limitcan cause the coat hooks to break or disengage from thevehicle.

Cargo Area StorageThe liftgate sill plate has a raised line with the statement“Load To This Line”. This line indicates how far rearwardcargo can be placed without interfering with liftgateclosing.

Overhead Console Features

1 — DVD 1 5 — Storage2 — Rear HVAC 6 — DVD 1

3 — Courtesy Lights 7 — Courtesy Lights4 — Storage 8 — Halo Lighting1 If equipped, otherwise storage.


NOTE: With all rear seats stowed or removed, 4 x 8 footsheets of building material will fit on the vehicle floorwith the liftgate closed. The front seats must be movedslightly forward of the rearmost position.

CONSOLE FEATURESThere are two consoles available: Basic and Premium.

Basic ConsoleBasic Console features consist of the following:

• The basic console profile allows vehicle occupants toeasily pass through the first row to the second.

• Four cupholders accept up to extra large size beveragecups or 20 oz (.6 L) plastic bottles. Cupholders aredishwasher safe for cleaning.

• The cupholders are removable to access a large storagebin.

• The basic console is removable from the vehicle foradditional floor space by removing the cap and clip atthe console base.

To Remove The Basic Floor Console

1. Remove the front anchor cup plug and clip.

2. Slide the console base forward while lifting slightly toclear the rear load floor hook.

3. Remove the console.

Rear Cargo Area Loading Limit

3


To Reinstall The Basic Floor Console

1. Position the console at a slight angle (front slightlyhigher than the rear).

2. Slide the console rearward into the floor bracket/hook.

3. Align the console until the front anchor cup plug holeis centered on the winch hole.

4. Reinstall the clip first and then while pushing down-ward on the console with slight pressure, reinstall thecover plug.

5. Pull up on the console to be sure it is firmly latched.

WARNING!

In an accident, serious injury could result if the remov-able floor console is not properly installed. Always besure the removable floor console is fully latched.

Premium Console — If EquippedThe three-compartment console with sliding storage bin,sliding upper tray with storage and large console storagebin offers multiple configurations.

• Four cupholders with dishwasher safe liners for clean-ing. The cupholders can accept plastic bottles, largecups or mugs with handles.

• Top tray storage

• Upper storage bin can hold nine regular or 18 thin CDsor other items

• Large console center storage will store headphones forthe available rear DVD entertainment system or otheritems

• 12 Volt DC power outlet provides continuous powerinside the console for cell phones or other electronics.

• Rear occupant accessible


• Multiple adjustments

• Removable from vehicle for additional floor space.

The top and center console sections slide forward andrearward to provide added user comfort. A one-piece cup

holder insert for both cavities can easily be removed forcleaning. The cupholders will also accommodate largesize cups and 20 oz (.6 L) bottles.

Position 1 shows the console closed with four cupholdersand a convenient storage tray.

Premium Console Features

1 — Top Release 3 — Console Release2 — Center Release

Console Position 1

3


Position 2 shows the raised storage tray revealing a largestorage area below.

Dual Storage BinsPosition 3 shows the top portion of the console in arearward position. This is accomplished by lifting theupper most latch at the front of the console. This provideseasy access to the storage area below and provides two ofthe four cupholders for the second row passengers.

Console Position 2

Console Position 3


Position 4 shows the complete console in its rearmostposition. Again, lifting second latch handle at the front ofthe console, allows complete access to a lower storage binand provides additional cupholders for rear passengers.

To Remove The Premium Floor Console1. Pull up on the bottom release handle in the front of theconsole.

2. Lift the rear of the console up several inches/centi-meters.

3. Pull rearward to disengage from floor and removeconsole.

To reinstall the console:

1. Position the console at a slight angle (rear slightlyhigher than the front).

2. Slide the console forward into the floor bracket.

3. Rotate the rear of the console down until it is restingon the floor bracket.

4. Push down on the rear of the console until it is seatedin the rear floor bracket.

5. Pull up on the console to be sure it is firmly latched.Console Position 4

3


WARNING!

In an accident, serious injury could result if theremovable floor console is not properly installed.Always be sure the removable floor console is fullylatched.

REAR WINDOW FEATURES

Rear Window DefrosterThe rear window defroster button is located on theclimate control (Mode) knob. Press this button to

turn on the rear window defroster and the heated outsidemirrors (if equipped). An indicator in the button willilluminate when the rear window defroster is on. Therear window defroster automatically turns off after ap-proximately 10 minutes. For an additional five minutes ofoperation, press the button a second time.

NOTE:• You can turn off the heated mirror feature at anytime

by pressing the rear window defroster switch a secondtime.

• To prevent excessive battery drain, use the rear win-dow defroster only when the engine is operating.

CAUTION!

Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage tothe heating elements:• Use care when washing the inside of the rear

window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners onthe interior surface of the window. Use a soft clothand a mild washing solution, wiping parallel tothe heating elements. Labels can be peeled offafter soaking with warm water.

(Continued)


CAUTION! (Continued)• Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abra-

sive window cleaners on the interior surface of thewindow.

• Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.

LOAD-LEVELING SYSTEMThe automatic load-leveling system will provide a levelriding vehicle under most passenger and cargo loadingconditions.

A hydraulic pump contained within the shock absorbersraises the rear of the vehicle to the correct height. It takesapproximately 1 mile (1.6 km) of driving for the levelingto complete depending on road surface conditions.

If the leveled vehicle is not moved for approximately15 hours, the leveling system will bleed itself down. Thevehicle must be driven to reset the system.

ROOF LUGGAGE RACK — IF EQUIPPEDThe crossbars and side rails are designed to carry theweight on vehicles equipped with a luggage rack. Theload must not exceed 150 lbs (68 kg), and should beuniformly distributed over the luggage rack crossbars.

Distribute cargo weight evenly on the roof rack crossbars.The roof rack does not increase the total load carryingcapacity of the vehicle. Be sure the total load of cargoinside the vehicle plus that on the external rack does notexceed the maximum vehicle load capacity.

To move the crossbars, loosen the thumb screws locatedat the upper edge of each crossbar approximately sixturns, then move the crossbar to the desired position,keeping the crossbars parallel to the rack frame. Once thecrossbar is in place, retighten the thumb screws to lockthe crossbar into position.

Attempt to move the crossbar again to ensure that it hasproperly locked into position.

3


NOTE: To help control wind noise when installing thecrossbars make sure the arrows marked on the undersideof the crossbars are facing the front of the vehicle. Whenthe crossbars are not in use, the front crossbar should befastened just forward of the middle support and the rearcrossbar should be fastened at the rearmost position ofthe side rails. This will help reduce the amount of windnoise when the crossbars are not in use.

The tie down holes on the crossbar ends should alwaysbe used to tie down the load. Check the straps frequentlyto be sure that the load remains securely attached.

CAUTION!

• Crossbars should remain equally spaced or paral-lel at any luggage rack position for proper func-tion. Noncompliance could result in damage to theluggage rack, cargo and/or vehicle.

(Continued)

CAUTION! (Continued)• To avoid damage to the roof rack and vehicle, do not

exceed the maximum roof rack load capacity of150 lbs (68 kg). Always distribute heavy loads asevenly as possible and secure the load appropriately.

• Long loads which extend over the windshield,such as wood panels or surfboards, or loads withlarge frontal area should be secured to both thefront and rear of the vehicle.

• Travel at reduced speeds and turn corners care-fully when carrying large or heavy loads on theroof rack. Wind forces, due to natural causes ornearby truck traffic, can add sudden upward lift toa load. This is especially true on large flat loadsand may result in damage to the cargo or yourvehicle.


WARNING!

Cargo must be securely tied before driving yourvehicle. Improperly secured loads can fly off thevehicle, particularly at high speeds, resulting in per-sonal injury or property damage. Follow the RoofRack Cautions when carrying cargo on your roofrack.

SUN SCREENS — IF EQUIPPEDSun screens are available for second and third rowseating windows. The screens store in the sill trim panels,and the tops of the windows are equipped with hooksthat the sun screens attach to when pulled out.

Sun Screen Retracted

3


Gently pull up on the tab to raise the sun screen.Continue pulling the sun screen until the tab is near thetop of the window.

Once the screen is completely to the top of the window,extend the top bar of the sun screen over the two hooksattached to the top of the window.

To lower the sun screen, gently lift the tab upward todisengage the hooks, and feed the screen back into thebase sill.

Sun Screen Attaching To Retainer Clips Sun Screen Extended


UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

CONTENTS

� Instrument Panel Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217

� Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218

� Instrument Cluster Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . 219

� Compass Mini-Trip Computer (CMTC) —If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232

▫ CMTC Reset Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233

▫ Compass/Temperature Display . . . . . . . . . . 234

� Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) —If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236

▫ Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238

▫ Trip Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240

▫ Compass Display / ECO(Fuel Saver Mode) — If Equipped . . . . . . . . 241

▫ Personal Settings(Customer-Programmable Features) . . . . . . . 243

4

� AM/FM/CD/DVD Radio (RER & RBZ) –If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248

▫ Operating Instructions — Voice RecognitionSystem (VR) — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248

▫ Operating Instructions —uconnect™ phone — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . 248

▫ Clock Setting Procedure — RBZ Radio . . . . . 249

▫ Clock Setting Procedure — RER Radio . . . . . 250

� Sales Code RES — AM/FM Stereo Radio WithCD Player (MP3 AUX Jack) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252

▫ Operating Instructions — Radio Mode . . . . . 253

▫ Operation Instructions — CD Mode For CDAnd MP3 Audio Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256

▫ Notes On Playing MP3 Files . . . . . . . . . . . . 258

▫ Operation Instructions - Auxiliary Mode . . . . 260

� Sales Code RES/RSC — AM/FM Stereo RadioWith CD Player (MP3 AUX Jack) And SiriusRadio. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261

▫ Operating Instructions — Radio Mode . . . . . 261

▫ Operation Instructions — CD Mode For CDAnd MP3 Audio Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267

▫ Notes On Playing MP3 Files . . . . . . . . . . . . 269

▫ List Button (CD Mode For MP3 Play) . . . . . . 271

▫ Info Button (CD Mode For MP3 Play) . . . . . . 271

� Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) —If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273

▫ Connecting The iPod� . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273

▫ Using This Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274

▫ Controlling The iPod� Using RadioButtons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274

214 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

▫ Play Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274

▫ List Or Browse Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276

� uconnect™ studios(Satellite Radio) — If Equipped(REN/RER/RBZ/RES Radios Only) . . . . . . . . . 278

▫ System Activation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278

▫ Electronic Serial Number/SiriusIdentification Number (ESN/SID) . . . . . . . . . 278

▫ Selecting uconnect™ studios (Satellite)Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279

▫ Satellite Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279

▫ Reception Quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279

▫ Operating Instructions - uconnect™ studios(Satellite) Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280

▫ Operating Instructions - uconnect™ phone(If Equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282

� uconnect™ studios (Sirius Backseat TV™) —If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282

� Video Entertainment System (VES)™ —If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282

� Remote Sound System Controls —If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284

▫ Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285

▫ CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285

� CD/DVD Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285

� Radio Operation And Cellular Phones . . . . . . . 286

� Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286

▫ Manual Heating And Air ConditioningSystem — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287

4

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 215

▫ Three-Zone Temperature Control —If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291

▫ Rear Manual Climate Control —If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292

▫ Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) —If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295

▫ Summer Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304

▫ Winter Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305

▫ Vacation/Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305

▫ Window Fogging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305

▫ Outside Air Intake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305

▫ Operating Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306

▫ A/C Air Filter— If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . 306


INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES

1 — Air Vents 5 — Analog Clock 9 — DVD – If Equipped 13 — Switch Bank2 — Instrument Cluster 6 — Upper Glove Compartment 10 — Cup Holders 14 — Ignition Switch3 — Shift Lever 7 — Lower Glove Compartment 11 — Storage Bin 15 — Dimmer Switch4 — Radio 8 — Climate Controls 12 — Power Supply – 12V 16 — Headlight Switch

4


INSTRUMENT CLUSTER


INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS

1. Fuel GaugeThe pointer shows the level of fuel in the fuel tank whenthe ignition switch is in the ON position.

2. Low Fuel LightWhen the fuel level reaches approximately 2.0 gal(7.8 L) this light will turn on, and remain on untilfuel is added.

3. Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) LightThis light informs you of a problem with theElectronic Throttle Control (ETC) system. Thelight will come on when the ignition is firstturned ON and remain on briefly as a bulb

check. If the light does not come on during starting, havethe system checked by an authorized dealer.

If a problem is detected, the light will come on while theengine is running. Cycle the ignition key when the

vehicle has completely stopped and the shift lever isplaced in the PARK position, the light should turn off.

If the light remains lit with the engine running, yourvehicle will usually be drivable; however, see an autho-rized dealer for service as soon as possible. If the light isflashing when the engine is running, immediate service isrequired and you may experience reduced performance,an elevated/rough idle or engine stall and your vehiclemay require towing.

4. Charging System LightThis light shows the status of the electrical charg-ing system. The light should come on when the

ignition switch is first turned ON and remain on brieflyas a bulb check. If the light stays on or comes on whiledriving, turn off some of the vehicle’s non-essentialelectrical devices or increase engine speed (if at idle). Ifthe charging system light remains on, it means that the

4


vehicle is experiencing a problem with the chargingsystem. Obtain SERVICE IMMEDIATELY. See an autho-rized dealer.

If jump starting is required, refer to “Jump StartingProcedures” in section 6 of this manual.

5. Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light — IfEquipped

Each tire, including the spare (if provided),should be checked monthly, when cold andinflated to the inflation pressure recommendedby the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle

placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehiclehas tires of a different size than the size indicated on thevehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you shoulddetermine the proper tire inflation pressure for thosetires.)

As an added safety feature, your vehicle has beenequipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System(TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale whenone or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated.Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illumi-nates, you should stop and check your tires as soon aspossible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Drivingon a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire tooverheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation alsoreduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affectthe vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.

Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for propertire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility tomaintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation hasnot reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMSlow tire pressure telltale.


Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMSmalfunction indicator to indicate when the system is notoperating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator iscombined with the low tire pressure telltale. When thesystem detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash forapproximately one minute and then remain continuouslyilluminated. This sequence will continue upon subse-quent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists.When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the sys-tem may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressureas intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a varietyof reasons, including the installation of replacement oralternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent theTPMS from functioning properly. Always check theTPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or moretires or wheels on your vehicle, to ensure that thereplacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMSto continue to function properly.

CAUTION!

The TPMS has been optimized for the originalequipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures andwarning have been established for the tire sizeequipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system opera-tion or sensor damage may result when using re-placement equipment that is not of the same size,type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can causesensor damage. Do not use tire sealant from a can, orbalance beads if your vehicle is equipped with aTPMS, as damage to the sensors may result.

6. Oil Pressure Warning LightThis light indicates low engine oil pressure. Thelight should turn on momentarily when the engine

is started. If the light turns on while driving, stop the

4


vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible. Achime will sound for four minutes when this light turnson.

Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected.This light does not indicate how much oil is in the engine.The engine oil level must be checked under the hood.

7. Engine Temperature Warning LightThis light warns of an overheated engine condi-tion. As temperatures rise and the gauge ap-proaches H , this indicator will illuminate and a

single chime will sound after reaching a set threshold.Further overheating will cause the temperature gauge topass H , the indicator will continuously flash and acontinuous chime will occur until the engine is allowedto cool.

If the light turns on while driving, safely pull over andstop the vehicle. If the A/C system is on, turn it off. Also,shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and idle the ve-hicle. If the temperature reading does not return tonormal, turn the engine off immediately and call forservice. Refer to “If Your Engine Overheats” in Section 6for more information.

8. SpeedometerIndicates vehicle speed.

9. Turn Signal IndicatorsThe arrow will flash with the exterior turn signalwhen the turn signal lever is operated.

If the vehicle electronics sense that the vehicle hastraveled about 1 mile (1.6 km) with the turn signals on, acontinuous chime will sound to alert you to turn thesignals off. If either indicator flashes at a rapid rate, checkfor a defective outside light bulb.


10. Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF IndicatorLight — If Equipped

This light indicates the Electronic Stability Con-trol (ESC) is off.

11. Brake Warning LightThis light monitors various brake functions,including brake fluid level and parking brakeapplication. If the brake light turns on, it mayindicate that the parking brake is applied, that

the brake fluid level is low, or that there is a problem withthe anti-lock brake system reservoir.

If the light remains on when the parking brake has beendisengaged, and the fluid level is at the full mark on themaster cylinder reservoir, it indicates a possible brakehydraulic system malfunction or that a problem with theBrake Booster has been detected by the Anti-Lock Brake

System (ABS) / Electronic Stability Program (ESP) sys-tem. In this case, the light will remain on until thecondition has been corrected. If the problem is related tothe brake booster, the ABS pump will run when applyingthe brake and a brake pedal pulsation may be felt duringeach stop.

The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capac-ity in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulicsystem. A leak in either half of the dual brake system isindicated by the Brake Warning Light, which will turn onwhen the brake fluid level in the master cylinder hasdropped below a specified level.

The light will remain on until the cause is corrected.

NOTE: The light may flash momentarily during sharpcornering maneuvers, which change fluid level condi-tions. The vehicle should have service performed, andthe brake fluid level checked.

4


If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is neces-sary.

WARNING!

Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on isdangerous. Part of the brake system may have failed.It will take longer to stop the vehicle. You could havean accident. Have the vehicle checked immediately.

Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake System(ABS), are also equipped with Electronic Brake ForceDistribution (EBD). In the event of an EBD failure, theBrake Warning Light will turn on along with the ABSLight. Immediate repair to the ABS system is required.

Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked byturning the ignition switch from the OFF position to theON position. The light should illuminate for approxi-mately two seconds. The light should then turn off unless

the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is detected.If the light does not illuminate, have the light inspectedby an authorized dealer.

The light also will turn on when the parking brake isapplied with the ignition switch in the ON position.

NOTE: This light shows only that the parking brake isapplied. It does not show the degree of brake application.

12. Vehicle Security Light — If EquippedThis light will flash at a fast rate for approxi-mately 15 seconds, when the vehicle securityalarm is arming, and then will flash slowlyuntil the vehicle is disarmed.

13. Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) LightThis light monitors the Anti-Lock Brake System(ABS). The light will turn on when the ignitionswitch is turned to the ON position and maystay on for as long as four seconds.


If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving, itindicates that the Anti-Lock portion of the brake systemis not functioning and that service is required. However,the conventional brake system will continue to operatenormally if the BRAKE warning light is not on.

If the ABS light is on, the brake system should be servicedas soon as possible to restore the benefits of Anti-Lockbrakes. If the ABS light does not turn on when theIgnition switch is turned to the ON position, have thelight inspected by an authorized dealer.

14. Electronic Stability Control (ESC) MalfunctionIndicator Light — If Equipped

The “ESC Malfunction Indicator Light” in theinstrument cluster will come on when theignition switch is turned to the ON position. Itshould go out with the engine running. If the

“ESC Malfunction Indicator Light” comes on continu-ously with the engine running, a malfunction has been

detected in the ESC system. If this light remains on afterseveral ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been drivenseveral miles (kilometers) at speeds greater than 30 mph(48 km/h), see your authorized dealer as soon as possibleto have the problem diagnosed and corrected.

NOTE:• The “ESC Malfunction Indicator Light” come on mo-

mentarily each time the ignition switch is turned ON.

• Each time the ignition is turned ON, the ESC systemwill be ON even if it was turned off previously.

• The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking soundswhen it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stopwhen ESC becomes inactive following the maneuverthat caused the ESC activation.

4


15. TachometerThe red segments indicate the maximum permissibleengine revolutions per minute (RPM x 1000) for each gearrange. Before reaching the red area, ease up on theaccelerator.

16. High Beam IndicatorThis indicator shows that the high beam head-lights are on. Push the multifunction lever forward

to switch the headlights to high beam, and pull towardyourself (normal position) to return to low beam.

17. Front Fog Light Indicator — If EquippedThis indicator will illuminate when the front foglights are on.

18. Seat Belt Reminder LightWhen the ignition switch is first turned ON, thislight will turn on for five to eight seconds as a bulbcheck. During the bulb check, if the driver’s seat

belt is unbuckled, a chime will sound. After the bulb

check or when driving, if the driver’s seat belt remainsunbuckled, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will illuminateand the chime will sound. Refer to “Occupant Restraints”in Section 2 for more information.

19. Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is part ofan onboard diagnostic system, called OBD, thatmonitors engine and automatic transmission con-

trol systems. The light will illuminate when the key is inthe ON position, before engine start. If the bulb does notcome on when turning the key from OFF to ON, have thecondition checked promptly.

Certain conditions such as a loose or missing gas cap,poor fuel quality, etc., may illuminate the MIL afterengine start. The vehicle should be serviced if the lightstays on through several of your typical driving cycles. Inmost situations, the vehicle will drive normally and willnot require towing.


CAUTION!

Prolonged driving with the MIL on could causedamage to the engine control system. It also couldaffect fuel economy and drivability. If the MIL isflashing, severe catalytic converter damage andpower loss will soon occur. Immediate service isrequired.

WARNING!

A malfunctioning catalytic converter, as referencedabove, can reach higher temperatures than in normaloperating conditions. This can cause a fire if youdrive slowly or park over flammable substances suchas dry plants or wood or cardboard, etc. This couldresult in death or serious injury to the driver, occu-pants or others.

20. Airbag Warning LightThis light turns on and remains on for sevenseconds as a bulb check when the ignitionswitch is first turned ON. If the light is not onduring starting, stays on, or turns on while

driving, have the system inspected by an authorizeddealer as soon as possible.

21. Temperature GaugeThe temperature gauge shows engine coolant tempera-ture. Any reading within the normal range indicates thatthe engine cooling system is operating satisfactorily.

The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher tempera-ture when driving in hot weather, up mountain grades,or when towing a trailer. It should not be allowed toexceed the upper limits of the normal operating range.

4


CAUTION!Driving with a hot engine cooling system coulddamage your vehicle. If temperature gauge reads “H”pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle withthe air conditioner turned off until the pointer dropsback into the normal range. If the pointer remains onthe “H” and you hear continuous chimes, turn theengine off immediately, and call an authorized deal-ership for service.

WARNING!

A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You orothers could be badly burned by steam or boilingcoolant. You may want to call an authorized dealer-ship for service if your vehicle overheats. If youdecide to look under the hood yourself, see Section 7of this manual. Follow the warnings under the Cool-ing System Pressure Cap paragraph.

22. Odometer / Trip Odometer / ECO(Fuel Saver Indicator) Button — If EquippedPress this button to change the display from odometer toeither of two trip odometer settings or the ECO display.The letter “A” or “B” will appear when in the tripodometer mode. Push in and hold the button for twoseconds to reset the trip odometer to 0 miles (km). Theodometer must be in TRIP mode to reset it.

NOTE: On the Base cluster, the reset button togglesbetween odometer, Trip A, Trip B, ECO and outsidetemperature. To reset a message display on Base Cluster(gATE, gASCAP, noFUSE, CHangE OIL, LoCOOL, Lo-WASH, etc.), push and hold the button until the displayresets (approximately two seconds).

23. Shift Lever IndicatorThe Shift Lever Indicator is self-contained within theinstrument cluster. It displays the gear position of theautomatic transmission.


NOTE: You must apply the brakes before shifting fromPARK.

24. Message Display AreaWhen the appropriate conditions exist, the followingodometer messages will display:

ECO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuel Saver Indicator OffECO-on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuel Saver Indicator Ondoor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Door Ajarhood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hood AjargATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Liftgate AjarLoW tirE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Low Tire PressuregASCAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuel Cap FaultHOTOIL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transaxle Oil Temperature

Exceeds Safe ThresholdnoFUSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuse FaultCHAngE OIL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Oil Change RequiredCRUISE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cruise Control OnLoCOOL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Low CoolantLoWASH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Low Washer Fluid

NOTE: Some of the above warnings will be displayed inthe Compass Mini-Trip Computer / Electronic VehicleInformation Center Display Area located in the instru-ment cluster.

Refer to ”Compass Mini-Trip Computer (CMTC) Display—If Equipped” / ”Electronic Vehicle Information Center(EVIC) Display — If Equipped” later in this section, formore information.

ECO / ECO-on (Fuel Saver Indicator) — If EquippedThe ECO-on indicator will illuminate when you aredriving in a fuel efficient manner and can be used tomodify driving habits in order to increase fuel economy.The ECO display will toggle between ECO and ECO-ondepending on driving habits and vehicle usage. Press theOdometer / Trip Odometer / ECO (Fuel Saver Indicator)button to change the display from odometer to either ofthe two trip odometer settings or the “ECO” display.

4


LoW tirEWhen the appropriate condition exists, the odometerdisplay will toggle between LoW and tirE for threecycles.

gASCAPIf the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuelfiller cap is loose, improperly installed, or damaged, a“gASCAP” message will display in the odometer displayarea. Tighten the fuel filler cap properly and press theTRIP ODOMETER button to turn off the message. If theproblem continues, the message will appear the next timethe vehicle is started.

HOTOILWhen this message is displayed there is a transaxleover-temperature condition. When this condition occurs,the “HOTOIL” message will be displayed in the odom-eter along with a chime.

If this message appears, stop the vehicle and run theengine at idle or faster, with the transmission in NEU-TRAL, until the light goes off.

NOTE: When this message is displayed, bring thevehicle to a stop and idle the engine until the messageclears.

noFUSEIf the vehicle diagnostic system determines that theIgnition Off Draw (IOD) fuse is improperly installed, ordamaged, a “noFUSE” message will display in the odom-eter display area. For more information on fuses and fuselocations refer to “Fuses” in Section 7.

CHAngE OILYour vehicle is equipped with an engine oil changeindicator system. The CHAngE OIL message will flash inthe instrument cluster odometer for approximately12 seconds, after a single chime has sounded, to indicatethe next scheduled oil change interval. The engine oil


change indicator system is duty cycle-based, whichmeans the engine oil change interval may fluctuatedependent upon your personal driving style.

Unless reset, this message will continue to display eachtime you turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUNposition. To turn off the message temporarily, press andrelease the Trip / Odometer Display reset button on theinstrument cluster. To reset the oil change indicatorsystem (after performing the scheduled maintenance),perform the following steps.

1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position (do notstart the engine).

2. Fully depress the accelerator pedal, slowly, three timeswithin 10 seconds.

3. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF/LOCK position.

NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when youstart the engine, the oil change indicator system did notreset. If necessary, repeat these steps.

25. OdometerThe odometer shows the total distance the vehicle hasbeen driven.

U.S. Federal regulations require that upon transfer ofvehicle ownership, the seller certify to the purchaser thecorrect mileage that the vehicle has been driven. If yourodometer needs to be repaired or serviced, the repairtechnician should leave the odometer reading the sameas it was before the repair or service. If s/he cannot do so,then the odometer must be set at zero, and a sticker mustbe placed in the door jamb stating what the mileage wasbefore the repair or service. It is a good idea for you tomake a record of the odometer reading before the repair/service, so that you can be sure that it is properly reset, orthat the door jamb sticker is accurate if the odometermust be reset at zero.

4


26. Compass Mini-Trip Computer (CMTC) or ElectronicVehicle Information Center (EVIC) Display — IfEquipped

Compass Mini-Trip Computer (CMTC) Display — IfEquippedOn vehicles equipped with Compass Mini-Trip Com-puter (CMTC), the display provides the outside tempera-ture, one of eight compass headings to indicate thedirection the vehicle is facing, and the current radiostation. For more information refer to “Compass Mini-Trip Computer” in this section.

Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) Display —If EquippedThe Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) fea-tures a driver-interactive display that is located in theinstrument cluster. For more information refer to “Elec-tronic Vehicle Information (EVIC)” in this section.

27. Compass Mini-Trip Computer (CMTC) DisplayButtonPress the left reset button to scroll through sub-menus(i.e., Outside Temperature, Trip Functions: AVG FuelEconomy, DTE, Elapsed Time, and Units). Press and holdthe reset button for approximately two seconds, to resetthe display shown.

28. Fuel Door ReminderThe arrow in this symbol is a reminder that theFuel Filler Door is located on the left side of thevehicle.

COMPASS MINI-TRIP COMPUTER (CMTC) — IFEQUIPPED

NOTE:• The compass on your vehicle is self-calibrating, elimi-

nating the need to manually calibrate the compass.


• If the vehicle is equipped with a Chrysler uconnect™gps (Navigation Radio), the NAV system will providethe compass direction, and the variance and calibra-tion menus will be unavailable. The compass willperform accurately, based on GPS signals instead ofthe Earth’s magnetic field.

The Compass Mini-Trip Computer is located in theinstrument cluster and features a driver-interactive dis-play (displays information on outside temperature, com-pass direction, and trip information).

CMTC Reset Buttons

CMTC Reset ButtonPress the left reset button located on the instrumentcluster to scroll through sub menus (i.e., Trip Functions:AVG Fuel Economy, DTE, Elapsed Time, and Units).

To reset the display shown, turn the ignition switch to theON position, then press and hold the reset button forapproximately two seconds.

When the appropriate conditions exist, the followingmessages will display:

NE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Eight-point compassheadings are displayed

(N, S, E, W, NE, NW, SE, SW)14°F . . . . . . . . . . . . Temperature (Fahrenheit or Celsius)AVG . . . . . . . . . Average Fuel Economy (U.S. or Metric)DTE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Distance to EmptyET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Elapsed TimeP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Park Assist On/Off

Should this wrench symbol display with theletter P next to it, your Park Assist Systemneeds servicing. Contact an authorized dealer.

4


CMTC Trip Odometer (ODO) / ECO(Fuel Saver Indicator) — If EquippedThis display shows the distance traveled since the lastreset. Press and release the right button on the instrumentcluster to switch from odometer, to Trip A or Trip B, or toECO. Press and hold the right button while theodometer/trip odometer is displayed to reset.

Trip AShows the total distance traveled for Trip A since the lastreset.

Trip BShows the total distance traveled for Trip B since the lastreset.

ECO (Fuel Saver Indicator) — If EquippedThe ECO-ON indicator will illuminate when you aredriving in a fuel efficient manner and can be used tomodify driving habits in order to increase fuel economy.

The ECO display will toggle between ECO and ECO-ONdepending on driving habits and vehicle usage.

Compass/Temperature Display

Compass VarianceCompass Variance is the difference between MagneticNorth and Geographic North. To ensure compass accu-racy, the compass variance should be properly set accord-ing to the variance map for the zone where the vehiclewill be driven. When properly set, the compass willautomatically account for this difference.

NOTE:• A good calibration requires a level surface and an

environment free from large metallic objects such asbuildings, bridges, underground cables, railroadtracks, etc.


• Magnetic and battery powered devices, (such as cellphones, iPod’s, radar detectors, PDA’s and laptops)should be kept away from the top of the instrumentpanel. This is where the compass module is locatedand such devices may interfere and cause false com-pass readings.

To Set the VarianceStart the engine and leave the transmission gear selectorlever in the PARK position. Press and hold the CMTCreset button (for approximately ten seconds) until thecurrent variance zone number is displayed. To change thezone, press and release the CMTC reset button to increasethe variance one step. Repeat as necessary until thedesired variance is achieved.

NOTE: The factory default zone is 8. During program-ming, the zone value will wrap around from zone 15 tozone 1.

Manual Compass CalibrationIf the compass appears erratic or inaccurate, and thevariance has been properly set, you may wish to manu-ally recalibrate the compass. To manually calibrate thecompass:

1. Start the engine and leave the transmission in thePARK position.

Compass Variance Map

4


2. Press and hold the CMTC reset button (for approxi-mately 10 seconds) until the current variance zone num-ber is displayed.

3. Release the CMTC reset button, then press and holdagain for approximately 10 seconds, until the direction isdisplayed, with the CAL indicator on continuously in thedisplay.

4. To complete the compass calibration, drive the vehiclein one or more complete 360–degree circles, under 5 mph(8 km/h) in an area free from power lines and largemetallic objects, until the CAL indicator turns off. Thecompass will now function normally.

ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER(EVIC) — IF EQUIPPEDThe Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) fea-tures a driver-interactive display that is located in theinstrument cluster.

This system conveniently allows the driver to select avariety of useful information by pressing the switchesmounted on the steering wheel. The EVIC consists of thefollowing:

• System Status display

Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)


• Vehicle information warning message displays

• Tire Pressure Monitor System

• Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)

• Compass display

• Outside temperature display

• Trip computer functions

• Audio Modes display

EVIC Menu / Step Control Button,as it appears on the left side of thesteering column.

Press and release the MENU button, and themode displayed will change between Compass/Temperature, Trip, System Status, and PersonalSettings.

Press the STEP button to scroll through submenus (i.e., Trip Functions, Avg. Fuel Economy,DTE, Elapsed Time, and Units).

Steering Wheel EVIC Compass/TempControl Button, as it appears on theright side of the steering column.

Press and release the Compass/Temperaturebutton to for instant access to the Compass/Temperature screens.

MENU

4


Press this button to RESET Trip Functions andchange Personal Settings.

Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)DisplaysWhen the appropriate conditions exist, the EVIC displaysthe following messages:

• Door(s) Ajar (with a single chime, if vehicle is inmotion)

• Liftgate Ajar (chime will sound when vehicle startsmoving)

• Hood Ajar (if equipped with hood switch)

• Check TPM System (refer to “Tire Pressure MonitoringSystem” in Section 5 of this manual)

• Turn Signal On

• RKE Battery Low

• LOW WASHER FLUID

• Oil Change Required

• Check Gascap

• Left Front Turn Signal Light Out

• Left Rear Turn Signal Light Out

• Right Front Turn Signal Light Out

• Right Rear Turn Signal Light Out

• Park Assist Disabled

• Service Park Assist System

• Personal Settings Not Available — Vehicle Not in Park

• Blind Spot System Off — This message is displayedwhen the ignition is turned to ON to indicate the BlindSpot System has been turned off.


• Blind Spot System Not Available — This message isdisplayed to indicate the Blind Spot Monitor (BSM)system is temporarily unavailable due to sensor block-age, electronic interference, or other �temporary� con-ditions. When this message is displayed both outsiderear view icons will be illuminated. If electronic inter-ference is present, the BSM system will illuminate theicon only on the side of interference as long asinterference is present.

• Service Blind Spot System — This message is dis-played to indicate the Blind Spot Monitor (BSM)system is permanently unavailable. The driver willreceive an EVIC message and the BSM display warn-ing in both mirrors will be permanently illuminated. Ifthis message is present see an authorized dealer.

• ECO (Fuel Saver Indicator) — If Equipped

Oil Change RequiredYour vehicle is equipped with an engine oil changeindicator system. The Oil Change Required message willflash in the EVIC display for approximately 10 seconds,after a single chime has sounded, to indicate the nextscheduled oil change interval. The engine oil changeindicator system is duty-cycle based, which means theengine oil change interval may fluctuate dependent uponyour personal driving style.

Unless reset, this message will continue to display eachtime you turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUNposition. To turn off the message temporarily, press andrelease the Menu button. To reset the oil change indicatorsystem (after performing the scheduled maintenance)perform the following steps.

1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position (do notstart the engine).

4


2. Fully depress the accelerator pedal, slowly, three timeswithin 10 seconds.

3. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF/LOCK position.

NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when youstart the engine, the oil change indicator system did notreset. If necessary, repeat these steps.

Trip FunctionsPress and release the MENU button until one of thefollowing Trip Functions displays in the EVIC.

Press the STEP button to scroll through all the TripComputer functions.

The Trip Functions mode displays the following informa-tion.

Average Fuel EconomyShows the average fuel economy since the last reset.When the fuel economy is reset, the display will read

“RESET” or show dashes for two seconds. Then, thehistory information will be erased, and the averaging willcontinue from the last fuel average reading before thereset.

Distance To Empty (DTE)Shows the estimated distance that can be traveled withthe fuel remaining in the tank. This estimated distance isdetermined by a weighted average of the instantaneousand average fuel economy, according to the current fueltank level.

NOTE: Significant changes in driving style or vehicleloading will greatly affect the actual drivable distance ofthe vehicle, regardless of the DTE displayed value.

When the DTE value is less than 30 miles (48 km)estimated driving distance, the DTE display will changeto a text display of �LOW FUEL.� This display willcontinue until the vehicle runs out of fuel. Adding a


significant amount of fuel to the vehicle will turn off the�LOW FUEL� text and a new DTE value will display.

Elapsed TimeShows the total elapsed time of travel since the last resetwhen the ignition switch is in the ACC position. Elapsedtime will increment when the ignition switch is in the ONor START position.

Display Units of Measure in:To make your selection, press and release the STEPbutton until “ENGLISH” or “METRIC” appears.

To Reset the DisplayReset will only occur while a resettable function is beingdisplayed. Press and release the RESET button once toclear the resettable function being displayed. To reset allresettable functions, press and release the RESET buttona second time, within three seconds of resetting thecurrently-displayed function (Reset ALL will displayduring this three-second window).

Compass Display / ECO (Fuel Saver Mode) — IfEquipped

The compass readings indicate the directionthe vehicle is facing. Press and release thecompass button to display one of eight com-pass readings, and the outside temperature.

ECO (Fuel Saver Mode) — If EquippedThe ECO message will display below the outside tem-perature in the EVIC display. This message will appearwhenever you are driving in a fuel efficient manner.

This feature allows you to monitor when you are drivingin a fuel efficient manner, and it can be used to modifydriving habits in order to increase fuel economy.

Automatic Compass CalibrationThis compass is self-calibrating, which eliminates theneed to manually reset the compass. When the vehicle isnew, the compass may appear erratic and the EVIC willdisplay CAL until the compass is calibrated. You may

4


also calibrate the compass by completing one or more360–degree turns (in an area free from large metal ormetallic objects) until the CAL indicator displayed in theEVIC turns off. The compass will now function normally.

Manual Compass CalibrationIf the compass appears erratic and the CAL indicatordoes not appear in the EVIC display, you must put thecompass into the Calibration Mode manually, as follows:

1. Turn ON the ignition switch.

2. Press the MENU button until Personal Settings(Customer-Programmable Features) menu is reached.

3. Press the STEP button until “Calibrate Compass” isdisplayed in the EVIC.

4. Press and release the RESET button to start the cali-bration. The “CAL” indicator will be displayed in theEVIC.

5. Complete one or more 360–degree turns (in an areafree from large metal or metallic objects) until the “CAL”indicator turns off. The compass will now functionnormally.

Compass VarianceCompass Variance is the difference between MagneticNorth and Geographic North. To compensate for thedifferences, the variance should be set for the zone wherethe vehicle is driven, per the zone map. Once properlyset, the compass will automatically compensate for thedifferences, and provide the most accurate compassheading. For the most accurate compass performance, thecompass must be set using the following steps.

NOTE: Keep magnetic materials away from the top ofthe instrument panel, such as iPod’s, Cell Phones, Lap-tops and Radar Detectors. This is where the compassmodule is located, and it can cause interference with thecompass sensor, and it may give false readings.


1. Turn the ignition switch ON.

2. Press and hold the compass button for approximatelytwo seconds.

3. Press the STEP button until “Compass Variance” mes-sage, and the last variance zone number, displays in theEVIC.

4. Press and release the STEP button until the propervariance zone is selected, according to the map.

5. Press and release the compass button to exit.

Personal Settings(Customer-Programmable Features)Personal Settings allows you to set and recall featureswhen the transmission is in PARK. If the transmission isout of PARK or the vehicle begins moving, a warningmessage PERSONAL SETTING NOT AVAILABLE ,followed in three seconds by, VEHICLE NOT IN PARK.

Press and release the MENU button until Personal Set-tings displays in the EVIC.

Use the Step button to display one of the followingchoices.

Compass Variance Map

4


LanguageWhen in this display you may select one of five lan-guages for all display nomenclature, including the tripfunctions and the navigation system (if equipped). Pressthe RESET button while in this display to select English,Spanish (Español), French (Français), Italian (Italiano),German (Deutsch), and Dutch (Nederlands). Then, asyou continue, the information will display in the selectedlanguage.

Auto Door LocksWhen ON is selected, all doors will lock automaticallywhen the vehicle reaches a speed of 15 mph (24 km/h).To make your selection, press and release the RESETbutton until ON or OFF appears.

Auto UNLK On ExitWhen ON is selected, all doors will unlock when thevehicle is stopped and the transmission is in the PARK or

NEUTRAL position and the driver’s door is opened. Tomake your selection, press and release the RESET buttonuntil ON or OFF appears.

RKE UnlockWhen Driver Door 1st Press is selected, only the driver’sdoor will unlock on the first press of the Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) transmitter UNLOCK button. When DriverDoor 1st Press is selected, you must press the RKEtransmitter UNLOCK button twice, to unlock the passen-ger’s doors. When All Doors 1st Press is selected, all ofthe doors will unlock on the first press of the RKEtransmitter UNLOCK button. To make your selection,press and release the RESET button until “Driver Door1st Press” or “All Doors 1st Press” appears.

RKE Linked To MemoryWhen this feature is selected the memory seat, mirror,and radio settings will return to the memory set positionwhen the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button is pressed. If


this feature is not selected then the memory seat, mirror,and radio settings can only return to the memory setposition using the door mounted switch. Pressing theRESET button when in this display will select �Yes� or�No.�

Flash Lamp LockWhen ON is selected, the front and rear turn signals willflash when the doors are locked or unlocked with theRKE transmitter. This feature may be selected with orwithout the sound horn on lock feature selected. To makeyour selection, press and release the RESET button untilON or OFF appears.

Headlamp Off DelayWhen this feature is selected, the driver can choose tohave the headlights remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 secondswhen exiting the vehicle. To make your selection, pressand release the RESET button until 0, 30, 60, or 90appears.

Easy Exit SeatThis feature provides automatic driver seat positioning toenhance driver mobility when entering and exiting thevehicle. To make your selection, press and release theRESET button until YES (Y) or NO (N) appears.

NOTE: The seat will return to the memorized seatlocation (if Recall Memory with Remote Key Unlock is setto ON) when the RKE transmitter is used to unlock thedoor. Refer to “Easy Entry/Exit Seat” under “DriverMemory Seat” in Section 3 of this manual for moreinformation.

Tilt MIRR. In ReverseWhen this feature is selected and the vehicle is placed ina reverse gear, the driver’s side mirror will tilt downwardto allow the driver to see into the previous blind spot andavoid objects in close proximity to the rear of the vehicle.

4


Key-Off Power DelayWhen this feature is selected, the power windowswitches, radio, uconnect™ phone (if equipped), DVDvideo system (if equipped), power sunroof (if equipped),and power outlets will remain active for up to 10 minutesafter the ignition switch is turned OFF. Opening a vehicledoor will cancel this feature. To make your selection,press and release the RESET button until Off, 45 sec.,5 min., or 10 min. appears.

ILLUMIN. ApproachWhen this feature is selected, the headlights will activateand remain on for up to 90 seconds when the doors areunlocked with the RKE transmitter. To make your selec-tion, press and release the RESET button until “OFF,”“30 sec.,” “60 sec.,” or “90 sec.” appears.

Blind Spot AlertThere are 3 selections when operating Blind Spot Alert.By pressing and releasing the RESET button once, theBlind Spot Alert feature can be activated in “Blind SpotAlert Lights” mode. When this mode is selected the BlindSpot Monitor (BSM) system is activated and will onlyshow a visual alert in the outside mirrors. By pressingand releasing the RESET button a second time “BlindSpot Alert Lights/CHM” mode is activated. In this modethe Blind Spot Monitor (BSM) will show a visual alert inthe outside mirrors as well as an audible alert when theturn signal is on. When “Blind Spot Alert Off” is selectedthe Blind Spot Monitor (BSM) system is deactivated.

NOTE: If your vehicle has experienced any damage inthe area where the sensor is located, even if the fascia isnot damaged, the sensor may have become misaligned.Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer to verify sensoralignment. Having a sensor that is misaligned will resultin the BSM not operating to specification.


Enable/Disable the Rear Park Assist SystemThe Rear Park Assist system will scan for objects behindthe vehicle when the transmission is in the REVERSE andthe vehicle speed is less than 11 mph (18 km/h). Thesystem can be enabled with Sound Only, Sound andDisplay, or turned OFF through the EVIC, to make yourselection, press and release the RESET button. Refer to“Rear Park Assist System” in Section 3 of this manual forsystem function and operating information.

Display Units of Measure InThe EVIC, odometer, and navigation system (if equipped)can be changed between English and Metric units ofmeasure. To make your selection, press and release theRESET button until ENGLISH or METRIC appears.

Door AlertWhen this feature is selected the signal lamps activatewhen power or manual sliding doors are in operation,signaling other drivers that someone may be exiting orentering the vehicle.

Sound Horn with Remote Key LockWhen ON is selected, a short horn sound will occur whenthe RKE transmitter LOCK button is pressed. This featuremay be selected with or without the Flash Lamp Lockfeature. To make your selection, press and release theRESET button until ON or OFF appears.

Turn Headlights On with Remote Key UnlockWhen this feature is selected, the headlights will activate,and remain on for up to 90 seconds, when the doors areunlocked with the RKE transmitter. To make your selec-tion, press and release the RESET button until OFF,30 sec., 60 sec., or 90 sec. appears.

Automatic High Beams — If EquippedWhen this feature is selected, the high beam headlightswill deactivate automatically under certain conditions. Tomake your selection, press and release the RESET buttonuntil “ON” or “OFF” appears. Refer to “SmartBeam™” inSection 3.

4


Display ECO — If EquippedThe “ECO” message can be turned on or off. To makeyour selection, press and release the FUNCTION SE-LECT button until “ON” or “OFF” appears.

Rain Sensing Intermittent Wipers — If EquippedWhen ON is selected, the system will automaticallyactivate the windshield wipers if it senses moisture onthe windshield. To make your selection, press and releasethe RESET button until “ON” or “OFF” appears. WhenOFF is selected, the system reverts to the standardintermittent wiper operation.

AM/FM/CD/DVD RADIO (RER & RBZ) – IFEQUIPPED

NOTE: The sales code is located on the lower right sideof the unit’s faceplate.

The RBZ and RER radios contain a CD/DVD player, USBport, and a 30-gigabyte hard drive (HDD). Sirius SatelliteRadio is optional. The 6.5 in (16.5 cm) touch screen allowsfor easy menu selection.

Refer to your uconnect™ tunes (RBZ) or (RER) User’sManual located on the DVD for detailed operating in-structions.

Operating Instructions — Voice RecognitionSystem (VR) — If EquippedRefer to “Voice Recognition System (VR)” in theuconnect™ User Manual located on the DVD for furtherdetails.

Operating Instructions — uconnect™ phone — IfEquippedRefer to “uconnect™ phone” in the uconnect™ UserManual located on the DVD for further details.


Clock Setting Procedure — RBZ Radio

To Manually Set the Clock

1. Turn on the radio.

2. Touch the screen where the time is displayed, the clocksetting menu will appear on the screen.

3. To move the hour forward, touch the screen where theword “Hour” with the arrow pointing upward is dis-played. To move the hour backward, touch the screenwhere the word “Hour” with the arrow pointing down-ward is displayed.

4. To move the minute forward, touch the screen wherethe word “Min” with the arrow pointing upward isdisplayed. To move the minute backward, touch thescreen where the word “Min” with the arrow pointingdownward is displayed.

5. To save the new time setting, touch the screen wherethe word “Save” is displayed.

Changing Daylight Savings TimeWhen selected, this feature will display the time of day indaylight savings time. Proceed as follows to change thecurrent setting:1. Turn on the radio.2. Touch the screen where the time is displayed. Theclock setting menu will appear on the screen.3. When this feature is on, a check mark will appear inthe box next to the words “Daylight Savings.” Touch thescreen where the words “Daylight Savings” are dis-played to change the current setting.

Show Time if Radio is OffWhen selected, this feature will display the time of dayon the touch screen when the radio is turned off. Proceedas follows to change the current setting:1. Turn on the radio.2. Touch the screen where the time is displayed. Theclock setting menu will appear on the screen.

4


3. When this feature is on, a check mark will appear inthe box next to the words “Show Time if Radio is Off.”Touch the screen where the words “Show Time if Radio isOff” are displayed to change the current setting.

Changing the Time Zone


2. Touch the screen where the time is displayed. Theclock setting menu will appear on the screen.

3. Touch the screen where the words “Set Time Zone” aredisplayed. The time zone selection menu will appear onthe screen.

4. Select a time zone by touching the screen where yourselection appears. If you do not see a time zone that youwant to select, touch the screen where the word “Page” isdisplayed to view additional time zones in the menu.

5. Touch the screen where the word “Save” is displayed.

Clock Setting Procedure — RER Radio

uconnect� gpsThe GPS receiver used in this system is synchronized tothe time data being transmitted by the GPS satellite. Thesatellite clock is Greenwich Mean Time (GMT). This is theworldwide standard for time. This makes the system’sclock very accurate once the appropriate time zone anddaylight savings information is set.

To Manually Set the Clock

1. Turn on the radio.2. Touch the screen where the time is displayed.3. Touch the screen where “User Clock” is displayed, theclock setting menu will appear on the screen.4. To move the hour forward, touch the screen where theword “Hour” with the arrow pointing upward is dis-played. To move the hour backward, touch the screenwhere the word “Hour” with the arrow pointing down-ward is displayed.


5. To move the minute forward, touch the screen wherethe word “Min” with the arrow pointing upward isdisplayed. To move the minute backward, touch thescreen where the word “Min” with the arrow pointingdownward is displayed.

6. To save the new time setting, touch the screen wherethe word “Save” is displayed.

Changing Daylight Savings TimeWhen selected, this feature will display the time of day indaylight savings time. Proceed as follows to change thecurrent setting:


2. Touch the screen where “User Clock” is displayed, theclock setting menu will appear on the screen.

3. When this feature is on, a check mark will appear inthe box next to the words “Daylight Savings.” Touch thescreen where the words “Daylight Savings” are dis-played to change the current setting.

Show Time if Radio is OffWhen selected, this feature will display the time of dayon the touch screen when the radio is turned off. Proceedas follows to change the current setting:


2. Touch the screen where the time is displayed.


4. When this feature is on, a check mark will appear inthe box next to the words “Show Time if Radio is Off.”Touch the screen where the words “Show Time if Radio isOff” are displayed to change the current setting.

4


Changing the Time Zone


2. Touch the screen where the time is displayed.


4. Touch the screen where the words “Set Time Zone” aredisplayed. The time zone selection menu will appear onthe screen.

5. Select a time zone by touching the screen where yourselection appears. If you do not see a time zone that youwant to select, touch the screen where the word “Page” isdisplayed to view additional time zones in the menu.

6. Touch the screen where the word “Save” is displayed.

SALES CODE RES — AM/FM STEREO RADIOWITH CD PLAYER (MP3 AUX JACK)

NOTE: The radio sales code is located on the lower rightside of the radio faceplate.

RES Radio


Operating Instructions — Radio Mode

NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACCposition to operate the radio.

Power Switch/Volume Control (Rotary)Push the ON/VOLUME control knob to turn on theradio. Push the ON/VOLUME control knob a secondtime to turn off the radio.

Electronic Volume ControlThe electronic volume control turns continuously (360degrees) in either direction, without stopping. Turningthe ON/VOLUME control knob to the right increases thevolume, and to the left decreases it.

When the audio system is turned on, the sound will beset at the same volume level as last played.

SEEK ButtonsPress and release the SEEK buttons to search for the nextlistenable station in AM/FM mode. Press the right switchto seek up and the left switch to seek down. The radiowill remain tuned to the new station until you makeanother selection. Holding either button will bypassstations without stopping, until you release it.

TIME ButtonPress the TIME button to alternate display of the timeand radio frequency.

Clock Setting Procedure

1. Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink.

2. Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE/SCROLL control knob.

3. After adjusting the hours, press the right side TUNE/SCROLL control knob to set the minutes. The minuteswill begin to blink.

4


4. Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE/SCROLL control knob. Press the TUNE/SCROLL controlknob to save time change.

5. To exit, press any button/knob, or wait five seconds.

RW/FFPressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttonscauses the tuner to search for the next frequency in thedirection of the arrows. This feature operates in eitherAM or FM frequencies.

TUNE ControlTurn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwiseto increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency.

Setting the Tone, Balance, and FadePush the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob and BASSwill display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob tothe right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones.

Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a secondtime and MID will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLLcontrol knob to the right or left to increase or decrease themid-range tones.

Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a thirdtime and TREBLE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLLcontrol knob to the right or left to increase or decrease thetreble tones.

Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fourthtime and BALANCE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust thesound level from the right or left side speakers.

Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fifth timeand FADE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL controlknob to the left or right to adjust the sound level betweenthe front and rear speakers.

Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob again toexit setting tone, balance, and fade.


AM/FM ButtonPress the buttons to select either AM or FM mode.

SET/RND Button — To Set the PushbuttonMemoryWhen you are receiving a station that you wish tocommit to pushbutton memory, press the SET/RNDbutton. The symbol SET 1 will now show in the displaywindow. Select the button (1 to 6) you wish to lock ontothis station and press and release that button. If a buttonis not selected within five seconds after pressing theSET/RND button, the station will continue to play butwill not be stored into pushbutton memory.

You may add a second station to each pushbutton byrepeating the above procedure with this exception: Pressthe SET/RND button twice and SET 2 will show in the

display window. Each button can be set for SET 1 andSET 2 in both AM and FM. This allows a total of 12 AMand 12 FM stations to be stored into pushbutton memory.The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected bypressing the pushbutton twice.

Every time a preset button is used, a correspondingbutton number will display.

Buttons 1 - 6These buttons tune the radio to the stations that youcommit to pushbutton memory (12 AM and 12 FMstations).

DISC ButtonPressing the DISC button will allow you to switch fromAM/FM modes to Disc modes.

4


Operation Instructions — CD MODE For CD AndMP3 Audio Play

NOTE:• The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC

position to operate the radio.

• This radio is capable of playing compact discs (CD),recordable compact discs (CD-R), rewritable compactdiscs (CD-RW), compact discs with MP3 tracks andmultisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks.

Inserting Compact Disc(s)Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CDlabel facing up. The CD will automatically be pulled intothe CD player and the CD icon will illuminate on theradio display. If a CD does not go into the slot more than1.0 in (2.5 cm), a disc may already be loaded and must beejected before a new disc can be loaded.

If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radioON, the unit will switch from radio to CD mode andbegin to play when you insert the disc. The display willshow the track number, and index time in minutes andseconds. Play will begin at the start of track 1.

CAUTION!

• This CD player will accept 4-3/4 in (12 cm) discsonly. The use of other sized discs may damage theCD player mechanism.

• Do not use adhesive labels. These labels can peelaway and jam the player mechanism.

• RES is a single CD player. Do not attempt to inserta second CD if one is already loaded.

• Dual-media disc types (one side is a DVD, theother side is a CD) should not be used, and theycan cause damage to the player.


EJECT Button - Ejecting a CDPress the EJECT button to eject the CD.

If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within10 seconds, it will be reloaded. If the CD is not removed,the radio will reinsert the CD but will not play it.

A disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF.

NOTE: Ejecting with the ignition OFF is not allowed onconvertible or soft-top models (if equipped).

SEEK ButtonPress the right SEEK button for the next selection on theCD. Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginningof the current selection, or return to the beginning of theprevious selection if the CD is within the first second ofthe current selection. Pressing and holding the SEEKbutton will allow faster scrolling through the tracks inCD and MP3 modes.

TIME ButtonPress this button to change the display from a large CDplaying time display to a small CD playing time display.

RW/FFPress and hold the FF (Fast Forward) button and the CDplayer will begin to fast forward until FF is released, orRW or another CD button is pressed. The RW (Reverse)button works in a similar manner.

AM/FM ButtonPress the button to select either AM or FM mode.

SET/RND Button (Random Play Button)Press this button while the CD is playing to activateRandom Play. This feature plays the selections on thecompact disc in random order to provide an interestingchange of pace.

Press the right SEEK button to move to the next ran-domly selected track.

4


Press the RND button a second time to stop RandomPlay.

Notes on Playing MP3 FilesThe radio can play MP3 files; however, acceptable MP3file recording media and formats are limited. Whenwriting MP3 files, pay attention to the following restric-tions.

Supported Media (Disc Types)The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio areCDDA, CD-R, CD-RW, MP3, and CDDA+MP3.

Supported Medium Formats (File Systems)The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension.When reading discs recorded using formats other thanISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2, the radio may fail to readfiles properly and may be unable to play the file nor-mally. UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported.

The radio uses the following limits for file systems:

• Maximum number of folder levels: 8

• Maximum number of files: 255

• Maximum number of folders. (The radio display of filenames and folder names is limited. For large numbersof files and/or folders, the radio may be unable todisplay the file name and folder name, and will assigna number instead. With a maximum number of files,exceeding 20 folders will result in this display. With200 files, exceeding 50 folders will result in thisdisplay.)

• Maximum number of characters in file/folder names:

• Level 1: 12 (including a separator �.� and a three-character extension)



Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio.Multisession discs may contain combinations of normalCD audio tracks and computer files (including MP3 files).Discs created with an option such as �keep disc open afterwriting� are most likely multisession discs. The use ofmultisession for CD audio or MP3 playback may result inlonger disc loading times.

Supported MP3 File FormatsThe radio will recognize only files with the *.MP3 exten-sion as MP3 files. Non-MP3 files named with the *.MP3extension may cause playback problems. The radio isdesigned to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and willnot play the file.

When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data toan MP3 file, the bit rate and sampling frequencies in thefollowing table are supported. In addition, variable bit

rates (VBR) are also supported. The majority of MP3 filesuse a 44.1 kHz sampling rate and a 192, 160, 128, 96 orVBR bit rate.

MPEGSpecification

SamplingFrequency (kHz) Bit Rate (kbps)

MPEG-1 AudioLayer 3 48, 44.1, 32

320, 256, 224,192, 160, 128,

112, 96, 80, 64,56, 48, 40, 32


160, 128, 144,112, 96, 80, 64,

56, 48, 40, 32, 24,16, 8

ID3 Tag information for artist, song title, and album titleare supported for version 1 ID3 tags. ID3 version 2 is notsupported by the radios.

Playlist files are not supported. MP3 Pro files are notsupported.

4


Playback of MP3 FilesWhen a medium containing MP3 data is loaded, theradio checks all files on the medium. If the mediumcontains a lot of folders or files, the radio will take moretime to start playing the MP3 files.

Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affectedby the following:

• Media - CD-RW media may take longer to load thanCD-R media

• Medium formats - Multisession discs may take longerto load than non-multisession discs

• Number of files and folders - Loading times willincrease with more files and folders

To increase the speed of disc loading, it is recommendedto use CD-R media and single-session discs. To create asingle-session disc, enable the “Disc at Once” optionbefore writing to the disc.

Operation Instructions - Auxiliary ModeThe auxiliary (AUX) jack is an audio input jack, whichallows the user to plug in a portable device, such as anMP3 player, or cassette player, and utilize the vehicle’saudio system to amplify the source and play through thevehicle speakers.

Pressing the DISC/AUX button will change the mode toauxiliary device if the AUX jack is connected.

NOTE: The AUX device must be turned on and thedevice’s volume set to proper level. If the AUX audio isnot loud enough, turn the device’s volume up. If the AUXaudio sounds distorted, turn the device’s volume down.

TIME Button (Auxiliary Mode)Press this button to change the display to time of day. Thetime of day will display for five seconds (when ignition isOFF).


SALES CODE RES/RSC — AM/FM STEREORADIO WITH CD PLAYER (MP3 AUX JACK) ANDSIRIUS RADIO

NOTE: The radio sales code is located on the lower rightside of the radio faceplate.

Operating Instructions — Radio Mode


Power Switch/Volume Control (Rotary)Push the ON/VOLUME control knob to turn on theradio. Push the ON/VOLUME control knob a secondtime to turn off the radio.

Electronic Volume ControlThe electronic volume control turns continuously (360degrees) in either direction without stopping. Turning theON/VOLUME control knob to the right increases thevolume and to the left decreases it.

When the audio system is turned on, the sound will beset at the same volume level as last played.

SEEK ButtonsPress and release the SEEK buttons to search for the nextlistenable station in AM/FM mode. Press the right switch

RES/RSC Radio

4


to seek up and the left switch to seek down. The radiowill remain tuned to the new station until you makeanother selection. Holding either button will bypassstations without stopping until you release it.

Voice Recognition System (Radio) — If EquippedRefer to “Voice Recognition (VR)” in the uconnect™ UserManual located on the DVD for further details.

Voice Recognition Button uconnect™ phone — IfEquippedPress this button to operate the uconnect™ phone feature(if equipped). Refer to “Voice Recognition (VR)” in theuconnect™ User Manual located on the DVD for furtherdetails.

If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is notavailable on your vehicle, a “Not Equipped WithUConnect” message will display on the radio screen.

Phone Button uconnect™ phone — If EquippedPress this button to operate the uconnect™ phone feature(if equipped). Refer to “uconnect™ phone” in theuconnect™ User Manual located on the DVD for furtherdetails.

If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is notavailable on your vehicle, a “Not Equipped WithUConnect” message will display on the radio screen.

TIME ButtonPress the TIME button to alternate display of the timeand radio frequency.

Clock Setting Procedure

1. Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink.

2. Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE/SCROLL control knob.


3. After adjusting the hours, press the right side TUNE/SCROLL control knob to set the minutes. The minuteswill begin to blink.

4. Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE/SCROLL control knob. Press the TUNE/SCROLL controlknob to save time change.

5. To exit, press any button/knob or wait five seconds.

The clock can also be set by pressing the SETUP button.For vehicles equipped with satellite radio, press theSETUP button, use the TUNE/SCROLL control to selectSET CLOCK, and then follow the above procedure,starting at Step 2. For vehicles not equipped with satelliteradio, press the SETUP button and then follow the aboveprocedure, starting at Step 2.

INFO ButtonPress the INFO button for an RDS station (one with callletters displayed). The radio will return a Radio Textmessage broadcast from an FM station (FM mode only).

RW/FFPressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttonscauses the tuner to search for the next frequency in thedirection of the arrows. This feature operates in eitherAM or FM frequencies.

TUNE ControlTurn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwiseto increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency.

Setting the Tone, Balance, and FadePush the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob and BASSwill display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob tothe right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones.

4


Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a secondtime and MID will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLLcontrol knob to the right or left to increase or decrease themid-range tones.

Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a thirdtime and TREBLE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLLcontrol knob to the right or left to increase or decrease thetreble tones.

Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fourthtime and BALANCE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust thesound level from the right or left side speakers.

Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fifth timeand FADE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL controlknob to the left or right to adjust the sound level betweenthe front and rear speakers.

Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob again toexit setting tone, balance, and fade.

MUSIC TYPE ButtonPressing this button once will turn on the Music Typemode for five seconds. Pressing the MUSIC TYPE buttonor turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob within fiveseconds will allow the program format type to be se-lected. Many radio stations do not currently broadcastMusic Type information.

Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button to select the followingformat types:

Program Type 16-Digit Character DisplayNo program type or

undefined None

Adult Hits Adlt HitClassical Classicl

Classic Rock Cls Rock


Program Type 16-Digit Character DisplayCollege CollegeCountry Country

Foreign Language LanguageInformation Inform

Jazz JazzNews News

Nostalgia NostalgaOldies Oldies

Personality PersnltyPublic Public

Rhythm and Blues R & BReligious Music Rel MuscReligious Talk Rel Talk

Rock RockSoft Soft

Soft Rock Soft Rck

Program Type 16-Digit Character DisplaySoft Rhythm and Blues Soft R&B

Sports SportsTalk Talk

Top 40 Top 40Weather Weather

By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type iconis displayed, the radio will be tuned to the next frequencystation with the same selected Music Type name. TheMusic Type function only operates when in the FMmode.

If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type(Program Type) mode, the Music Type mode will beexited and the radio will tune to the preset station.

4


SETUP ButtonPressing the SETUP button allows you to select betweenthe following items:

• Set Clock — Pressing the SELECT button will allowyou to set the clock. Adjust the hours by turning theTUNE/SCROLL control knob. After adjusting thehours, press the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to setthe minutes. The minutes will begin to blink. Adjustthe minutes using the right side TUNE/SCROLLcontrol knob. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control knobto save time change.


SET/RND Button — To Set the PushbuttonMemoryWhen you are receiving a station that you wish tocommit to pushbutton memory, press the SET/RNDbutton. The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display

window. Select the button (1–6) you wish to lock onto thisstation and press and release that button. If a button isnot selected within five seconds after pressing the SET/RND button, the station will continue to play but will notbe stored into pushbutton memory.

You may add a second station to each pushbutton byrepeating the above procedure with this exception: Pressthe SET/RND button twice and SET 2 will show in thedisplay window. Each button can be set for SET 1 andSET 2 in both AM and FM. This allows a total of 12 AMand 12 FM stations to be stored into pushbutton memory.The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected bypressing the pushbutton twice.


Buttons 1 - 6These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you committo pushbutton memory (12 AM and 12 FM stations).


DISC/AUX ButtonPressing the DISC/AUX button will allow you to switchfrom AM/FM modes to DISC/AUX mode.

Operation Instructions — CD MODE for CD andMP3 Audio Play

NOTE:• The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC

position to operate the radio.

• This radio is capable of playing compact discs (CD),recordable compact discs (CD-R), rewritable compactdiscs (CD-RW), compact discs with MP3 tracks andmultisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks.

Inserting Compact Disc(s)Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CDlabel facing up. The CD will automatically be pulled intothe CD player and the CD icon will illuminate on the

radio display. If a CD does not go into the slot more than1.0 in (2.5 cm), a disc may already be loaded and must beejected before a new disc can be loaded.

If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radioON, the unit will switch from radio to CD mode andbegin to play when you insert the disc. The display willshow the track number, and index time in minutes andseconds. Play will begin at the start of track 1.

CAUTION!

• This CD player will accept 4–3/4 in (12 cm) discsonly. The use of other sized discs may damage theCD player mechanism.

• Do not use adhesive labels. These labels can peelaway and jam the player mechanism.

• RES is a single CD player. Do not attempt to inserta second CD if one is already loaded.

(Continued)

4


CAUTION! (Continued)• Dual-media disc types (one side is a DVD, the

other side is a CD) should not be used, and theycan cause damage to the player.

EJECT Button - Ejecting a CDPress the EJECT button to eject the CD.

If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within10 seconds, it will be reloaded. If the CD is not removed,the radio will reinsert the CD but will not play it.

A disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF.

NOTE: Ejecting with the ignition OFF is not allowed onconvertible or soft-top models (if equipped).

SEEK ButtonPress the right SEEK button for the next selection on theCD. Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginningof the current selection, or return to the beginning of theprevious selection if the CD is within the first second ofthe current selection. Pressing and holding the SEEKbutton will allow faster scrolling through the tracks inCD and MP3 modes.

TIME ButtonPress this button to change the display from a large CDplaying time display to a small CD playing time display.

RW/FFPress and hold FF (Fast Forward) and the CD player willbegin to fast forward until FF is released or RW oranother CD button is pressed. The RW (Reverse) buttonworks in a similar manner.



SET/RND Button (Random Play Button)Press this button while the CD is playing to activateRandom Play. This feature plays the selections on thecompact disc in random order to provide an interestingchange of pace.

Press the right SEEK button to move to the next ran-domly selected track.

Press the SET/RND button a second time to stop Ran-dom Play.

Notes On Playing MP3 FilesThe radio can play MP3 files; however, acceptable MP3file recording media and formats are limited. Whenwriting MP3 files, pay attention to the following restric-tions.

Supported Media (Disc Types)The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio areCDDA, CD-R, CD-RW, MP3, and CDDA+MP3.

Supported Medium Formats (File Systems)The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension.When reading discs recorded using formats other thanISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2, the radio may fail to readfiles properly and may be unable to play the file nor-mally. UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported.

The radio uses the following limits for file systems:

• Maximum number of folder levels: 8

• Maximum number of files: 255

• Maximum number of folders. (The radio display of filenames and folder names is limited. For large numbersof files and/or folders, the radio may be unable todisplay the file name and folder name and will assigna number instead. With a maximum number of files,exceeding 20 folders will result in this display. With 200files, exceeding 50 folders will result in this display.)

4


• Maximum number of characters in file/folder names:



Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio.Multisession discs may contain combinations of normalCD audio tracks and computer files (including MP3 files).Discs created with an option such as �keep disc open afterwriting� are most likely multisession discs. The use ofmultisession for CD audio or MP3 playback may result inlonger disc loading times.

Supported MP3 File FormatsThe radio will recognize only files with the *.MP3 exten-sion as MP3 files. Non-MP3 files named with the *.MP3extension may cause playback problems. The radio isdesigned to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and willnot play the file.

When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data toan MP3 file, the bit rate and sampling frequencies in thefollowing table are supported. In addition, variable bitrates (VBR) are also supported. The majority of MP3 filesuse a 44.1 kHz sampling rate and a 192, 160, 128, 96 orVBR bit rates.

MPEGSpecification

SamplingFrequency (kHz) Bit Rate (kbps)


320, 256, 224,192, 160, 128,

112, 96, 80, 64,56, 48, 40, 32


160, 128, 144,112, 96, 80, 64,

56, 48, 40, 32, 24,16, 8

ID3 Tag information for artist, song title, and album titleare supported for version 1 ID3 tags. ID3 version 2 is notsupported by the radios.


Playlist files are not supported. MP3 Pro files are notsupported.

Playback of MP3 FilesWhen a medium containing MP3 data is loaded, theradio checks all files on the medium. If the mediumcontains a lot of folders or files, the radio will take moretime to start playing the MP3 files.

Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affectedby the following:

• Media - CD-RW media may take longer to load thanCD-R media

• Medium formats - Multisession discs may take longerto load than non-multisession discs

• Number of files and folders - Loading times willincrease with more files and folders

To increase the speed of disc loading, it is recommendedto use CD-R media and single-session discs. To create asingle-session disc, enable the “Disc at Once” optionbefore writing to the disc.

LIST Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play)Pressing the LIST button will bring up a list of all folderson the disc. Scrolling up or down the list is done byturning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob. Selecting afolder by pressing the TUNE/SCROLL control knob willbegin playing the files contained in that folder (or thenext folder in sequence if the selection does not containplayable files).

The folder list will time out after five seconds.

INFO Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play)Pressing the INFO button repeatedly will scroll throughthe following TAG information: Song Title, Artist, FileName, and Folder Name (if available).

4


Press the INFO button once more to return to �elapsedtime� priority mode.

Press and hold the INFO button for three seconds ormore and the radio will display song titles for each file.

Press and hold the INFO button again for three secondsto return to �elapsed time� display.

Operation Instructions - Auxiliary ModeThe auxiliary (AUX) jack is an audio input jack whichallows the user to plug in a portable device such as anMP3 player or cassette player and utilize the vehicle’saudio system to amplify the source and play through thevehicle speakers.

Pressing the AUX button will change the mode to auxil-iary device if the AUX jack is connected.

NOTE: The AUX device must be turned on and thedevice’s volume set to the proper level. If the AUX audio

is not loud enough, turn the device’s volume up. If theAUX audio sounds distorted, turn the device’s volumedown.

TIME Button (Auxiliary Mode)Press this button to change the display to time of day. Thetime of day will display for five seconds (when theignition is OFF).

Operating Instructions - uconnect™ phone(If Equipped)Refer to “uconnect™ phone” in the uconnect™ UserManual located on the DVD for further details.

Operating Instructions - uconnect™ studios(Satellite Radio) (If Equipped)Refer to “uconnect™ studios (Satellite Radio)” in theuconnect™ User Manual located on the DVD for furtherdetails.


UNIVERSAL CONSUMER INTERFACE (UCI) — IFEQUIPPED

NOTE: This section is for sales code RES and REQ/REL/RET radios only with uconnect™. For sales codeRER, REN, REP, REW or REZ touch-screen radio UCIfeature, refer to the separate RER, REN or REZ User’sManual. UCI is available only if equipped as an optionwith these radios.

This feature allows you to plug an iPod� into the vehicle’ssound system through a 16–pin connector, using theprovided interface cable.

UCI supports Mini, 4G, Photo, Nano, 5G iPod� andiPhone� devices. Some iPod� software versions may notfully support the UCI features. Please visit Apple’swebsite for software updates.

NOTE:• If the radio has a USB port, connecting an iPod� to this

port does not play the media. For playing an iPod�,use the separate 16–pin connector port (in the glovecompartment on some vehicles).

• Connecting an iPod� to the AUX port located in theradio faceplate, plays media, but does not use the UCIfeature to control the connected device.

Connecting The iPod�Use the provided connection cable to connect an iPod� tothe vehicle’s 16–pin connector port (which is located inthe glove compartment on some vehicles). Once theiPod� is connected and synchronized to the vehicle’s UCIsystem (iPod� may take a few seconds to connect), theiPod� starts charging and is ready for use by pressingradio switches, as described below.

4


NOTE:• You may have to remove the connector pin protection

cap from the 16–pin connector port, prior to connect-ing the cable.

• If the iPod� battery is completely discharged, it maynot communicate with the UCI system until a mini-mum charge is attained. Leaving the iPod� connectedto the UCI system may charge it to the required level.

Using This FeatureBy using the provided connection cable to connect aniPod� to the vehicle’s UCI 16–pin connector port:

• The iPod� audio can be played on the vehicle’s soundsystem, providing metadata (artist, track title, album,etc.) information on the radio display.

• The iPod� can be controlled using the radio buttons toPlay, Browse, and List the iPod� contents.

• The iPod� battery charges when plugged into the UCIconnector (if supported by the specific iPod� device)

Controlling The iPod� Using Radio ButtonsTo get into the UCI (iPod�) mode and access a connectediPod�, press the “AUX” button on the radio faceplate.Once in the UCI (iPod�) mode, iPod� audio tracks (ifavailable from iPod�) start playing over the vehicle’saudio system.

Play ModeWhen switched to UCI mode, the iPod� automaticallystarts Play mode. In Play mode, you may use thefollowing buttons on the radio faceplate to control theiPod� and display data:

• Use the TUNE control knob to select the next orprevious track.

• Turning it clockwise (forward) by one click, whileplaying a track, skips to the next track.

• Turning it counterclockwise (backward) by oneclick, during the first two seconds of the track, will


jump to the previous track in the list. Turning thisbutton at any other time in the track, will jump tothe beginning of the current track.

• Jump backward in the current track by pressing andholding the << RW button. Holding the << RWbutton long enough will take you to the beginningof the current track.

• Jump forward in the current track by pressing andholding the FF >> button.

• A single press backward << RW or forward FF >> willjump backward or forward respectively, for fiveseconds.

• Use the << SEEK and SEEK >> buttons to jump to theprevious or next track. If the << SEEK button ispressed during the first two seconds of the track, it willjump to the previous track in the list; if you press thisbutton at any other time in the track, it will jump to the

beginning of the track. If you press the SEEK >>button during play mode, it will jump to the next trackin the list.

• While a track is playing, press the INFO button to seethe associated metadata (artist, track title, album, etc.)for that track. Pressing the INFO button again jumpsto the next screen of data for that track. Once you haveseen all screens, the last INFO button press will takeyou back to the play mode screen on the radio.

• Pressing the REPEAT button will change the iPod�mode to repeat the current playing track.

• Press the SCAN button to use iPod� scan mode, whichwill play the first five seconds of each track in thecurrent list and then forward to the next song. To stopSCAN mode and start playing the desired track, whenit is playing the track, press the SCAN button again.During Scan mode, you can also press the << SEEKand SEEK >> buttons to select the previous and nexttracks.

4


• RND button (available on sales code RES radio only):Pressing this button toggles between Shuffle ON andShuffle OFF modes for the iPod�. If the RND icon isshowing on the radio display, then the shuffle mode isON.

List Or Browse ModeDuring Play mode, pressing any of the buttons describedbelow, takes you to List mode. List mode enables you toscroll through the list of menus and tracks on the iPod�.

• TUNE control knob: The TUNE control knob functionsin a similar manner as the scroll wheel on the iPod�.

• Turning it clockwise (forward) and counterclock-wise (backward) scrolls through the lists, displayingthe track detail on the radio display. Once you havethe track to be played highlighted on the radiodisplay, press the TUNE control knob to select andstart playing the track. Turning the TUNE control

knob fast will scroll through the list faster. Duringfast scroll, you may notice a slight delay in updatingthe information on the radio display.

• During all List modes, the iPod� displays all lists in“wrap-around” mode. So if the track is at thebottom of the list, just turn the wheel backwards(counter-clockwise) to get to the track faster.

• In List mode, the radio PRESET Buttons are used asshortcuts to the following lists on the iPod�.

• Preset 1 – Playlists

• Preset 2 – Artists

• Preset 3 – Albums

• Preset 4 – Genres

• Preset 5 - Audiobooks

• Preset 6 – Podcasts


• Pressing a PRESET button will display the currentlist on the top line and the first item in that list onthe second line.

• To Exit List mode without selecting a track, press thesame PRESET button again to go back to Playmode.

• LIST button: The LIST button will display the toplevel menu of the iPod�. Turn the TUNE control knobto list the top-menu item you wish to select and pressthe TUNE control knob. This will display the nextsub-menu list item on the iPod� then you can followthe same steps to go to the desired track in that list.Not all iPod� sub-menu levels are available on thissystem.

• MUSIC TYPE button: The MUSIC TYPE button isanother shortcut button to the genre listing on youriPod�.

CAUTION!

• Leaving the iPod� (or any supported device) any-where in the vehicle in extreme heat or cold canalter the operation or damage the device. Followthe device manufacturer’s guidelines.

• Placing items on the iPod�, or connections to theiPod� in the vehicle, can cause damage to thedevice and/or to the connectors.

WARNING!

Do not plug in or remove the iPod� while driving.Failure to follow this warning could result in anaccident.

4


uconnect™ studios (SATELLITE RADIO) — IFEQUIPPED (REN/RER/RBZ/RES RADIOS ONLY)Satellite radio uses direct satellite-to-receiver broadcast-ing technology to provide clear digital sound, coast tocoast. The subscription service provider is Sirius SatelliteRadio. This service offers over 130 channels of music,sports, news, entertainment, and programming for chil-dren, directly from its satellites and broadcasting studios.

NOTE: Sirius service is not available in Hawaii and haslimited coverage in Alaska.

System ActivationSirius Satellite Radio service is pre-activated, and youmay begin listening immediately to the one year of audioservice that is included with the factory-installed satelliteradio system in your vehicle. Sirius will supply a wel-come kit that contains general information, includinghow to setup your on-line listening account. For further

information, call the toll-free number 888-539-7474, orvisit the Sirius web site at www.sirius.com, or at www-.siriuscanada.ca for Canadian residents.

Electronic Serial Number/Sirius IdentificationNumber (ESN/SID)Please have the following information available whencalling:

1. The Electronic Serial Number/Sirius IdentificationNumber (ESN/SID).

2. Your Vehicle Identification Number.

To access the ESN/SID, refer to the following steps:

ESN/SID Access With RES RadiosWith the ignition switch in the ON/RUN or ACC posi-tion and the radio on, press the SETUP button and scrollusing the TUNE/SCROLL control knob until Sirius ID isselected. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control knob and the


Sirius ID number will display. The Sirius ID numberdisplay will time out in two minutes. Press any button onthe radio to exit this screen.

ESN/SID Access With REN/RER/RBZ RadiosWhile in SAT mode, press the MENU button on the radiofaceplate.

Next, touch the SUBSCRIPTION tab on the touch screen.All the ESNs that apply to your vehicle will display.

Selecting uconnect™ studios (Satellite) ModePress the SAT button until �SAT� appears in the display. ACD may remain in the radio while in the Satellite radiomode.

Satellite AntennaTo ensure optimum reception, do not place items on theroof around the rooftop antenna location. Metal objectsplaced within the line of sight of the antenna will causedecreased performance. Larger luggage items such as

bikes should be placed as far rearward as possible, withinthe loading design of the rack. Do not place items directlyon or above the antenna.

Reception QualitySatellite reception may be interrupted due to one of thefollowing reasons:

• The vehicle is parked in an underground parkingstructure or under a physical obstacle.

• Dense tree coverage may interrupt reception in theform of short audio mutes.

• Driving under wide bridges or along tall buildings cancause intermittent reception.

• Placing objects over or too close to the antenna cancause signal blockage.

4


Operating Instructions - uconnect™ studios(Satellite) Mode


SEEK ButtonsPress and release the SEEK buttons to search for the nextchannel in Satellite mode. Press the right switch to seekup and the left switch to seek down. The radio willremain tuned to the new channel until you make anotherselection. Holding either button will bypass channelswithout stopping until you release it.

SCAN ButtonPressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search forthe next channel, pausing for eight seconds before con-tinuing to the next. To stop the search, press the SCANbutton a second time.

INFO ButtonPressing the INFO button will cycle the display informa-tion between Artist, Song Title, and Composer (if avail-able). Also, pressing and holding the INFO button for anadditional three seconds will make the radio display theSong Title all of the time (press and hold again to returnto normal display).

RW/FFPressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttonscauses the tuner to search for the next channel in thedirection of the arrows.

TUNE Control (Rotary)Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwiseto increase or counterclockwise to decrease the channel.

MUSIC TYPE ButtonPressing this button once will turn on the Music Typemode for five seconds. Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button


or turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob within fiveseconds will allow the program format type to be se-lected.Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button again to select the musictype.By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Typefunction is active, the radio will be tuned to the nextchannel with the same selected Music Type name.If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type(Program Type) mode, the Music Type mode will beexited and the radio will tune to the preset channel.

SETUP ButtonPressing the SETUP button allows you to select thefollowing items:

• Display Sirius ID number — Press the AUDIO/SELECT button to display the Sirius ID number. Thisnumber is used to activate, deactivate, or change theSirius subscription.

SET Button – To Set the Pushbutton MemoryWhen you are receiving a channel that you wish tocommit to pushbutton memory, press the SET button.The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window.Select the button (1-6) you wish to lock onto this channeland press and release that button. If a button is notselected within five seconds after pressing the SET but-ton, the channel will continue to play but will not bestored into pushbutton memory.

You may add a second channel to each pushbutton byrepeating the above procedure with this exception: Pressthe SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the displaywindow. Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2. Thisallows a total of 12 Satellite channels to be stored intopushbutton memory. The channels stored in SET 2memory can be selected by pressing the pushbuttontwice.

4



Buttons 1 - 6These buttons tune the radio to the channels that youcommit to pushbutton memory (12 Satellite stations).

Operating Instructions - uconnect™ phone(If Equipped)Refer to “uconnect™ phone” in the uconnect™ UserManual located on the DVD for further details.

uconnect™ studios (SIRIUS BACKSEAT TV™) —IF EQUIPPEDSatellite video uses direct satellite receiver broadcastingtechnology to provide streaming video. The subscriptionservice provider is SIRIUS Satellite Radio. SIRIUS Back-seat TV™ offers three video channels for family enter-tainment, directly from its satellites and broadcastingstudios.

NOTE: SIRIUS service is not available in Hawaii orCanada and has limited coverage in Alaska.

Refer to your Video Entertainment System (VES)™, RERNavigation, RBZ Multimedia or REN Multimedia UserManuals for detailed operating instructions.

VIDEO ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM (VES)™ — IFEQUIPPEDThe optional Video Entertainment System (VES)™ isavailable with:

• One or two video screens

• Third row swivel screen — If Equipped

• Additional single-disc DVD player with two-screensystem

• Battery-powered two-channel remote control

• Two remote headphones


• Integrated remote storage in either screen location

• Three different medias can be played simultaneously(Cabin speakers and Headphone Channels 1 and 2)

• Easy menu-driven functions on touch-screen radios

• Video and audio input jacks available in rear seatingarea

• Ten different medias to choose from in each screen(AM, FM, Sirius Radio, Sirius Backseat TV™, DVD1,DVD2, Hard Disc Drive (HDD), AUX in radio, AUX1,AUX2)

The LCD screen(s) are located in the overhead compart-ment console.

Overhead Video Screens

4


NOTE: Refer to the “uconnect™ studios” section ofuconnect™ User Manual located on the DVD for furtherdetails.

REMOTE SOUND SYSTEM CONTROLS — IFEQUIPPED

The remote sound system controls are located on the rearsurface of the steering wheel, at the three and nineo’clock positions.

VES™ Remote Control Location

Remote Sound System Controls(Back View Of Steering Wheel)


The right-hand rocker switch has a pushbutton in thecenter, and controls the volume and mode of the soundsystem. Pressing the top of the rocker switch will increasethe volume. Pressing the bottom of the rocker switch willdecrease the volume. Pressing the center button changesthe operation of the radio from AM to FM, or Tape to CDmode, depending on which radio is in the vehicle.

The left-hand rocker switch has a pushbutton in thecenter. The function of the left-hand switch is different,depending on which mode you are in.

The following describes the left-hand rocker switch op-eration in each mode.

Radio OperationPressing the top of the switch will SEEK up for the nextlistenable station, and pressing the bottom of the switchwill SEEK down for the next listenable station.

The button located in the center of the left-hand switchwill tune to the next preset station that you have pro-grammed in the radio preset pushbutton.

CD PlayerPressing the top of the switch once will go to the nexttrack on the CD. Pressing the bottom of the switch oncewill go to the beginning of the current track, or to thebeginning of the previous track if it is within one secondafter the current track begins to play.If you press the switch up or down twice it plays thesecond track; three times, it will play the third, etc.The button in the center of the left-hand switch has nofunction in this mode.

CD/DVD MAINTENANCETo keep a CD/DVD in good condition, take the followingprecautions:1. Handle the disc by its edge; avoid touching thesurface.

4


2. If the disc is stained, clean the surface with a soft cloth,wiping from center to edge.

3. Do not apply paper or tape to the disc; avoid scratch-ing the disc.

4. Do not use solvents such as benzene, thinner, cleaners,or anti-static sprays.

5. Store the disc in its case after playing.

6. Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight.

7. Do not store the disc where temperatures may becometoo high.

NOTE: If you experience difficulty in playing a particu-lar disc, it may be damaged (i.e., scratched, reflectivecoating removed, a hair, moisture or dew on the disc)oversized, or have protection encoding. Try a knowngood disc before considering disc player service.

RADIO OPERATION AND CELLULAR PHONESUnder certain conditions, the cellular phone being on inyour vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance fromyour radio. This condition may be lessened or eliminatedby relocating the cellular phone antenna. This conditionis not harmful to the radio. If your radio performancedoes not satisfactorily “clear” by the repositioning of theantenna, it is recommended that the radio volume beturned down or off during cellular phone operation.

CLIMATE CONTROLSThe Climate Control System allows you to regulate thetemperature, amount, and direction of air circulatingthroughout the vehicle. The controls are located on theinstrument panel, below the radio.


Manual Heating and Air Conditioning System — IfEquippedThe controls for the manual system in this vehicle containa series of outer rotary dials and inner push knobs. Thesecomfort controls can be set to obtain desired interiorconditions.

Front Blower ControlThere are four blower speeds. Use thiscontrol to regulate the amount of airforced through the system in anymode you select. The blower speedincreases as you move the controlclockwise from the off position.

NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Remote Start, theclimate controls will not function during Remote Startoperation if the blower control is left in the “O” (Off)position.

Manual Temperature Control

4


Temperature ControlUse this control to regulate the tem-perature of the air inside the passengercompartment. Rotating the knob coun-terclockwise, from top center into theblue area indicates cooler tempera-tures. Rotating the knob clockwise,into the red area, indicates warmertemperatures.

NOTE: If your air conditioning performance seemslower than expected, check the front of the A/C con-denser (located in front of the radiator), for an accumu-lation of dirt or insects. Clean with a gentle water sprayfrom behind the radiator and through the condenser.Fabric front fascia protectors may reduce airflow to thecondenser, reducing air conditioning performance.

Mode Control (Air Direction)Mode control allows you to choosefrom several selections of air distribu-tion. You can select either a primarymode, as identified by the symbols, ora blend of two of these modes. Thecloser the control is to a particularmode, the more air distribution youreceive from that mode.

Panel ModeAir is directed through the outlets in the instrumentpanel. These outlets can be adjusted for direction,

and turned on or off to control airflow.

NOTE: For maximum airflow to the rear, the centerinstrument panel outlets can be directed toward the rearseat passengers.


Bi-Level ModeAir is directed through the panel and floor outlets.

NOTE: There is a difference in temperature (in anyconditions other than full cold or full hot), between theupper and lower outlets for added comfort. The warmerair goes to the floor outlets. This feature gives improvedcomfort during sunny but cool conditions.

Floor ModeAir is directed through the floor outlets with asmall amount through the defrost and side window

demist outlets.

Mix ModeAir is directed through the floor, defrost and sidewindow demist outlets. This setting works best incold or snowy conditions that require extra heat at

the windshield. This setting is good for maintainingcomfort, while reducing moisture on the windshield.

Defrost ModeAir is directed through the windshield and sidewindow demist outlets. Use DEFROST mode with

maximum blower and temperature settings for bestwindshield and side window defrosting.

NOTE: The air conditioning compressor operates inMIX and DEFROST, or a blend of these modes even if theA/C button is not pressed. This dehumidifies the air tohelp dry the windshield. To improve fuel economy, usethese modes only when necessary.

Recirculation ControlPress this button to choose between outside airintake or recirculation of the air inside thevehicle. A lamp will illuminate when you are inRECIRCULATION mode. Only use the RECIR-

CULATION mode to temporarily block out any outsideodors, smoke, or dust, and to cool the interior rapidlyupon initial start-up in very hot or humid weather.

4


NOTE:• If the RECIRCULATION button is pressed when the

system is in MIX, DEFROST, or FLOOR mode theRECIRCULATION LED indicator will flash 3 timesand then turn off to indicate RECIRCULATION modeis not allowed.

• Continuous use of the RECIRCULATION mode maymake the inside air stuffy and window fogging mayoccur. Extended use of this mode is not recommended.

• In cold or damp weather, the use of the RECIRCULA-TION mode will cause windows to fog on the insidebecause of moisture buildup inside the vehicle. Formaximum defogging, select the outside air position.

• In order to prevent fogging, when the RECIRCULA-TION button is pressed and the mode control is set toPANEL, the A/C will engage automatically.

• The A/C can be deselected manually without disturb-ing the mode control selection.

Economy ModeIf ECONOMY mode is desired, press the A/C button toturn off the indicator light and the A/C compressor.Rotate the temperature control knob to the desiredtemperature.

Air Conditioning OperationPush on this button to engage the AirConditioning (A/C). A light will illu-minate when the A/C System is en-gaged.

NOTE: The air conditioning compressor will not engageuntil the engine has been running for about 10 seconds.


Max A/CFor maximum cooling use the A/C and RECIRCULA-TION mode buttons at the same time.

Three-Zone Temperature Control — If EquippedWith the Three-Zone Temperature Control System, eachfront seat occupant can independently control the Heat-ing, Ventilation, and Air Conditioning operations comingfrom the outlets on their side of the vehicle.

Front Upper Three Zone Temperature Control

1 – Left Temperature 7 – Right Temperature2 – PANEL 8 – Rear DEFROST3 – BI-LEVEL 9 – RECIRCULATION4 – Front Blower 10 – Front DEFROST5 – FLOOR 11 – Air Conditioning (A/C)6 – MIX

4


The Three-Zone Temperature Control bottom panel con-trols rear Heating, Ventilation, and Air Conditioningoperations.

The primary control for the rear blower is on the frontclimate control unit located on the instrument panel.

The Three-Zone Temperature Control bottom panel hasfive positions; off, rear, and a range of blower speeds.Only when the primary control for the rear blower is inthe rear (RR) position do the second row seat occupantshave control of the rear blower speed.

Rear Manual Climate Control — If EquippedThe Rear Manual Climate Control system has floor airoutlets at the rear of the right side sliding door, andoverhead outlets at each outboard rear seating position.The unit provides warm or cool air through the floor andupper outlets.

The rear blower and temperature controls for the rearseat passengers are located in the headliner, near thecenter of the vehicle.

Front Lower Three-Zone Temperature Control Features

1 – Left Heated Seat 3 – Rear Temperature2 – Rear Blower 4 – Right Heated Seat


Rear Blower ControlThe primary control for the rear blower is on the frontclimate control unit, located on the instrument panel.

Only when the front control for the rear blower is in theRR position do the second row seat occupants havecontrol of the rear blower speed.

The rear blower control, located in the rear overheadconsole, has an off position and a range of blower speeds.This allows the second row seat occupants to control thevolume of air circulated in the rear of the vehicle.

Rear Manual Climate Controls

1 – Rear Blower 3 – Rear Climate Control Lock2 – Rear Temperature 4 – Rear MODE

4


CAUTION!

Interior air enters the Rear Manual Climate Controlsystem through an intake grille, located in the pas-senger side trim panel behind the third row seats.The heater outlets are located in the passenger sidetrim panel, just behind the sliding door. Do not blockor place objects directly in front of the inlet grille orheater outlets. The electrical system could overload,causing damage to the blower motor.

Rear Temperature ControlWhen the blower knob on the front climate control unit isset to any position other than the rear temperaturesettings will be controlled by the rear temperature controlknob on the front climate control unit. The rear modeselection RR, allows the settings to be controlled by therear mode control knob.

To change the temperature in the rear of the vehicle,rotate the temperature control knob counterclockwise forcold air, and clockwise for heated air.

When rear controls are locked by the front system, thelock symbol on the temperature knob is illuminated, andthe rear overhead adjustments are inoperable.


The rear airflow modes will mirror the front unit opera-tion. Rear PANEL mode is automatically selected whenthe front control is in the PANEL mode. When the frontunit is in BI-LEVEL mode, airflow will be emitted fromboth the upper and lower rear outlets. When the frontcontrol is in FLOOR, DEFROST, or MIX modes, airflowwill be directed out of the rear floor outlets.

Rear Mode Control

Headliner ModeAir comes from the outlets in the headliner. Each ofthese outlets can be individually adjusted to direct

the flow of air. Moving the air vanes of the outlets to oneside will shut off the airflow.

Bi-Level ModeAir comes from both the headliner outlets and thefloor outlets.

NOTE: In many temperature positions, the BI-LEVELmode is designed to provide cooler air out of the head-liner outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets.

Floor ModeAir comes from the floor outlets.

Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) — IfEquipped

• Front Three-Zone ATC allows both driver and frontpassenger seat occupant, and rear seat occupants toselect individual comfort settings.

4


• Occupants in the vehicle select AUTO mode operationby a button press on the right rotary knob and acomfort temperature setting using rotary knobs on thecontrol unit.

• The system can be controlled manually, if desired.

• SYNC feature links the controls for all three zones,allowing one comfort setting for the cabin, if desired.

The Three-Zone ATC System automatically maintains theinterior comfort level desired by the driver and allpassengers. The system automatically adjusts the airtemperature, the airflow volume, amount of outside airrecirculation and the airflow direction. This maintains acomfortable temperature, even under changing condi-tions.

Front Upper ATC Panel

1 - System On/Off 9 - Air Conditioning (A/C)On/Off

2 - Blower Indicator 10 - AUTO Mode / Blower3 - Left Front Temperature 11 - Front MODE4 - Rear Blower /Temperature / Mode

12 - RECIRCULATE

5 - SYNC Indicator 13 - Front DEFROST6 - A/C Indicator 14 - Front Blower Speed7 - Right Front Temperature 15 - SYNC8 - Front MODE Indicator


Automatic Operation

1. Press the AUTO button on the Front Upper ATC Paneland the word AUTO will illuminate in the front ATCdisplay, along with three temperatures for driver, frontpassenger, and rear seats. The system will then automati-cally regulate the amount of airflow.

2. Next, adjust the temperature you would like thesystem to maintain, by adjusting the driver, front passen-ger, and rear seat rotary temperature knobs. Once thedesired temperature is displayed, the system will achieveand automatically maintain that comfort level.

3. When the system is set up for your comfort level, it isnot necessary to change the settings. You will experiencethe greatest efficiency by simply allowing the system tofunction automatically.

Front Lower ATC Panel

1 - Rear Blower Speed 4 - Rear ATC Lock2 - Rear Temperature /Rear System On/Off

5 - Rear DEFROST

3 - Rear MODE

4


NOTE:• It is not necessary to move the temperature settings for

cold or hot vehicles. The system automatically adjuststhe temperature, mode and fan speed to providecomfort as quickly as possible.

• The temperature can be displayed in English or Metricunits by selecting the “Display Units of Measure in”customer-programmable feature. Refer to the “Elec-tronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) — Customer-Programmable Features” in this Section.

To provide you with maximum comfort in the automaticmode, during cold start-ups, the blower fan will remainon low and the DELAY symbol will appear in the frontATC display, until the engine warms up. The fan willengage immediately if the DEFROST mode is selected, orby pressing the Front Upper ATC Panel blower rockerbutton and setting the fan to any fixed blower speed.

Manual OperationThis system offers a full complement of manual overridefeatures. The AUTO symbol in the front ATC display willbe turned off when the system is being used in themanual mode.

NOTE: Each of these features operate independentlyfrom each other. If any one feature is controlled manually,the temperature doors will continue to operate automati-cally.

The blower fan speed can be set to any fixed speed bypressing the Front Upper ATC Panel blower rockerbutton. The fan will now operate at a fixed speed untiladditional speeds are selected. This allows the frontoccupants to control the volume of air circulated in thevehicle and cancel the AUTO mode.

The operator can also select the direction of the airflowby selecting one of the following positions.


Panel ModeAir is directed through the outlets in the instrumentpanel. These outlets can be adjusted for direction,

and turned on or off to control airflow.

NOTE: For maximum airflow to the rear, the centerinstrument panel outlets can be directed toward the rearseat passengers.

Bi-Level ModeAir comes from the instrument panel outlets, flooroutlets and defrost outlets. A slight amount of air is

also directed through the side window demister outlets.

NOTE: In many temperature positions, the BI-LEVELmode is designed to provide cooler air out of the paneloutlets and warmer air from the floor outlets.

Floor ModeAir comes from the floor outlets. A slight amount ofair is directed through the defrost and side window

demister outlets.

Mix ModeAir comes from the floor, defrost and side windowdemist outlets. This mode works best in cold orsnowy conditions. It allows you to stay comfort-

able, while keeping the windshield clear.

Defrost ModeAir comes from the windshield and side windowdemist outlets. Use DEFROST mode with maxi-

mum blower and temperature settings for best wind-shield and side window defrosting.

NOTE: While operating in the other modes, the systemwill not automatically sense the presence of fog, mist orice on the windshield. DEFROST mode must be manuallyselected to clear the windshield and side glass.

4


The SNOWFLAKE mode, or A/C button, allowsthe operator to manually activate or deactivate theair conditioning system. When in SNOWFLAKE

mode, and the ATC display is on cool, dehumidified airflows through the air outlets. If ECONOMY mode isdesired, press the SNOWFLAKE button to turn off theSNOWFLAKE mode in the ATC display, and deactivatethe A/C system.

NOTE:• If the system is in Mix or Defrost Mode, the SNOW-

FLAKE can be turned off, but the A/C system shallremain active to prevent fogging of the windows.

• If fog or mist appears on the windshield or side glass,select DEFROST mode and increase blower speed.

Recirculation ControlWhen outside air contains smoke, odors, orhigh humidity, or if rapid cooling is desired,you may wish to recirculate interior air bypressing the RECIRCULATION mode control

button. RECIRCULATION mode should only be usedtemporarily. The recirculation symbol will illuminate inthe display when this button is selected. Push the buttona second time to turn off the RECIRCULATION modeLED and allow outside air into the vehicle.

NOTE: In cold weather, use of the RECIRCULATIONmode may lead to excessive window fogging. The RE-CIRCULATION mode is not allowed in the FLOOR, MIXand DEFROST modes to improve window clearing op-eration. Recirculation will be disabled automatically ifthese modes are selected.


Rear Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) — IfEquippedThe Rear ATC System has floor air outlets at the rear ofthe right side sliding door, and overhead outlets at eachoutboard rear seating position. The system providesheated air through the floor outlets or cool, dehumidifiedair through the headliner outlets.

The REAR SYSTEM control for the Rear ATC System ison the front lower ATC panel located on the instrumentpanel.

Pressing the REAR LOCK button for the Rear ATCSystem from the front lower ATC panel, illuminates aLOCK symbol in the rear display. The rear temperatureand air source are controlled from the front lower ATCpanel.

Rear second row occupants can only adjust the rear ATCcontrol when the REAR LOCK button is turned off.

The Rear ATC System is located in the headliner, near thecenter of the vehicle.

Rear ATC Control Features

1 - Blower Speed 3 - Rear ATC Lock2 - Rear Temperature 4 - Rear MODE

4


1. Press the REAR LOCK button on the front lower ATCpanel. This turns off the REAR LOCK icon in the reartemperature knob.

2. Rotate the Rear Blower, Rear Temperature and theRear Mode Control knobs to suit your comfort needs.

3. ATC is selected by adjusting the rear blower knobcounterclockwise to AUTO.

Once the desired temperature is displayed, the ATCSystem will automatically achieve and maintain thatcomfort level. When the system is set up for your comfortlevel, it is not necessary to change the settings. You willexperience the greatest efficiency by simply allowing thesystem to function automatically.

NOTE:• It is not necessary to move the temperature settings for

cold or hot vehicles. The system automatically adjuststhe temperature, mode and fan speed to providecomfort as quickly as possible.

• The temperature can be displayed in English or Metricunits by selecting the “Display Units of Measure in”customer-programmable feature. Refer to the “Elec-tronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) — Customer-Programmable Features” in this Section.

Rear Blower ControlThe rear blower control knob can be manually set to off,or any fixed blower speed, by rotating the knob from lowto high. This allows the rear seat occupants to control thevolume of air circulated in the rear of the vehicle.


CAUTION!

Interior air enters the Rear Automatic TemperatureControl System through an intake grille, located inthe passenger side trim panel behind the third rowseats. The heater outlets are located in the passengerside trim panel, just behind the sliding door. Do notblock or place objects directly in front of the inletgrille or heater outlets. The electrical system couldoverload causing damage to the blower motor.

Rear Temperature ControlTo change the temperature in the rear of the vehicle,rotate the temperature knob counterclockwise to lowerthe temperature, and clockwise to increase the tempera-ture. The REAR temperature settings are displayed in thefront upper ATC panel.

When rear controls are locked by the front system, theLOCK symbol on the temperature knob is illuminatedand any rear overhead adjustments are ignored.

4


Rear Mode Control

Auto ModeThe rear system automatically maintains the correct modeand comfort level desired by the rear seat occupants.

Headliner ModeAir comes from the outlets in the headliner. Each ofthese outlets can be individually adjusted to direct

the flow of air. Moving the air vanes of the outlets to oneside will shut off the airflow.

Bi-Level ModeAir comes from both the headliner outlets and thefloor outlets.

NOTE: In many temperature positions, the BI-LEVELmode is designed to provide cooler air out of the head-liner outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets.

Floor ModeAir comes from the floor outlets.

Summer OperationThe engine cooling system in air conditioned vehiclesmust be protected with a high-quality antifreeze coolantto provide proper corrosion protection and to protectagainst engine overheating. A solution of 50% ethyleneglycol antifreeze coolant and 50% water is recommended.Refer to “Maintenance Procedures” in Section 7 of thismanual for proper coolant selection.


Winter OperationTo ensure the best possible heater and defroster perfor-mance, make sure the engine cooling system is function-ing properly and the proper amount, type, and concen-tration of coolant is used. Refer to “MaintenanceProcedures” in section 7 of this manual for proper coolantselection. Use of the air RECIRCULATION mode duringWinter months is not recommended, because it maycause window fogging.

Vacation/StorageBefore you store your vehicle, or keep it out of service(i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the airconditioning system at idle for about five minutes, infresh air with the blower setting on high. This will ensureadequate system lubrication to minimize the possibilityof compressor damage when the system is started again.

Window FoggingVehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in mild, rainyand/or humid weather. To clear the windows, selectDEFROST or MIX mode and increase the front blowerspeed. Do not use the RECIRCULATION mode withoutA/C for long periods, as fogging may occur.

Outside Air IntakeMake sure the air intake, located directly in front of thewindshield, is free of obstructions such as leaves. Leavescollected in the air intake may reduce airflow, and if theyenter the plenum they could plug the water drains. InWinter months make sure the air intake is clear of ice,slush and snow.

4


Operating Tips A/C Air Filter— If EquippedOn vehicles equipped with Automatic Temperature Con-trol (ATC), the climate control system filters out dust andpollen from the air. Refer to “Air Conditioning” in Sec-tion 7 of this manual for filter replacement instructions.


STARTING AND OPERATING

CONTENTS

� Starting Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311

▫ Automatic Transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311

▫ Normal Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311

▫ Extreme Cold Weather(Below �20°F Or –29°C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312

▫ If The Engine Fails To Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312

▫ After Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313

� Engine Block Heater — If Equipped . . . . . . . . 313

� Automatic Transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314

▫ Key Ignition Park Interlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314

▫ Brake/Transaxle Interlock System . . . . . . . . . 315

▫ Four-Speed Or Six-Speed AutomaticTransaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315

▫ Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316

� Driving On Slippery Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321

▫ Acceleration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321

▫ Traction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321

5

� Driving Through Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322

▫ Flowing/Rising Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322

▫ Shallow Standing Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322

� Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324

▫ Power Steering Fluid Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325

� Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325

� Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . 327

▫ Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . 328

� Electronic Brake Control System . . . . . . . . . . . 329

▫ Traction Control System (TCS) . . . . . . . . . . . 329

▫ Brake Assist System (BAS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330

▫ Electronic Stability Control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . 331

� Tire Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334

▫ Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334

▫ Tire Identification Number (TIN) . . . . . . . . . 338

▫ Tire Loading And Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . 339

� Tires — General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343

▫ Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343

� Tire Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350

� Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351

� Tire Rotation Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . 351

� Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) . . . . . . . 352

▫ Base System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355

▫ Premium System — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . 357

308 STARTING AND OPERATING

� Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361

▫ 3.3L And 3.8L Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361

▫ 4.0L Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361

▫ Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362

▫ Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362

▫ E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles . . . . . . 363

▫ MMT In Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363

▫ Materials Added To Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364

▫ Fuel System Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364

▫ Carbon Monoxide Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . 365

� Flexible Fuel (3.3L Engines Only) —If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366

▫ E-85 General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366

▫ Ethanol Fuel (E-85) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367

▫ Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367

▫ Selection Of Engine Oil For Flexible FuelVehicles E-85 And Gasoline Vehicles . . . . . . . 368

▫ Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368

▫ Cruising Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369

▫ Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369

▫ Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369

� Adding Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369

▫ Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369

▫ Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message . . . . . . . . . . . 371

� Vehicle Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371

▫ Vehicle Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371

5

STARTING AND OPERATING 309

� Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375

▫ Common Towing Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . 375

▫ Towing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388

� Recreational Towing(Behind Motorhome, Etc.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389


STARTING PROCEDURESBefore starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, adjust theinside and outside mirrors, fasten your seat belt, and ifpresent, instruct all other occupants to buckle their seatbelts.

WARNING!

• Never leave unattended children alone in a ve-hicle. Leaving children in a vehicle is dangerousfor a number of reasons. A child or others could beseriously or fatally injured. Do not leave the keyfob in the ignition. A child could operate powerwindows, other controls, or move the vehicle.

• Do not leave animals or children inside parkedvehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up maycause serious injury or death.

Automatic TransaxleThe shift lever must be in the NEUTRAL or PARKposition before you can start the engine. Press the brakepedal before shifting into any driving gear.

Normal Starting

1. Do not press the accelerator.

2. Use the Fob with Integrated Key to briefly turn theignition switch to the START position and release it assoon as the starter engages. The starter motor willcontinue to run, and it will disengage automaticallywhen the engine is running.

3. If the engine fails to start, the starter will disengageautomatically in 10 seconds. If this occurs, turn theignition switch to the OFF position, wait 10 to 15 seconds,then repeat the “Normal Starting” procedure (Steps 1–3above).

5


NOTE: This vehicle is equipped with a transaxle shiftinterlocking system. The brake pedal must be pressedto shift out of PARK.

Extreme Cold Weather (Below �20°F or –29°C)Follow the same instructions in the “Normal Starting”procedure.

To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures, use ofan externally powered electric engine block heater (avail-able from your authorized dealer) is recommended.

If The Engine Fails To Start

WARNING!

• Never pour fuel or other flammable liquids intothe throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt tostart the vehicle. This could result in a flash firecausing serious personal injury.

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)• Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get

it started. Vehicles equipped with an automatictransaxle cannot be started this way. Unburnedfuel could enter the catalytic converter and oncethe engine has started, ignite and damage theconverter and vehicle.

• If the vehicle has a discharged battery, boostercables may be used to obtain a start from a boosterbattery or the battery in another vehicle. This typeof start can be dangerous if done improperly. Referto “Jump Starting” in Section 6 of this manual.

If the engine fails to start after you have followed the“Normal Starting” procedure, it may be flooded. Pushthe accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and hold itthere while cranking the engine. This should clear anyexcess fuel in case the engine is flooded.


CAUTION!

To prevent damage to the starter, DO NOT crank theengine for more than 15–second intervals at one time.Wait 10 to 15 seconds before trying again.

If the engine has been flooded, it may start to run, but nothave enough power to continue running when the keyfob is released. If this occurs, continue cranking with theaccelerator pedal pushed all the way to the floor. Releasethe accelerator pedal and the key fob once the engine isrunning smoothly.

If the engine shows no sign of starting after two 15–second intervals of cranking with the accelerator pedalheld to the floor, the “Normal Starting” procedure shouldbe repeated.

After StartingThe idle speed will automatically decrease as the enginewarms up.

ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPEDThe engine block heater warms the engine, and permitsquicker starts in cold weather. Connect the electrical cordto a standard 110-115 Volt AC electrical outlet with agrounded, three-wire extension cord.

The engine block heater cord is routed under the hood onthe driver’s side of the vehicle. It has a removable capthat is located on the driver side of the Integrated PowerModule.

WARNING!

Remember to disconnect the electrical cord beforedriving. Damage to the 110-115 volt electrical cordcould cause electrocution.

5


AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE

CAUTION!

Damage to the transaxle may occur if the followingprecautions are not observed:• Move the shift lever into PARK only after the

vehicle has come to a complete stop.• Do not move the shift lever from REVERSE,

PARK, or NEUTRAL into any forward gear whenthe engine is above idle speed.

• Before moving the shift lever into any gear, makesure your foot is firmly on the brake pedal.

NOTE: You must press and hold the brake pedal downwhile shifting out of PARK.

WARNING!

It is dangerous to move the shift lever out of PARK orNEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than idlespeed. If your foot is not firmly on the brake pedal,the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or inreverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hitsomeone or something. Only shift into gear when theengine is idling normally and when your foot isfirmly on the brake pedal.

Key Ignition Park InterlockThis vehicle is equipped with a Key Ignition Park Inter-lock which requires the shift lever to be placed in PARKprior to rotating the key fob to the LOCK position. Thekey fob can only be removed from the ignition when theignition switch is in the LOCK position and once re-moved the shift lever is locked in PARK.


Brake/Transaxle Interlock SystemThis vehicle is equipped with a Brake Transmission ShiftInterlock System (BTSI) that holds the shift lever in thePARK position when the ignition switch is in the LOCKposition. To move the shift lever out of the PARKposition, the ignition switch must be turned to any otherswitch position (ACC, ON, or START) (engine running ornot) and the brake pedal must be pressed.

Automatic Transaxle Ignition Interlock SystemFor electrical system malfunctions, there is an overridefor the interlock system. In order to override this system,remove the cover located to the top right of the shift leverin the instrument panel. The override can be activated bypressing the white-colored tab, which can be accessedthrough the hole in the instrument panel. While theoverride is pressed, the shift lever can be moved out ofthe PARK position without pressing the brake pedal.After operation, return the cover to its original position.

This system prevents the key fob from being removedunless the shift lever is in PARK. It also prevents movingthe shift lever out of PARK, unless the key fob is in theACC/ON position, and the brake pedal is pressed.

NOTE: If a malfunction occurs, the system will trap thekey fob in the ignition cylinder to warn you that thissafety feature is inoperable. The engine can be startedand stopped but the key fob cannot be removed until youobtain service.

Four-Speed or Six-Speed Automatic Transaxle

NOTE: Under extreme cold temperatures (-10°F (-23°C)and when in DRIVE, transmission operation may bebriefly limited to only second gear operation. Normaloperation will resume once the transmission temperaturehas risen to a suitable level.

5


The electronically-controlled transaxle provides a preciseshift schedule. The transaxle electronics are self-calibrating; therefore, the first few shifts on a new vehiclemay be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal condition, andprecision shifts will develop within a few hundred miles(kilometers).

The transaxle has only PRND shift positions. Downshiftsare carried out by an Electronic Range Select (ERS) bymoving the lever—/ + while in the DRIVE position, theinstrument cluster will display transaxle gear selection as6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 for six-speed, and 4, 3, 2, 1 for four-speedtransaxles.

Gear RangesDo not race the engine when moving the shift lever fromPARK or NEUTRAL positions into another gear range.

PARKThis range supplements the parking brake by locking thetransaxle. The engine can be started in this gear. Neverattempt to use PARK while the vehicle is in motion.Apply the parking brake when leaving the vehicle in thisgear.

When parking on a flat surface, place the shift lever in thePARK position first, and then apply the parking brake.

When parking on a hill, it is important to set the parkingbrake before placing the shift lever in PARK, otherwisethe load on the transaxle locking mechanism may make itdifficult to move the shift lever out of PARK. As an addedprecaution, turn the front wheels toward the curb on adownhill grade, and away from the curb on an uphillgrade.


WARNING!

• Never use the PARK position as a substitute forthe parking brake. Always apply the parkingbrake fully when parked to guard against vehiclemovement and possible injury or damage.

• Unintended movement of a vehicle could injurethose in and near the vehicle. As with all vehicles,you should never exit a vehicle while the engine isrunning. Before exiting a vehicle, you shouldalways move the shift lever into PARK, remove thekey fob from the ignition, and apply the parkingbrake. Once the key fob is removed from theignition, the shift lever is locked in the PARKposition, securing the vehicle against unwantedmovement. Furthermore, you should never leaveunattended children or pets inside a vehicle.

The following indicators should be used to ensure thatyou have placed the shift lever into the PARK position:

• When moving the shift lever into PARK, press thebutton on the shift lever and firmly move the lever allthe way forward until it stops.

• Look at the shift indicator window on the console toensure the shift lever is in the PARK position.

• When engaged in PARK, you will not be able to movethe shift lever rearward without pressing the shiftlever button.

CAUTION!

Before moving the shift lever out of PARK, you mustturn the ignition switch from OFF to ACC/ON so thesteering wheel and shift lever are released. Other-wise, damage to the steering column or shift levercould result.

5


REVERSEThis range is for moving the vehicle backward. Shift intoREVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a completestop.

NEUTRALThis range is used when vehicle is standing for pro-longed periods with engine running. Engine may bestarted in this range. Set the parking brake if you mustleave the vehicle.

WARNING!

Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off theignition to coast down a hill. These are unsafepractices that limit your response to changing trafficor road conditions. You might lose control of thevehicle and have an accident.

DRIVE — Six-Speed TransaxleThis range should be used for most city and highwaydriving. It provides the smoothest upshifts, downshifts,and best fuel economy. However, use the ElectronicRange Select (ERS) mode by moving the lever — / + andselect the “5” range when frequent transaxle shiftingoccurs while using the DRIVE range, such as whenoperating the vehicle under heavy loading conditions,(i.e., in hilly terrain, traveling into strong head winds orwhile towing heavy trailers). Under these conditions,using the “5” range will improve performance andextend transaxle life by reducing excessive shifting andheat buildup.

DRIVE — Four-Speed TransaxleThis range should be used for most city and highwaydriving. It provides the smoothest upshifts, downshifts,and best fuel economy. However, select the “3” rangewhen frequent transaxle shifting occurs while using theDRIVE range, such as when operating the vehicle under


heavy loading conditions, (i.e., in hilly terrain, travelinginto strong head winds or while towing heavy trailers).Under these conditions, using the “3” range will improveperformance and extend transaxle life by reducing exces-sive shifting and heat buildup.

CAUTION!

If the transaxle operating temperature exceeds ac-ceptable limits, the vehicle computer will overrideDRIVE and select “5” range (on six-speed transaxles)or “3” range (on four-speed transaxles) by changingshift points. This is done to prevent transaxle damagedue to overheating.

Electronic Range Select (ERS) OperationThe Electronic Range Select (ERS) shift control allowsyou to move the shift lever to the left (-) or right (+) whenthe shift lever is in the DRIVE position, this allows the

selection of the desired top gear. For example, if you shiftthe transaxle into third gear, the transaxle will never shiftabove third gear, but can shift down into second or firstgear automatically, when needed.

Switching from ERS to DRIVE can be done at any vehiclespeed. To shift from DRIVE mode to ERS mode, move theshift lever to the left (-) once. The current gear will bemaintained as the top gear. To disable ERS, simply pressand hold the shift lever to the right (+) until “D” isdisplayed in the instrument cluster odometer.

WARNING!

Do not downshift for additional engine braking on aslippery surface. The drive wheels could lose theirgrip and the vehicle could skid, causing an accidentor personal injury.

5


OdometerScreen Display

1 2 3 4 5 6 D

Actual Gear(s)Allowed(Six-SpeedTransaxle)

1 1-2 1-3 1-4 1-5 1-6 1-6

Actual Gear(s)Allowed(Four-SpeedTransaxle)

1 1-2 1-3 1-4 N/A N/A 1–4

NOTE: To select the proper gear position for maximumdeceleration (engine braking), simply press and hold theshift lever to the left (-). The transaxle will shift to therange from which the vehicle can best be slowed down.

Reset Mode - Electronic TransaxleThe transaxle is monitored electronically for abnormalconditions. If a condition is detected that could causedamage, the transaxle automatically shifts into secondgear (third gear for six-speed). The transaxle remains in

second gear (third gear for six-speed) despite the forwardgear selected. PARK, REVERSE, and NEUTRAL willcontinue to operate. This Reset feature allows the vehicleto be driven to an authorized dealer for service withoutdamaging the transaxle.

In the event of a momentary problem, the transaxle canbe reset to regain all forward gears by performing thefollowing steps:

1. Stop the vehicle.

2. Shift into PARK.

3. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position.

4. Restart the engine.

5. Shift into the desired gear range and resume driving.

NOTE: Even if the transaxle can be reset, it is recom-mended that you visit an authorized dealer at yourearliest possible convenience.


If the transaxle cannot be reset, authorized dealer serviceis required.

DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES

AccelerationRapid acceleration on snow covered, wet, or other slip-pery surfaces may cause the front wheels to pull errati-cally to the right or left. This phenomenon occurs whenthere is a difference in the surface traction under the front(driving) wheels.

WARNING!

Rapid acceleration on slippery surfaces is dangerous.Unequal traction can cause sudden pulling of thefront wheels. You could lose control of the vehicleand possibly have an accident. Accelerate slowly andcarefully whenever there is likely to be poor traction(ice, snow, wet mud, loose sand, etc.).

TractionWhen driving on wet or slushy roads, it is possible for alayer of water to build up between the tire and roadsurface. This is known as hydroplaning and may causepartial or complete loss of vehicle control and stoppingability. To reduce this possibility, the following precau-tions should be observed:

1. Slow down during rainstorms or when roads areslushy.

2. Slow down if the road has standing water or puddles.

3. Replace the tires when tread wear indicators firstbecome visible.

4. Keep the tires properly inflated.

5. Maintain sufficient distance between your vehicle andthe vehicle in front of you to avoid a collision in a suddenstop.

5


DRIVING THROUGH WATERDriving through water more than a few inches/centimeters deep will require extra caution to ensuresafety and prevent damage to your vehicle.

Flowing/Rising Water

WARNING!

Do not drive on or across a road or path where wateris flowing and/or rising (as in storm run-off). Flow-ing water can wear away the road or path’s surfaceand cause your vehicle to sink into deeper water.Furthermore, flowing and/or rising water can carryyour vehicle away swiftly. Failure to follow thiswarning may result in injuries that are serious orfatal to you, your passengers, and others around you.

Shallow Standing WaterAlthough your vehicle is capable of driving throughshallow standing water, consider the following Cautionand Warning before doing so.

CAUTION!

• Always check the depth of the standing waterbefore driving through it. Never drive throughstanding water that is deeper than the bottom ofthe tire rims mounted on the vehicle.

• Determine the condition of the road or the paththat is under water and if there are any obstacles inthe way before driving through the standing wa-ter.

• Do not exceed 5 mph (8 km/h) when drivingthrough standing water. This will minimize waveeffects.

(Continued)


CAUTION! (Continued)• Driving through standing water may cause dam-

age to your vehicle’s drivetrain components. Al-ways inspect your vehicle’s fluids (i.e., engine oil,transmission/transaxle, axle, etc.) for signs of con-tamination (i.e., fluid that is milky or foamy inappearance) after driving through standing water.Do not continue to operate the vehicle if any fluidappears contaminated, as this may result in furtherdamage. Such damage is not covered by the NewVehicle Limited Warranty.

• Getting water inside your vehicle’s engine cancause it to lock up and stall out, and cause seriousinternal damage to the engine. Such damage is notcovered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

WARNING!

• Driving through standing water limits your vehi-cle’s traction capabilities. Do not exceed 5 mph(8 km/h) when driving through standing water.

• Driving through standing water limits your vehi-cle’s braking capabilities, which increases stop-ping distances. Therefore, after driving throughstanding water, drive slowly and lightly press onthe brake pedal several times to dry the brakes.

• Getting water inside your vehicle’s engine cancause it to lock up and stall out, and leave youstranded.

• Failure to follow these warnings may result ininjuries that are serious or fatal to you, yourpassengers, and others around you.

5


POWER STEERINGThe standard power steering system will give you goodvehicle response and increased ease of maneuverabilityin tight spaces. The system will provide mechanicalsteering capability if power assist is lost.

If for some reason the power assist is interrupted, it willstill be possible to steer your vehicle. Under these condi-tions, you will observe a substantial increase in steeringeffort, especially at very low vehicle speeds and duringparking maneuvers.

NOTE:• Increased noise levels at the end of the steering wheel

travel are considered normal and do not indicate thatthere is a problem with the power steering system.

• Upon initial start-up in cold weather, the power steer-ing pump may make noise for a short amount of time.This is due to the cold, thick fluid in the steering

system. This noise should be considered normal, and itdoes not in any way damage the steering system.

WARNING!

Continued operation with reduced power steeringassist could pose a safety risk to yourself and others.Service should be obtained as soon as possible.

CAUTION!

Prolonged operation of the steering system at the endof the steering wheel travel will increase the steeringfluid temperature and it should be avoided whenpossible. Damage to the power steering pump mayoccur.


Power Steering Fluid CheckChecking the power steering fluid level at a definedservice interval is not required. The fluid should only bechecked if a leak is suspected, abnormal noises areapparent, and/or the system is not functioning as antici-pated. Coordinate inspection efforts through an autho-rized dealer.

CAUTION!

Do not use chemical flushes in your power steeringsystem as the chemicals can damage your powersteering components. Such damage is not covered bythe New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

WARNING!

Fluid level should be checked on a level surface andwith the engine off to prevent injury from movingparts and to ensure accurate fluid level reading. Donot overfill. Use only manufacturer’s recommendedpower steering fluid.

If necessary, add fluid to restore to the proper indicatedlevel. With a clean cloth, wipe any spilled fluid from allsurfaces. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and GenuineParts” in Section 7 for the correct fluid type.

PARKING BRAKEWhen the parking brake is applied with the ignitionswitch ON, the “Brake Warning Light” in the instrumentcluster will turn on.

NOTE: This light only shows that the parking brake isapplied. It does not show the degree of brake application.

5


Before leaving the vehicle, make sure that the parkingbrake is fully applied and place the shift lever in thePARK position. To release the parking brake, press theemergency brake pedal a second time and let your footup as you feel the brake disengage.

Be sure the parking brake is firmly set when parked andthe shift lever is in the PARK position. When parking ona hill, you should apply the parking brake before placingthe shift lever in PARK, otherwise the load on thetransaxle locking mechanism may make it difficult tomove the shift lever out of PARK.

WARNING!

• Always fully apply the parking brake when leav-ing your vehicle, or it may roll and cause damageor injury. Also be certain to leave the transaxle inPARK. Failure to do so may allow the vehicle toroll and cause damage or injury.

• Be sure the parking brake is fully disengagedbefore driving. Failure to do so can lead to brakeproblems due to excessive heating of the rearbrakes.

(Continued)Parking Brake


WARNING! (Continued)• Never leave children alone in a vehicle. Leaving

unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for anumber of reasons. A child or others could beseriously or fatally injured. Do not leave the keyfob in the ignition. A child could operate powerwindows, other controls, or move the vehicle

When parking on a hill, turn the front wheels toward thecurb on a downhill grade, and away from the curb on anuphill grade.

The parking brake should always be applied wheneverthe driver is not in the vehicle.

ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM (ABS)The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) provides increasedvehicle stability and brake performance under mostbraking conditions. The system operates with a separate

computer to modulate hydraulic pressure to preventwheel lock-up and help avoid skidding on slipperysurfaces.

ABS is activated during braking under certain road orstopping conditions. ABS-inducing conditions can in-clude ice, snow, gravel, bumps, railroad tracks, loosedebris, or panic stops.

You may experience the following when the brake systemgoes into anti-lock:

• The ABS motor running (it may continue to run for ashort time after the stop)

• A clicking sound of solenoid valves

• Brake pedal pulsations

• A slight drop or fall away of the brake pedal at the endof the stop

5


WARNING!

• The Anti-Lock Brake System contains sophisti-cated electronic equipment that may be susceptibleto interference caused by improperly installed, orhigh output radio transmitting equipment. Thisinterference can cause possible loss of anti-lockbraking capability. Installation of such equipmentshould be performed by qualified professionals.

• Pumping of the anti-lock brakes will diminishtheir effectiveness and may lead to an accident.Pumping makes the stopping distance longer. Justpress firmly on your brake pedal when you needto slow down or stop.

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)• The Anti-Lock Brake System cannot prevent acci-

dents, including those resulting from excessivespeed in turns, following another vehicle tooclosely, or hydroplaning. Only a safe, attentive,and skillful driver can prevent accidents.

• The capabilities of an ABS-equipped vehicle mustnever be exploited in a reckless or dangerousmanner, which could jeopardize the user’s safetyor the safety of others.

All vehicle wheels and tires must be the same size andtype, and tires must be properly inflated to produceaccurate signals for the computer.

Anti-Lock Brake Warning LightThe “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” moni-tors the anti-lock brake system. The light will


come on when the ignition switch is turned to the ONposition and may stay on for as long as four seconds.

If the “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” remains on orcomes on while driving, it indicates that the anti-lockportion of the brake system is not functioning and thatservice is required. However, the conventional brakesystem will continue to operate normally if the “BrakeWarning Light” is not on.

If the “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” is on, the brakesystem should be serviced as soon as possible to restorethe benefits of anti-lock brakes. If the “Anti-Lock BrakeWarning Light” does not come on when the ignitionswitch is turned to the ON position, have the bulbrepaired as soon as possible.

If both the “Brake Warning Light” and the “Anti-LockBrake Warning Light” remain on, the ABS and Electronic

Brake Force Distribution (EBD) systems are not function-ing. Immediate repair to the ABS system is required.Consult with your authorized dealer service center assoon as possible.

ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEMYour vehicle is equipped with an advanced electronicbrake control system that includes the Traction ControlSystem (TCS), Brake Assist System (BAS) and ElectronicStability Control (ESC). These systems complement theAnti-Lock Brake System (ABS) by optimizing the vehiclebraking capability during emergency braking maneu-vers.

Traction Control System (TCS)The Traction Control System (TCS) monitors the amountof wheel spin of each of the driven wheels. If wheel spinis detected, brake pressure is applied to the slippingwheel(s) and engine power is reduced, to provide en-hanced acceleration and stability. A feature of the TCS

5


functions similarly to a limited-slip differential, andcontrols the wheel spin across a driven axle. If one wheelon a driven axle is spinning faster than the other, thesystem will apply the brake of the spinning wheel. Thiswill allow more engine torque to be applied to the wheelthat is not spinning. This feature remains active even ifthe ESC is in the “Partial Off” mode.

The “ESC Malfunction Indicator Light” (in the instru-ment cluster) will start to flash as soon as the tires losetraction and the wheels begin to spin. This indicates thatthe TCS is active. If the indicator light flashes duringacceleration, ease up on the accelerator and apply as littlethrottle as possible. Be sure to adapt your speed anddriving to the prevailing road conditions, and do notswitch off the ESC or TCS.

WARNING!

• The TCS cannot prevent the natural laws of phys-ics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increasethe traction afforded.

• The TCS cannot prevent accidents, including thoseresulting from excessive speed in turns, or hydro-planing. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful drivercan prevent accidents.

• The capabilities of a TCS-equipped vehicle mustnever be exploited in a reckless or dangerousmanner, which could jeopardize the user’s safetyor the safety of others.

Brake Assist System (BAS)The Brake Assist System (BAS) is designed to optimizethe vehicle’s braking capability during emergency brak-ing maneuvers. The system detects an emergency brak-ing situation by sensing the rate and amount of brake


application, and then applies optimum pressure to thebrakes. This can help reduce braking distances. The BAScomplements the ABS. Applying the brakes very quicklyresults in the best BAS assistance. To receive the benefit ofthe system, you must apply continuous braking pressureduring the stopping sequence. Do not reduce brake pedalpressure unless braking is no longer desired. Once thebrake pedal is released, the BAS is deactivated.

WARNING!

• The BAS cannot prevent the natural laws of phys-ics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increasethe traction afforded by prevailing road condi-tions.

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)• The BAS cannot prevent accidents, including

those resulting from excessive speed in turns,driving on very slippery surfaces, or hydroplan-ing. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver canprevent accidents.

• The capabilities of a BAS-equipped vehicle mustnever be exploited in a reckless or dangerousmanner which could jeopardize the user’s safetyor the safety of others.

Electronic Stability Control (ESC)The Electronic Stability Control (ESC) enhances direc-tional control and stability of the vehicle under variousdriving conditions. ESC corrects for over/under steeringof the vehicle by applying the brake of the appropriatewheel to assist in counteracting the over/under steercondition. Engine power may also be reduced to help thevehicle maintain the desired path.

5


ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the vehiclepath intended by the driver and compares it to the actualpath of the vehicle. When the actual path does not matchthe intended path, ESC applies the brake of the appro-priate wheel to assist in counteracting the oversteer orundersteer condition.

• Oversteer - when the vehicle is turning more thanappropriate for the steering wheel position.

• Understeer - when the vehicle is turning less thanappropriate for the steering wheel position.

WARNING!

• The Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot pre-vent the natural laws of physics from acting on thevehicle, nor can it increase the traction afforded byprevailing road conditions.

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)• ESC cannot prevent accidents, including those

resulting from excessive speed in turns, driving onvery slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. Only asafe, attentive, and skillful driver can preventaccidents.

• The capabilities of an ESC-equipped vehicle mustnever be exploited in a reckless or dangerousmanner, which could jeopardize the user’s safetyor the safety of others.

ESC Malfunction Indicator LightThe “ESC Malfunction Indicator Light” in theinstrument cluster will come on when theignition switch is turned to the ON position. Itshould go out with the engine running. If the

“ESC Malfunction Indicator Light” comes on continu-ously with the engine running, a malfunction has beendetected in the ESC system. If this light remains on after


several ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been drivenseveral miles (kilometers) at speeds greater than 30 mph(48 km/h), see your authorized dealer as soon as possibleto have the problem diagnosed and corrected.

The “ESC Malfunction Indicator Light” (located in theinstrument cluster) starts to flash as soon as the tires losetraction and the ESC system becomes active. The “ESCMalfunction Indicator Light” also flashes when TCS isactive. If the “ESC Malfunction Indicator Light” begins toflash during acceleration, ease up on the accelerator andapply as little throttle as possible. Be sure to adapt yourspeed and driving to the prevailing road conditions.

NOTE:• The “ESC Off Indicator Light” and the “ESC Malfunc-

tion Indicator Light” come on momentarily each timethe ignition switch is turned ON.

• Each time the ignition is turned ON, the ESC systemwill be ON even if it was turned off previously.

• The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking soundswhen it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stopwhen ESC becomes inactive following the maneuverthat caused the ESC activation.

ESC Operating ModesThe “ESC Off” switch is located in the centerswitch bank, next to the hazard flasher switch.

ESC OnThis mode is the normal operating mode for ESC ontwo-wheel drive vehicles. Whenever the vehicle isstarted, the ESC system will be in this mode. This modeshould be used for most driving situations. ESC shouldonly be turned off for specific reasons as noted below.

ESC Partial OffThis mode is entered by momentarily pressing the “ESCOff” switch.

5


When in the “Partial Off” mode, the TCS portion of ESC,except for the “limited slip” feature described in the TCSsection, has been disabled and the “ESP Off IndicatorLight” will be illuminated. When in the “Partial Off”mode, ESC will operate without engine torque manage-ment. This mode is intended to be used if the vehicle is indeep snow, sand or gravel conditions and more wheelspin than ESC would normally allow is required to gaintraction. To turn ESC on again, momentarily press the“ESC Off” switch. This will restore the normal “ESC On”mode of operation.

NOTE: To improve the vehicle’s traction when drivingwith snow chains, or starting off in deep snow, sand orgravel, it may be desirable to switch to the “Partial Off”mode by pressing the “ESC Off” switch. Once the situa-tion requiring ESC to be switched to the “Partial Off”mode is overcome, turn ESC back on by momentarilypressing the “ESC Off” switch. This may be done whilethe vehicle is in motion.

TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION

Tire Markings

1 — U.S. DOT SafetyStandards Code (TIN)

4 — Maximum Load

2 — Size Designation 5 — Maximum Pressure3 — Service Description 6 — Treadwear, Traction and

Temperature Grades


NOTE:• P (Passenger) - Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.

design standards. P-Metric tires have the letter “P”molded into the sidewall preceding the size designa-tion. Example: P215/65R15 95H.

• European-Metric tire sizing is based on Europeandesign standards. Tires designed to this standard havethe tire size molded into the sidewall beginning withthe section width. The letter �P� is absent from this tiresize designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H.

• LT (Light Truck) - Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.design standards. The size designation for LT-Metrictires is the same as for P-Metric tires except for theletters “LT” that are molded into the sidewall preced-ing the size designation. Example: LT235/85R16.

• Temporary spare tires are high-pressure compactspares designed for temporary emergency use only.Tires designed to this standard have the letter “T”molded into the sidewall preceding the size designa-tion. Example: T145/80D18 103M.

• High flotation tire sizing is based on U.S. designstandards and it begins with the tire diameter moldedinto the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.

5


Tire Sizing Chart

EXAMPLE:Size Designation:

P = Passenger car tire size based on U.S. design standards�....blank....� = Passenger car tire based on European design standardsLT = Light truck tire based on U.S. design standardsT = Temporary spare tire31 = Overall diameter in inches (in)215 = Section width in millimeters (mm)65 = Aspect ratio in percent (%)

— Ratio of section height to section width of tire10.5 = Section width in inches (in)R = Construction code

— �R� means radial construction—�D� means diagonal or bias construction

15 = Rim diameter in inches (in)


EXAMPLE:Service Description:

95 = Load Index— A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry

H = Speed Symbol— A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load correspondingto its load index under certain operating conditions— The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved underspecified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions, andposted speed limits)

Load Identification:�....blank....� = Absence of any text on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) tireExtra Load (XL) = Extra load (or reinforced) tireLight Load = Light load tireC, D, E = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure

Maximum Load — Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carryMaximum Pressure — Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure forthis tire

5


Tire Identification Number (TIN)The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire,however, the date code may only be on one side. Tireswith white sidewalls will have the full TIN, including thedate code, located on the white sidewall side of the tire.

Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewalltires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found onthe outboard side, then you will find it on the inboardside of the tire.

EXAMPLE:DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301

DOT = Department of Transportation— This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tiresafety standards and is approved for highway use

MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)

—03 means the 3rd week.01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)

—01 means the year 2001— Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent theyear in which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991


Tire Loading and Tire Pressure

Tire Placard Location

NOTE: The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listedon the driver’s side B-Pillar.

Tire and Loading Information Placard

This placard tells you important information aboutthe:1) number of people that can be carried in the vehicle2) total weight your vehicle can carry3) tire size designed for your vehicle4) cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear, andspare tires.

Tire and Loading Information Placard

5


LoadingThe vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceedthe load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle. Youwill not exceed the tire’s load carrying capacity if youadhere to the loading conditions, tire size, and cold tireinflation pressures specified on the Tire and LoadingInformation placard and in the “Vehicle Loading” sectionof this manual.

NOTE: Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition,gross axle weight ratings (GAWRs) for the front and rearaxles must not be exceeded. For further information onGAWRs, vehicle loading, and trailer towing, refer to“Vehicle Loading” in this section.

To determine the maximum loading conditions of yourvehicle, locate the statement “The combined weight ofoccupants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs orXXX kg” on the Tire and Loading Information placard.The combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage andtrailer tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceedthe weight referenced here.

Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit

1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of occu-pants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or XXX kg”on your vehicle’s placard.

2. Determine the combined weight of the driver andpassengers that will be riding in your vehicle.


3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and pas-sengers from XXX lbs or XXX kg.

4. The resulting figure equals the available amount ofcargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if “XXX”amount equals 1,400 lbs (635 kg) and there will be five150 lb (68 kg) passengers in your vehicle, the amount ofavailable cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs(295 kg) (since 5 x 150 = 750, and 1400 – 750 = 650 lbs[295 kg]).

5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargobeing loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safelyexceed the available cargo and luggage load capacitycalculated in Step 4.

6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from yourtrailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult thismanual to determine how this reduces the availablecargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.

NOTE:• The following table shows examples on how to calcu-

late total load, cargo/luggage, and towing capacitiesof your vehicle with varying seating configurationsand number and size of occupants. This table is forillustration purposes only and may not be accurate forthe seating and load carry capacity of your vehicle.

• For the following example, the combined weight ofoccupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs(392 kg).

5


WARNING!

Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloadingcan cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, andincrease your stopping distance. Use tires of therecommended load capacity for your vehicle. Neveroverload them.

TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION

Tire PressureProper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe andsatisfactory operation of your vehicle. Three primaryareas are affected by improper tire pressure.

Safety

WARNING!

• Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and cancause accidents.

• Under-inflation increases tire flexing and can re-sult in over-heating and tire failure.

• Over-inflation reduces a tire’s ability to cushionshock. Objects on the road and chuckholes cancause damage that result in tire failure.

• Unequal tire pressures can cause steering prob-lems. You could lose control of your vehicle.

• Over-inflated or under-inflated tires can affectvehicle handling and can fail suddenly, resultingin loss of vehicle control.

(Continued)

5


WARNING! (Continued)• Unequal tire pressures from one side of the ve-

hicle to the other can cause the vehicle to drift tothe right or left.

• Always drive with each tire inflated to the recom-mended cold tire inflation pressure.

EconomyImproper inflation pressures can cause uneven wear pat-terns to develop across the tire tread. These abnormal wearpatterns will reduce tread life resulting in a need for earliertire replacement. Under-inflation, also increases tire rollingresistance and results in higher fuel consumption.

Ride Comfort and Vehicle Stability

Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride.Over-inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortableride.

Tire Inflation PressuresThe proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on thedriver’s side “B” Pillar.

The tire pressure should be checked and adjusted, andthe tires inspected for signs of wear or visible damage, atleast once a month. Use a good quality pocket-type gaugeto check tire pressure. Do not make a visual judgementwhen determining proper inflation. Radial tires may lookproperly inflated, even when they are under-inflated.

CAUTION!

After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, al-ways reinstall the valve stem cap. This will preventmoisture and dirt from entering the valve stem,which could damage the valve stem.


Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always“cold tire inflation pressure.” Cold tire inflation pressureis defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has notbeen driven for at least three hours, or driven less than1 mile (1.6 km) after a three-hour period. The cold tireinflation pressure must not exceed the maximum infla-tion pressure molded into the tire sidewall.

Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide rangeof outdoor temperatures, as tire pressures vary withtemperature changes.

Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) per12° F (7° C) of air temperature change. Keep this in mindwhen checking tire pressure inside a garage, especially inthe Winter.

Example: If garage temperature is 68°F (20°C) and theoutside temperature is 32°F (0°C), then the cold tireinflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa),which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (7°C) for thisoutside temperature condition.

Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to 40 kPa)during operation. Do not reduce this normal pressurebuildup or your tire pressure will be too low.

Tire Pressures for High-Speed OperationThe manufacturer advocates driving at safe speedswithin posted speed limits. Where speed limits or condi-tions are such that the vehicle can be driven at highspeeds, maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is veryimportant. Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicleloading may be required for high-speed vehicle opera-tion. Refer to original-equipment information, or anauthorized tire dealer, for recommended safe operatingspeeds, loading and cold tire inflation pressures.

5


WARNING!

High-speed driving, with your vehicle at or abovemaximum load, is dangerous. The added strain onyour tires could cause them to fail. You could have aserious accident. Do not drive a vehicle loaded to themaximum capacity at continuous speeds above75 mph (120 km/h).

Radial-Ply Tires

WARNING!

Combining radial ply tires with other types of tireson your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handlepoorly. The instability could cause an accident. Al-ways use radial ply tires in sets of four. Nevercombine them with other types of tires.

Cuts and punctures in radial tires are repairable only inthe tread area because of sidewall flexing. Consult yourauthorized tire dealer for radial tire repairs.

Compact Spare TireThe compact spare is for temporary emergency use withradial tires. It is engineered to be used on your stylevehicle only. Since this tire has limited tread life, theoriginal tire should be repaired (or replaced) and rein-stalled at the first opportunity.

WARNING!

• Temporary-use spare tires are for emergency useonly. With these tires, do not drive faster than50 mph (80 km/h).

• Temporary-use spare tires have limited tread life.When the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators,the temporary use spare tire needs to be replaced.

(Continued)


WARNING! (Continued)• Be sure to follow the warnings that apply to your

spare. Failure to do so could result in spare tirefailure and loss of vehicle control.

Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount aconventional tire on the compact spare wheel, since thewheel is designed specifically for the compact spare.

Do not install more than one compact spare tire/wheelon the vehicle at any given time.

CAUTION!

Because of the reduced ground clearance, do not takeyour vehicle through an automatic car wash with thecompact spare installed. Damage to the vehicle mayresult.

Tire SpinningWhen stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, do notspin your vehicle’s wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h),or for more than 30 seconds continuously, without stop-ping.

Refer to “Freeing A Stuck Vehicle” in Section 6 of thismanual for additional information.

WARNING!

• Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces gen-erated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tiredamage or failure. A tire could explode and injuresomeone.

• Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than30 mph (48 km/h), or for more than 30 secondscontinuously, when you are stuck; and do not letanyone near a spinning wheel, no matter what thespeed.

5


Tread Wear IndicatorsTread wear indicators are in the original-equipment tiresto help you in determining when your tires should bereplaced.

These indicators are molded into the bottom of the treadgrooves. They will appear as bands when the tread depthbecomes 1/16 in (2 mm). When the tread is worn to thetread wear indicators, the tire should be replaced.

Tire LifeThe service life of a tire is dependent upon varyingfactors, including, but not limited to:

• Driving style

• Tire pressure

• Distance driven

WARNING!

The tires and the spare tire should be replaced aftersix years, regardless of the remaining tread. Failure tofollow this warning can result in sudden tire failure.You could lose control and have an accident resultingin serious injury or death.

1 — Worn Tire2 — New Tire


Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as littleexposure to light as possible. Protect tires from contactwith oil, grease and gasoline.

Replacement TiresThe tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of manycharacteristics. They should be inspected regularly forwear and correct cold tire inflation pressure. The manu-facturer strongly recommends that you use tires equiva-lent to the originals in size, quality and performancewhen replacement is needed. Please see “Tread WearIndicators” and “Tire and Loading Information” placardfor the size designation of your tire. The service descrip-tion and load identification will be found on the original-equipment tire. Failure to use equivalent replacementtires may adversely affect the safety, handling, and ride ofyour vehicle. We recommend that you contact youroriginal-equipment manufacturer, or an authorized tiredealer, with any questions you may have on tire specifi-cations or capability.

WARNING!

• Do not use a tire, wheel size or rating other thanthat specified for your vehicle. Some combinationsof unapproved tires and wheels may change sus-pension dimensions and performance characteris-tics, resulting in changes to steering, handling, andbraking of your vehicle. This can cause unpredict-able handling and stress to steering and suspen-sion components. You could lose control and havean accident resulting in serious injury or death.Use only the tire and wheel sizes with load ratingsapproved for your vehicle.

• Never use a tire with a smaller load index orcapacity, than what was originally equipped onyour vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller load indexcould result in tire overloading and failure. Youcould lose control and have an accident.

(Continued)

5


WARNING! (Continued)• Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having

adequate speed capability can result in sudden tirefailure and loss of vehicle control.

CAUTION!

Replacing original tires with tires of a different sizemay result in false speedometer and odometer read-ings.

TIRE CHAINSUse only compact chains, or other traction aids that meetSAE type “Class S” specifications. Chains must be theproper size for the vehicle, as recommended by the chainmanufacturer.

NOTE: Do not use tire chains on a compact spare tire.

CAUTION!

To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires, observe thefollowing precautions:• Use chains on P225/65R16 tires only. P225/65R17

tires do not provide adequate clearance.• Because of restricted chain clearance between tires

and other suspension components, it is importantthat only chains in good condition are used. Bro-ken chains can cause serious damage. Stop thevehicle immediately if noise occurs that couldindicate chain breakage. Remove the damagedparts of the chain before further use.

• Do not exceed 45 mph (70 km/h).• Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and large

bumps, especially with a loaded vehicle.

(Continued)


CAUTION! (Continued)• Install chains on the front wheels as tightly as

possible and then retighten after driving about0.5 mile (0.8 km).

• Do not drive for prolonged periods of time on drypavement.

• Observe the tire chain manufacturer’s instructionson the method of installation, operating speed,and conditions for use. Always use the lowersuggested operating speed of the chain manufac-turer, if different from the speed recommended bythe vehicle manufacturer.

Always use the lower suggested operating speed if thechain manufacturer and vehicle manufacturer suggestdifferent maximum speeds. This notice applies to allchain traction devices, including link and cable (radial)chains.

SNOW TIRESSome areas of the country require the use of snow tiresduring Winter. Standard tires are of the all-season typeand satisfy this requirement as indicated by the M+Sdesignation on the tire sidewall.

If you need snow tires, select tires equivalent in size andtype to the original equipment tires. Use snow tires onlyin sets of four; failure to do so may adversely affect thesafety and handling of your vehicle.

Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than whatwas originally equipped with your vehicle and shouldnot be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph(120 km/h).

TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONSTires on the front and rear axles of vehicles operate atdifferent loads and perform different steering, driving,and braking functions. For these reasons, they wear at

5


unequal rates, and tend to develop irregular wear pat-terns.

These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires.The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile withaggressive tread designs such as those on All-Season typetires. Rotation will increase tread life, help to maintainmud, snow, and wet traction levels, and contribute to asmooth, quiet ride.

Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” in Section 8 for theproper maintenance intervals. More frequent rotation ispermissible if desired. The reasons for any rapid orunusual wear should be corrected prior to rotation beingperformed.

The suggested rotation method is shown in the followingdiagram.

TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM (TPMS)The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressurebased on the cold inflation tire pressure requirementsfound on the tire placard located on the driver’s-sideB-pillar.

Tire Rotation


The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about1 psi (6.9 kPa) for every 12°F (6.5°C). This means thatwhen the outside temperature decreases, the tire pressurewill decrease. Tire pressure should always be set basedon cold inflation tire pressure. This is defined as the tirepressure after a vehicle has not been driven for more thanthree hours - and in outside ambient temperature. Referto the “Tires – General Information” in this section forinformation on how to properly inflate the vehicle’stires. The tire pressure will also increase as the vehicle isdriven - this is normal and there should be no adjustmentfor this increased pressure.

The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure ifthe tire pressure falls below the low pressure warningthreshold for any reason, including low temperatureeffects, or natural air pressure loss through the tire.

The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tirepressure as long as the condition exists, and will not turn

off until the tire pressure is at or above recommendedcold tire placard pressure. Once the low tire pressurewarning has been illuminated, the tire pressure must beincreased to the recommended cold tire placard pressurein order for the “TPMS Warning Lamp” to be turned off.The system will automatically update and the “TPMSWarning Lamp” will extinguish once the updated tirepressures have been received. The vehicle may need to bedriven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (25 km/h) toreceive this information.

For example, your vehicle may have a recommendedcold (parked for more than three hours) tire pressure of35 psi (241 kPa). If the ambient temperature is 68°F (20°C)and the measured tire pressure is 30 psi (207 kPa), atemperature drop to 20°F (-7°C) will decrease the tirepressure to approximately 26 psi (179 kPa). This tirepressure is sufficiently low enough to turn on the “TPMSWarning Light.” Driving the vehicle may cause the tirepressure to rise to approximately 30 psi (207 kPa), but the

5


“TPMS Warning Light” will still be on. In this situation,the “TPMS Warning Light” will turn off only after thetires have been inflated to the vehicle’s recommendedcold tire pressure value.

CAUTION!

• The TPMS has been optimized for the originalequipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures havebeen established for the tire size equipped on yourvehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensordamage may result when using replacementequipment that is not of the same size, type, and/orstyle. Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor dam-age. Do not use aftermarket sealants or balancebeads if your vehicle is equipped with a TPMS, asdamage to the sensors may result.

(Continued)

CAUTION! (Continued)• After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure

always reinstall the valve stem cap. This willprevent moisture and dirt from entering the valvestem, which could damage the TPMS sensor.

NOTE:• The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care

and maintenance, or to provide warning of a tirefailure or condition.

• The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gaugewhile adjusting your tire pressure.

• Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causesthe tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tiretread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling andstopping ability.


• The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire mainte-nance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintaincorrect tire pressure, using an accurate tire pressuregage, even if under-inflation has not reached the levelto trigger illumination of the “TPMS Warning Lamp.”

• Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure,and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure inthe tire.

Base SystemThe TPMS uses wireless technology with wheel rimmounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure lev-els. Sensors, mounted to each wheel as part of the valvestem, transmit tire pressure readings to the ReceiverModule.

NOTE: It is particularly important for you to check thetire pressure in all of your tires regularly and to maintainthe proper pressure.

The Basic TPMS consists of the following components:

• Receiver Module

• Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors

• TPMS Telltale Warning Light

Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Tire PressureWarnings

The “TPMS Telltale Warning Light” will illu-minate in the instrument cluster, and an au-dible chime will be activated when one or moreof the four active road tire pressures are low.

Should this occur, you should stop as soon as possible,check the inflation pressure of each tire on your vehicle,and inflate each tire to the vehicle’s recommended coldtire pressure value (located on the placard on thedriver’s-side B-Pillar). The system will automaticallyupdate and the “TPMS Warning Lamp” will extinguishonce the updated tire pressures have been received.

5


NOTE: The vehicle may need to be driven for up to20 minutes above 15 mph (25 km/h) to receive thisinformation.

The “TPMS Warning Lamp” will flash on and off for75 seconds, and remain on solid when a system fault isdetected. The system fault will also sound a chime. If theignition switch is cycled, this sequence will repeat, pro-viding the system fault still exists. The “TPMS WarningLamp” will turn off when the fault condition no longerexists. A system fault can occur with any of the followingscenarios:

1. Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next tofacilities emitting the same radio frequencies as the TPMSsensors.

2. Installing some form of aftermarket window tintingthat affects radio wave signals.

3. Accumulation of excessive snow and/or ice aroundthe wheels or wheel housings.

4. Using tire chains on the vehicle.

5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPMS sensors.

Vehicles with Compact Spare

1. The compact spare tire (if equipped) does not have aTPMS sensor. Therefore the TPMS will not monitor thepressure in the compact spare tire.

2. If you install the compact spare tire in place of a roadtire that has a pressure below the low-pressure warninglimit, upon the next ignition switch cycle, a chime willsound and the “TPMS Telltale Warning Light” will turnon.

3. After driving for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph(25 km/h), the “TPMS Telltale Warning Light” will flashon and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid.


4. For each subsequent ignition switch cycle, a chime willsound and the “TPMS Telltale Warning Light” will re-main on solid.

5. Once you repair or replace the original road tire andreinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact sparetire, the TPMS will automatically update, and the “TPMSTelltale Warning Light” will turn off as long as no tirepressure is below the low-pressure warning limit in anyof the four active road tires. The vehicle may need to bedriven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (25 km/h) forthe TPMS to receive this information.

Premium System — If EquippedThe TPMS uses wireless technology with wheel rim-mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure lev-els. Sensors mounted to each wheel as part of the valvestem transmit tire pressure readings to the ReceiverModule.

NOTE: It is particularly important to regularly checkand maintain proper tire pressure in all the tires.

The Premium TPMS consists of the following compo-nents:

• Receiver Module

• Four TPMS Sensors

• Three Trigger Modules (mounted in three of the fourwheel wells)

• Various TPMS messages, which display in the Elec-tronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC), and graph-ics displaying tire pressures

• Yellow TPMS Telltale Warning Light

TPMS Low Pressure WarningsThe “TPMS Telltale Warning Light” will illuminate in theinstrument cluster, and an audible chime will be acti-vated when one or more of the four active road tire

5


pressures are low. In addition, the EVIC will display aLow Pressure message for three seconds and a graphicdisplay of the pressure value(s) with the low tire(s)flashing.

Should a low tire condition occur on any of the fouractive road tire(s), you should stop as soon as possible,and inflate the low tire(s) that is flashing on the graphicdisplay to the vehicle’s recommended cold tire pressurevalue. The system will automatically update, the graphicdisplay of the pressure value(s) will stop flashing, andthe “TPMS Telltale Warning Light” will extinguish oncethe updated tire pressure(s) have been received. Thevehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above15 mph (25 km/h) to receive this information.

Check TPMS MessageThe “TPMS Telltale Warning Light” will flash on and offfor 75 seconds, and remain on solid when a system faultis detected. The system fault will also sound a chime. TheEVIC will display a CHECK TPM SYSTEM message forthree seconds. This text message is then followed by agraphic display, with - - in place of the pressure value(s)indicating which TPMS Sensor(s) is not being received.

Low Tire Pressure Display


If the ignition switch is cycled, this sequence will repeat,providing the system fault still exists. If the system faultno longer exists, the “TPMS Telltale Warning Light” willno longer flash, the CHECK TPM SYSTEM text message

will not be present, and a pressure value will be dis-played instead of dashes. A system fault can occur by anyof the following scenarios:

1. Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next tofacilities emitting the same radio frequencies as the TPMSsensors.

2. Installing some form of aftermarket window tintingthat affects radio wave signals.

3. Accumulation of excessive snow and/or ice aroundthe wheels or wheel housings.

4. Using tire chains on the vehicle.

5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPMS sensors.

Vehicles with Compact Spare

1. The compact spare tire (if equipped) does not have aTPMS. Therefore, the TPMS will not monitor the pressurein the compact spare tire.

Check TPM System Display

5


2. If you install the compact spare tire in place of a roadtire that has a pressure below the low-pressure warninglimit, upon the next ignition switch cycle, the “TPMSTelltale Warning Light” will remain on, a chime willsound, and the EVIC will still display a flashing pressurevalue in the graphic display.

3. After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above15 mph (25 km/h), the “TPMS Telltale Warning Light”will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain onsolid. In addition, the EVIC will display a CHECK TPMSYSTEM message for three seconds and then displaydashes (- -) in place of the pressure value.

4. For each subsequent ignition switch cycle, a chime willsound, the “TPMS Telltale Warning Light” will flash onand off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid, and theEVIC will display a CHECK TPM SYSTEM message forthree seconds and then display dashes (- -) in place of thepressure value.

5. Once you repair or replace the original road tire, andreinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare,the TPMS will update automatically. In addition, the“TPMS Telltale Warning Light” will turn off and thegraphic in the EVIC will display a new pressure valueinstead of dashes (- -), as long no tire pressure is belowthe low pressure warning limit in any of the four activeroad tires.

NOTE: The vehicle may need to be driven for up to20 minutes above 15 mph (25 km/h) in order for theTPMS to receive this information.

General InformationThis device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules andRSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to thefollowing conditions:



• This device must accept any interference received,including interference that may cause undesiredoperation.

The tire pressure sensors are regulated under one of thefollowing licenses:

United States . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . KR5S120123Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2671-S120123

FUEL REQUIREMENTS

3.3L and 3.8L EngineAll engines are designed to meet all emis-sions regulations and provide excellentfuel economy and performance when us-ing high-quality unleaded “regular” gaso-line having an octane rating of 87. The useof premium gasoline is not recommended,

as it will not provide any benefit over regular gasoline inthese engines.

4.0L EngineThe 4.0L engine is designed to meet allemissions regulations and provide satisfac-tory fuel economy and performance whenusing high-quality unleaded gasoline hav-ing an octane range of 87 to 89. The manu-facturer recommends the use of 89 octane

for optimum performance. The use of premium gasolineis not recommended, as it will not provide any benefitover regular gasoline in these engines.

Light spark knock at low engine speeds is not harmful toyour engine. However, continued heavy spark knock athigh speeds can cause damage and immediate service isrequired.

Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hardstarting, stalling and hesitations. If you experience thesesymptoms, try another brand of “regular” gasoline be-fore considering service for the vehicle.

5


Over 40 automobile manufacturers around the worldhave issued and endorsed consistent gasoline specifica-tions (the World Wide Fuel Charter, WWFC) to definefuel properties necessary to deliver enhanced emissions,engine performance, and durability for your vehicle. Themanufacturer recommends the use of gasolines that meetthe WWFC specifications if they are available.

Reformulated GasolineMany areas of the country require the use of cleanerburning gasoline referred to as “Reformulated Gasoline”.

Reformulated gasolines contain oxygenates, and are spe-cifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and im-prove air quality.

The manufacturer supports the use of reformulated gaso-lines. Properly blended reformulated gasolines will pro-vide excellent performance and durability of engine andfuel system components.

Gasoline/Oxygenate BlendsSome fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxy-genates such as 10% ethanol, MTBE, and ETBE. Oxygen-ates are required in some areas of the country during thewinter months to reduce carbon monoxide emissions.Fuels blended with these oxygenates may be used inyour vehicle.

CAUTION!

DO NOT use gasolines containing Methanol or E85Ethanol. Use of these blends may result in startingand driveability problems and may damage criticalfuel system components.

Problems that result from using methanol/gasoline orE85 Ethanol blends are not the responsibility of themanufacturer. While MTBE is an oxygenate made fromMethanol, it does not have the negative effects ofMethanol.


E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel VehiclesNon-FFV vehicles are compatible with gasoline contain-ing 10% ethanol (E10). Gasoline with higher ethanolcontent may void the vehicle’s warranty.

If a Non-FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with E-85fuel, the engine will have some or all of these symptoms:

• operate in a lean mode

• OBD II “Malfunction Indicator Light” on

• poor engine performance

• poor cold start and cold drivability

• increased risk for fuel system component corrosion

To fix a Non-FFV vehicle inadvertently fueled once withE-85 perform the following:

• drain the fuel tank (see your authorized dealer)

• change the engine oil and oil filter

• disconnect and reconnect the battery to reset theengine controller memory

More extensive repairs will be required for prolongedexposure to E-85 fuel.

MMT In GasolineMMT is a manganese containing metallic additive that isblended into some gasoline to increase octane. Gasolineblended with MMT provides no performance advantagebeyond gasoline of the same octane number withoutMMT. Gasoline blended with MMT reduces spark pluglife and reduces emission system performance in somevehicles. The manufacturer recommends that gasolinewithout MMT be used in your vehicle. The MMT contentof gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump,therefore, you should ask your gasoline retailer whetherthe gasoline contains MMT.

5


It is even more important to look for gasolines withoutMMT in Canada, because MMT can be used at levelshigher than those allowed in the United States.

MMT is prohibited in Federal and California reformu-lated gasolines.

Materials Added to FuelAll gasoline sold in the United States is required tocontain effective detergent additives. Use of additionaldetergents or other additives are not needed undernormal conditions and would result in additional cost.Therefore you should not have to add anything to thefuel.

Fuel System Cautions

CAUTION!

Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle’sperformance:• The use of leaded gas is prohibited by Federal law.

Using leaded gasoline can impair engine perfor-mance and damage the emission control system.

• An out-of-tune engine, or certain fuel or ignitionmalfunctions, can cause the catalytic converter tooverheat. If you notice a pungent burning odor orsome light smoke, your engine may be out of tuneor malfunctioning and may require immediateservice. Contact your authorized dealer for serviceassistance.

(Continued)


CAUTION! (Continued)• The use of fuel additives which are now being

sold as octane enhancers is not recommended.Most of these products contain high concentra-tions of methanol. Fuel system damage or vehicleperformance problems resulting from the use ofsuch fuels or additives is not the responsibility ofthe manufacturer.

NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions controlsystems can result in civil penalties being assessedagainst you.

Carbon Monoxide Warnings

WARNING!

Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is deadly.

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)• To prevent carbon monoxide poisoning DO NOT

inhale exhaust gases. They contain carbon monox-ide, a colorless and odorless gas which can kill.

• NEVER run the engine in a closed area, such as agarage, and NEVER sit in a parked vehicle withthe engine running for an extended period. If thevehicle is stopped in an open area with the enginerunning for more than a short period, adjust theventilation system to force fresh, outside air intothe vehicle.

• Guard against carbon monoxide with propermaintenance. Have the exhaust system inspectedevery time the vehicle is raised. Have any abnor-mal conditions repaired promptly. Until repaired,drive with all side windows fully open.

(Continued)

5


WARNING! (Continued)• Keep the liftgate closed when driving your vehicle

to prevent carbon monoxide and other poisonousexhaust gases from entering the vehicle.

FLEXIBLE FUEL (3.3L ENGINES ONLY) — IFEQUIPPED

E-85 General InformationThe information in this section is for Flexible Fuel Ve-hicles (FFV) only. These vehicles can be identified by theunique fuel filler door label that states Ethanol (E-85) orUnleaded Gasoline Only. This section only covers thosesubjects that are unique to these vehicles. Please refer tothe other sections of this manual for information onfeatures that are common between Flexible Fuel andgasoline only powered vehicles.

CAUTION!

Only vehicles with the E-85 fuel filler door label canoperate on E-85.

E-85 Fuel Cap


Ethanol Fuel (E-85)E-85 is a mixture of approximately 85% fuel ethanol and15% unleaded gasoline.

WARNING!

Ethanol vapors are extremely flammable and couldcause serious personal injury. Never have any smok-ing materials lit in or near the vehicle when remov-ing the fuel filler tube cap (gas cap) or filling thetank. Do not use E-85 as a cleaning agent and neveruse it near an open flame.

Fuel RequirementsIf your vehicle is E-85 compatible, it will operate onunleaded gasoline with an octane rating of 87, or E-85fuel, or any mixture of these two fuels.

For best results, a refueling pattern that avoids alternat-ing between E-85 and unleaded gasoline is recom-mended.

When you do switch fuel types, it is recommended that:

• you do not add less than 5 gal (19 L) when refueling

E-85 Badge

5


• you drive the vehicle immediately after refueling for atleast 5 miles (8 km)

Observing these precautions will avoid possible hardstarting and/or significant deterioration in driveabilityduring warm up.

NOTE:• Use seasonally adjusted E-85 fuel (ASTM D5798). With

non-seasonally adjusted E-85 fuel, you may experiencehard starting and rough idle following start-up, even ifthe above recommendations are followed, especiallywhen the ambient temperature is below 32°F (0°C).

• Some additives used in regular gasoline are not fullycompatible with E–85 and may form deposits in yourengine. To eliminate driveability issues that may becaused by these deposits, a supplemental gasolineadditive, such as MOPAR� Injector Cleanup or Techronmay be used.

Selection Of Engine Oil For Flexible Fuel VehiclesE-85 and Gasoline VehiclesFFV vehicles operated on E–85 require specially formu-lated engine oils. These special requirements are includedin MOPAR� engine oils, and in equivalent oils meetingChrysler Specification MS-6395. The manufacturer onlyrecommends engine oils that are API Certified and meetthe requirements of Material Standard MS-6395. MS-6395contains additional requirements, developed during ex-tensive fleet testing, to provide additional protection toChrysler Group LLC engines. Use MOPAR� or anequivalent oil meeting the specification MS-6395.

StartingThe characteristics of E-85 fuel make it unsuitable for usewhen ambient temperatures fall below 0°F (-18°C). In therange of 0°F (-18°C) to 32°F (0°C), you may experience anincrease in the time it takes for your engine to start, anda deterioration in driveability (sags and/or hesitations)until the engine is fully warmed up.


NOTE: Use of the engine block heater (if equipped) isbeneficial for E-85 startability when the ambient tempera-ture is less than 32°F (0°C).Cruising RangeBecause E-85 fuel contains less energy per gallon/literthan gasoline, you will experience an increase in fuelconsumption. You can expect your miles per gallon(mpg)/miles per liter and your driving range to decreaseby about 30% compared to gasoline operation.

Replacement PartsMany components in your Flexible Fuel Vehicle (FFV) aredesigned to be compatible with ethanol. Always be surethat your vehicle is serviced with correct ethanol com-patible parts.

CAUTION!

Replacing fuel system components with non-ethanolcompatible components can damage your vehicle.

MaintenanceIf you operate the vehicle using E-85 fuel, follow themaintenance schedule section of this manual.

CAUTION!

Do not use ethanol mixture greater than 85% in yourvehicle. It will cause difficulty in cold starting andmay affect driveability.

ADDING FUEL

Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap)The gas cap is located behind the fuel filler door on theleft side of the vehicle. If the gas cap is lost or damaged,be sure the replacement cap is for use with this vehicle.

NOTE: The driver’s side sliding door cannot be openedwhile the fuel door is open. This feature operates onlywhen the sliding door is fully closed prior to opening thefuel door.

5


CAUTION!

• Damage to the fuel system or emissions controlsystem could result from using an improper fueltank filler tube cap (gas cap). A poorly fitting capcould let impurities into the fuel system and maycause the “Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)” toturn on, due to fuel vapors escaping from thesystem.

• To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “topoff” the fuel tank after filling.

WARNING!

• Never have any smoking materials lit in or nearthe vehicle when the gas cap is removed or thetank filled.

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)• Never add fuel when the engine is running. This is

in violation of most state and federal fire regula-tions and will cause the MIL to turn on.

• A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into aportable container that is inside of a vehicle. Youcould be burned. Always place gas containers onthe ground while filling.

NOTE:• When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the fuel

tank is full.

• Tighten the fuel filler cap until you hear a “clicking”sound. This is an indication that the fuel filler cap isproperly tightened.

• If the gas cap is not tightened properly, the MIL maycome on. Be sure the gas cap is tightened every timethe vehicle is refueled.


Loose Fuel Filler Cap MessageIf the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuelfiller cap is loose, improperly installed, or damaged, a“gASCAP” message will display in the odometer or a“CHECK GASCAP” message will be displayed in theElectronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). Refer to“Electronic Vehicle Information Center” in Section 4 ofthis manual. Tighten the fuel filler cap until a “clicking”sound is heard. This is an indication that the fuel fillercap is properly tightened. Refer to “Onboard DiagnosticSystem — OBD II” in Section 7.

If the problem continues, the message will appear thenext time the vehicle is started. See your authorizeddealer as soon as possible.

VEHICLE LOADINGAs required by National Highway Traffic Safety Admin-istration regulations, your vehicle has a certification labelaffixed to the driver’s side door or B-Pillar.

If seats are removed for carrying cargo, do not exceed thespecified GVWR and GAWR.

Vehicle Certification LabelYour vehicle has a Vehicle Certification Label attached tothe driver’s door B-Pillar.

The label contains the following information:

• Name of manufacturer

• Month and year of manufacture

• Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)

• Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) — Front

• Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) — Rear

• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)

• Type of Vehicle

• Month, Day and Hour of Manufacture (MDH)

The bar code allows a computer scanner to read theVehicle Identification Number (VIN).

5


Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle.This includes driver, passengers, and cargo. The totalload must be limited so that you do not exceed theGVWR.

Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rearaxles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axlesevenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front orrear GAWR.

WARNING!

Because the front wheels drive and steer the vehicle,it is important that you do not exceed the maximumfront or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving conditioncan result if either rating is exceeded. You could losecontrol of the vehicle and have an accident.

Tire SizeThe tire size on the Vehicle Certification Label representsthe actual tire size on your vehicle. Replacement tiresmust be equal to the load capacity of this tire size.

Rim SizeThis is the rim size that is appropriate for the tire sizelisted.

Inflation PressureThis is the cold tire inflation pressure for your vehicle, forall loading conditions up to full GAWR.

Curb WeightThe curb weight of a vehicle is defined as the total weightof the vehicle with all fluids, including vehicle fuel, at fullcapacity conditions, and with no occupants or cargoloaded into the vehicle. The front and rear curb weightvalues are determined by weighing your vehicle on acommercial scale before any occupants or cargo areadded.


OverloadingThe load carrying components (axle, springs, tires,wheels, etc.) of your vehicle will provide satisfactoryservice as long as you do not exceed the GVWR and frontand rear GAWR.

The best way to figure out the total weight of yourvehicle is to weigh it when it is fully loaded and ready foroperation. Weigh it on a commercial scale to ensure thatit is not over the GVWR.

Figure out the weight on the front and rear of the vehicleseparately. It is important that you distribute the loadevenly over the front and rear axles.

Overloading can cause potential safety hazards andshorten useful service life. Heavier axles or suspensioncomponents do not necessarily increase the vehicle’sGVWR.

LoadingTo load your vehicle properly, first figure out its emptyweight, axle-by-axle and side-by-side. Store heavier itemsdown low and be sure you distribute their weight asevenly as possible. Stow all loose items securely beforedriving. If weighing the loaded vehicle shows that youhave exceeded either GAWR, but the total load is withinthe specified GVWR, you must redistribute the weight.Improper weight distribution can have an adverse effecton the way your vehicle steers and handles, and the waythe brakes operate.

CAUTION!

Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the GVWRor the maximum front and rear GAWR. If you do,parts on your vehicle can break, or it can change theway your vehicle handles. This could cause you tolose control. Also, overloading can shorten the life ofyour vehicle.

5


A loaded vehicle is shown in the illustration. Note thatneither the GVWR or the GAWR capacities have beenexceeded.

LOADING TABLE — EXAMPLE ONLYFront Axle Rear Axle

Empty Weight 2,140 lbs(971 kg)

1,470 lbs(667 kg)

Load (Driver,passengers, andcargo/luggage)

360 lbs (163 kg) 980 lbs (445 kg)

TOTAL 2,500 lbs(1 134 kg)

2,450 lbs(1 111 kg)

GAWR 2,544 lbs(1 154 kg)

2,544 lbs(1 154 kg)

A loaded vehicle is shown in the above table. Note thatneither the GVWR nor the GAWR capacities have beenexceeded.

NOTE: Refer to the “Vehicle Certification Label” at-tached to the rear of the driver’s door for your vehicle’sGVWR and GAWR’s. This table is only an example.


TRAILER TOWINGIn this section you will find safety tips and informationon limits to the type of towing you can reasonably dowith your vehicle. Before towing a trailer, carefullyreview this information to tow your load as efficientlyand safely as possible.

To maintain warranty coverage, follow the requirementsand recommendations in this manual concerning ve-hicles used for trailer towing.

Common Towing DefinitionsThe following trailer towing-related definitions will as-sist you in understanding the following information:

Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle.This includes driver, passengers, cargo/luggage andtrailer tongue weight. The total load must be limited sothat you do not exceed the GVWR.

Gross Trailer Weight (GTW)The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of allcargo, consumables and equipment (permanent or tem-porary) loaded in or on the trailer in its �loaded andready for operation� condition. The recommended way tomeasure GTW is to put your fully loaded trailer on avehicle scale. The entire weight of the trailer must besupported by the scale.

Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR)The GCWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicleand trailer when weighed in combination.

NOTE: The GCWR rating includes a 150 lbs (68 kg)allowance for the presence of a driver.

Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rearaxles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axlesevenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front orrear GAWR.

5


WARNING!

It is important that you do not exceed the maximumfront or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving conditioncan result if either rating is exceeded. You could losecontrol of the vehicle and have an accident.

Trailer Tongue Weight (TW)The TW is the downward force exerted on the hitch ballby the trailer. In most cases it should not be less than 10%or more than 15% of the trailer load. You must considerthis as part of the load on your vehicle.

Frontal AreaThe frontal area is the maximum height and maximumwidth of the front of a trailer.

Trailer Sway ControlThe trailer sway control is a telescoping link that can beinstalled between the hitch receiver and the trailer tongue

that typically provides adjustable friction associated withthe telescoping motion to dampen any unwanted trailerswaying motions while traveling.

Weight-Carrying HitchA weight-carrying hitch supports the trailer tongueweight, just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball orsome other connecting point of the vehicle. This type ofhitch is the most popular on the market today and iscommonly used to tow small- and medium-sized trailers.

Weight-Distributing HitchA weight-distributing system works by applying lever-age through spring (load) bars. They are typically usedfor heavier loads to distribute trailer tongue weight to thetow vehicle’s front axle and the trailer’s axle(s). Whenused in accordance with the manufacturer’s directions, itprovides for a more level ride, offering more consistentsteering and brake control thereby enhancing towingsafety. The addition of a friction/hydraulic sway control


also dampens sway caused by traffic and crosswinds andcontributes positively to tow vehicle and trailer stability.Trailer sway control and a weight distributing (loadequalizing) hitch are recommended for heavier tongueweights (TW), and may be required depending on vehicleand trailer configuration/loading to comply with grossaxle weight rating (GAWR) requirements.

WARNING!

• An improperly adjusted weight-distributing hitchsystem may reduce handling, stability, brakingperformance, and could result in an accident.

• Weight-distributing hitch systems may not becompatible with surge brake couplers. Consultwith an authorized hitch and trailer manufactureror a reputable authorized Recreational Vehicledealer for additional information.

Without Weight-Distributing Hitch (Incorrect)

5


With Weight-Distributing Hitch (Correct) Improper Adjustment ofWeight-Distributing Hitch (Incorrect)


Trailer Hitch ClassificationYour vehicle may be factory-equipped for safe towing oftrailers weighing over 2,000 lbs (907 kg) with the optionalTrailer Tow Prep Package. See an authorized dealer forpackage content.

The following chart provides the industry standard forthe maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class cantow, and should be used to assist you in selecting thecorrect trailer hitch for your intended towing condition.

TRAILER HITCH CLASSIFICATIONS

Class Max. GTW(Gross Trailer Wt.)

Class I - Light Duty 2,000 lbs (907 kg)Class II - Medium Duty 3,500 lbs (1 587 kg)Class III - Heavy Duty 5,000 lbs (2 268 kg)Class IV - Extra HeavyDuty

10,000 lbs (4 540 kg)

Refer to the “Trailer Towing Weights (MaximumTrailer Weight Ratings)” chart for the MaximumGross Trailer Weight (GTW) towable for your givendrivetrain.

5


Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)The following chart provides the maximum trailer weight ratings towable for your given drivetrain.

Engine/Transaxle GCWR (Gross Com-bined Wt. Rating) Frontal Area Max. GTW

(Gross Trailer Wt.) Max. Tongue Wt.

3.3L, 3.8L and 4.0L/Automatic

7,000 lbs (3 175 kg) 22 sq ft (2.0 sq m)Up to 2 persons &Luggage 1,800 lbs

(816 kg)180 lbs (82 kg)

7,000 lbs (3 175 kg) 22 sq ft (2.0 sq m)3 to 5 persons &

Luggage 1,350 lbs(612 kg)

135 lbs (61 kg)


Luggage 1,000 lbs(454 kg)

100 lbs (45 kg)


Engine/Transaxle GCWR (Gross Com-bined Wt. Rating) Frontal Area Max. GTW

(Gross Trailer Wt.) Max. Tongue Wt.

3.8L and 4.0L/Automatic (with

Tow Package)

9,000 lbs (4 082 kg) 40 sq ft (3.72 sq m)Up to 2 persons &Luggage 3,800 lbs

(1 723 kg)*380 lbs (172 kg)


Luggage 3,350 lbs(1 519 kg)*

335 lbs (152 kg)


Luggage 3,000 lbs(1 360 kg)*

300 lbs (136 kg)

* For vehicles equipped with Fold-in-Floor seating, the Gross Trailer Weight must be reduced by 100 lbs (45 kg).Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds.NOTE: The trailer tongue weight must be considered as part of the combined weight of occupants andcargo, and should never exceed the weight referenced on the Tire and Loading Information placard. Refer toTire–Safety Information in this section of the manual.

Trailer and Trailer Tongue WeightAlways load a trailer with 60% to 65% of the weight inthe front of the trailer. This places 10% to 15% of the

Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) on the tow hitch of yourvehicle. Loads balanced over the wheels or heavier in therear can cause the trailer to sway severely side-to-side,

5


which will cause loss of control of the vehicle and trailer.Failure to load trailers heavier in front is the cause ofmany trailer accidents.

Never exceed the maximum trailer tongue weightstamped on your bumper or trailer hitch.

Consider the following items when computing theweight on the rear axle of the vehicle:

• The tongue weight of the trailer.

• The weight of any other type of cargo/luggage orequipment put in or on your vehicle.

• The weight of the driver and all passengers.

NOTE: Remember that everything put into or on thetrailer adds to the load on your vehicle. Also, additionalfactory-installed options, or authorized dealer-installedoptions, must be considered as part of the total load onyour vehicle. Refer to the Tire and Loading Informationplacard in the “Tire-Safety Information” section of thismanual for the maximum combined weight of occupantsand cargo for your vehicle.


Towing RequirementsTo promote proper break-in of your new vehicle drive-train components, the following guidelines are recom-mended:

CAUTION!

• Avoid towing a trailer for the first 500 miles(805 km) of vehicle operation. Doing so may dam-age your vehicle.

• During the first 500 miles (805 km) of trailertowing, limit your speed to 50 mph (80 km/h).

Perform the maintenance listed in the “MaintenanceSchedule.” Refer to Section 8 of this manual. Whentowing a trailer, never exceed the GAWR or GCWRratings.

WARNING!

Improper towing can lead to an injury accident.Follow these guidelines to make your trailer towingas safe as possible:• Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer

and will not shift during travel. When traileringcargo that is not fully secured, dynamic load shiftscan occur that may be difficult for the driver tocontrol. You could lose control of your vehicle andhave an accident.

• When hauling cargo or towing a trailer, do notoverload your vehicle or trailer. Overloading cancause a loss of control, poor performance or dam-age to brakes, axle, engine, transaxle, steering,suspension, chassis structure or tires.

(Continued)

5


WARNING! (Continued)• Safety chains must always be used between your

vehicle and trailer. Always connect the chains tothe frame or hook retainers of the vehicle hitch.Cross the chains under the trailer tongue andallow enough slack for turning corners.

• Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on agrade. When parking, apply the parking brake onthe tow vehicle. Put the tow vehicle automatictransmission in PARK. Always, block or �chock�the trailer wheels.

• GCWR must not be exceeded.• Total weight must be distributed between the tow

vehicle and the trailer such that the following fourratings are not exceeded:1. GVWR2. GTW

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)3. GAWR4. Trailer tongue weight rating for that trailer hitch.(This requirement may limit the ability to alwaysachieve the 10% to 15% range of trailer tongue weightas a percentage of total trailer weight.)

Towing Requirements — Tires

• Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a compactspare tire.

• Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the safeand satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Refer to“Tires–General Information” in this section for propertire inflation procedures.

• Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation pres-sures before trailer usage.


• Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damagebefore towing a trailer. Refer to “Tires–General Infor-mation” in this section for the proper inspectionprocedure.

• When replacing tires, refer to “Tires–General Informa-tion” in this section for proper tire replacement proce-dures. Replacing tires with a higher load carryingcapacity will not increase the vehicle’s GVWR andGAWR limits.

Towing Requirements — Trailer Brakes

• Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system orvacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer.This could cause inadequate braking and possiblepersonal injury.

• An electronically actuated trailer brake controller isrequired when towing a trailer with electronicallyactuated brakes. When towing a trailer equipped witha hydraulic surge actuated brake system, an electronicbrake controller is not required.

• Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over1,000 lbs (454 kg) and required for trailers in excess of2,000 lbs (907 kg).

CAUTION!

If the trailer weighs more than 1,000 lbs (454 kg)loaded, it should have its own brakes and theyshould be of adequate capacity. Failure to do thiscould lead to accelerated brake lining wear, higherbrake pedal effort, and longer stopping distances.

5


WARNING!

• Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle’shydraulic brake lines. It can overload your brakesystem and cause it to fail. You might not havebrakes when you need them and could have anaccident.

• Towing any trailer will increase your stoppingdistance. When towing you should allow for addi-tional space between your vehicle and the vehiclein front of you. Failure to do so could result in anaccident.

Towing Requirements — Trailer Lights and WiringWhenever you pull a trailer, regardless of the trailer size,stop lights and turn signals on the trailer are required formotoring safety.

The Trailer Tow Package may include a four-pin or aseven-pin wiring harness. Use a factory approved trailerharness and connector.

NOTE: Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicleswiring harness.

The electrical connections are all complete to the vehiclebut you must mate the harness to a trailer connector.Refer to the following four-pin connector and seven-pinconnector illustrations.


Four-Pin Connector

1 — Female Pins 4 — Park2 — Male Pin 5 — Left Stop/Turn3 — Ground 6 — Right Stop/Turn

Seven-Pin Connector

1 — Battery 5 — Ground2 — Backup Lamps 6 — Left Stop/Turn3 — Right Stop/Turn 7 — Running Lamps4 — Electric Brakes

5


Towing TipsBefore setting out on a trip, practice turning, stoppingand backing the trailer in an area away from heavytraffic.

Automatic TransaxleThe DRIVE gear can be selected when towing. However,if frequent shifting occurs while in DRIVE, move the shiftlever into third gear (with four-speed transaxle) or fifthgear (with six-speed transaxle).

NOTE: Moving the shift lever into third gear (withfour-speed transaxle) or fifth gear (with six-speed trans-axle) while operating the vehicle under heavy operatingconditions will improve performance and extend trans-axle life by reducing excessive shifting and heat build up.This action will also provide better engine braking.

The automatic transaxle fluid and filter should bechanged if you REGULARLY tow a trailer for more than

45 minutes of continuous operation. Refer to the “Main-tenance Schedule” in Section 8 for the proper mainte-nance intervals.

NOTE:• Check the automatic transaxle fluid level before tow-

ing.

• The six-speed automatic transaxle is sealed and re-quires an authorized dealer to check the transaxlefluid.

Electronic Speed Control — If Equipped

• Do not use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads.

• When using the speed control, if you experience speeddrops greater than 10 mph (16 km/h), disengage untilyou can get back to cruising speed.

• Use speed control in flat terrain and with light loads tomaximize fuel efficiency.


Cooling SystemTo reduce potential for engine and transaxle overheating,take the following actions:

• City DrivingWhen stopped for short periods of time, put the shiftlever in NEUTRAL but do not increase engine idle speed.

• Highway DrivingReduce speed.

• Air ConditioningTurn off temporarily.

RECREATIONAL TOWING(BEHIND MOTORHOME, ETC.)

CAUTION!

Towing this vehicle behind another vehicle (flat-towing with all four wheels on the ground) is notrecommended.

NOTE: If the vehicle requires towing, make sure all fourwheels are off the ground. 5


WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

CONTENTS

� Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392

� If Your Engine Overheats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392

� Jacking And Tire Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393

▫ Jack Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394

▫ Spare Tire Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394

▫ Preparations For Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395

▫ Jacking Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396

▫ Wheel Nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402

▫ Secure The Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403

� Jump-Starting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405

� Freeing A Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408

� Towing A Disabled Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409

▫ Towing With The Ignition Key . . . . . . . . . . . 409

6

HAZARD WARNING FLASHERThe Hazard Warning flasher switch is located in thecenter of the instrument panel above the radio.

Press the switch to turn on the Hazard Warningflasher. When the switch is activated, all directionalturn signals will flash on and off to warn oncoming

traffic of an emergency. Press the switch a second time toturn off the Hazard Warning flasher.

This is an emergency warning system and should not beused when the vehicle is in motion. Use it when yourvehicle is disabled and is creating a safety hazard forother motorists.

When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance, theHazard Warning flasher will continue to operate eventhough the ignition switch is OFF.

NOTE: With extended use, the Hazard Warning flashermay wear down your battery.

IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATSIn any of the following situations, you can reduce thepotential for overheating by taking the appropriate ac-tion.• On the highways — Slow down.• In city traffic — While stopped, shift the transmission

shift lever into NEUTRAL, but do not increase engineidle speed.

NOTE: There are steps that you can take to slow downan impending overheat condition:

• If your air conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off. The A/Csystem adds heat to the engine cooling system andturning the A/C off can help remove this heat.

• You can also turn the temperature control to maximumheat, the mode control to floor and the blower controlto high. This allows the heater core to act as asupplement to the radiator and aids in removing heatfrom the engine cooling system.

392 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

CAUTION!

Driving with a hot cooling system could damageyour vehicle. If temperature gauge reads “H”, pullover and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the airconditioner turned off until the pointer drops backinto the normal range. If the pointer remains on the“H”, turn the engine off immediately, and call forservice.

WARNING!

A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You orothers could be badly burned by steam or boilingcoolant. You may want to call a service center if yourvehicle overheats. If you decide to look under thehood yourself, see Section 7, Maintenance, of thismanual. Follow the warnings under the CoolingSystem Pressure Cap paragraph.

JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING

WARNING!

• Getting under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous.The vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you.You could be crushed. Never get any part of yourbody under a vehicle that is on a jack. If you needto get under a raised vehicle, take it to a servicecenter where it can be raised on a lift.

• The jack is designed to use as a tool for changingtires only. The jack should not be used to lift thevehicle for service purposes. The vehicle shouldbe jacked on a firm level surface only. Avoid ice orslippery areas.

• If it is necessary to retrieve the spare tire fromunder the vehicle on the side of the vehicle close tomoving traffic. Pull far enough off the road toavoid the danger of being hit.

6

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 393

Jack LocationThe jack, jack handle and winch handle tools are stowedbehind the rear left side trim panel in the rear cargo area.Turn the two cover latches to release the cover.

Remove the pouch containing the scissors jack, jackhandle, and tools.

Spare Tire RemovalThe spare tire is stowed inside a protective cover locatedunder the center of the vehicle by means of a cable winchmechanism. The “spare tire drive” nut is located on thefloor, under a plastic cap at the front of the floor console.

NOTE: The base console, if equipped, must be removedto raise and lower the spare tire. Refer to “ConsoleFeatures” in Section 3 for the console removal procedure.

The tool pouch contains three pieces and can be as-sembled into a spare tire hook; to remove the compactspare tire/cover assembly from under the vehicle, or aWinch “T” Handle; to raise/lower the compact sparetire/cover assembly.

Jack And Tool Location


Preparations For Jacking

1. Park the vehicle on a firm, level surface. Avoid ice orslippery areas.

WARNING!

Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of thevehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough offthe road to avoid being hit when operating the jackor changing the wheel.

2. Set the parking brake.

3. Place the shift lever into PARK.

4. Turn OFF the ignition.

5. Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.

Tools

1A – Spare Tire Hook(Piece 1)

2A – Winch “T” Handle(Piece 1)

1B – Spare Tire Hook(Piece 2)

2B – Winch “T” Handle(Piece 2)

1C – Spare Tire Hook(Piece 3)

2C – Winch “T” Handle(Piece 3)

6


6. Block both the front and rear of thewheel diagonally opposite the jackingposition. For example, if changing theright front tire, block the left rearwheel.

NOTE: Passengers should not remain in the vehiclewhen the vehicle is being jacked.

Jacking Instructions

WARNING!

Carefully follow these tire changing warnings tohelp prevent personal injury or damage to yourvehicle:

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)• Always park on a firm, level surface as far from

the edge of the roadway as possible before raisingthe vehicle.

• Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel tobe raised.

• Set the parking brake firmly and set an automatictransmission in PARK; a manual transmission inREVERSE.

• Never start or run the engine with the vehicle on ajack.

• Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on ajack.

• Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack.• Only use the jack in the positions indicated and

for lifting this vehicle during a tire change.

(Continued)


WARNING! (Continued)• If working on or near a roadway, be extremely

careful of motor traffic.• To assure that spare tires, flat or inflated, are

securely stowed, spares must be stowed with thevalve stem facing the ground.

• Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.

1. Loosen (but do not remove) the wheel lug nuts byturning them to the left one turn while the wheel is stillon the ground.

2. To remove the compact spare tire/cover assembly,assemble the winch handle extensions to form a “T’ andfit the winch “T” handle over the drive nut. Rotate thenut to the left until the winch mechanism stops turningfreely. This will allow enough slack in the cable to allowyou to pull the spare tire out from under the vehicle.

CAUTION!

The winch mechanism is designed for use with thewinch “T” handle only. Use of an air wrench or otherpower tools is not recommended and can damage thewinch.

3. Assemble the winch handle extensions to form theSpare Tire Hook and pull the compact spare tire/coverassembly from under the vehicle.

Jack Warning Label

6


WARNING!

Getting under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous. Thevehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you. Youcould be crushed. Never get any part of your bodyunder a vehicle that is on a jack. If you need to getunder a raised vehicle, take it to a service centerwhere it can be raised on a lift.

NOTE: If either front tire is flat, it may be necessary tojack up the vehicle to remove the compact spare tire/cover assembly from under the vehicle. Refer to jackengagement locations in the following steps for properjack placement. 4. When the compact spare tire/cover assembly is clear

of the vehicle, stand the tire/cover assembly upright andremove the wheel spacer by squeezing the two retainertabs together.

Spare Tire Hook And Removal


5. There are two jack engagement locations on each sideof the vehicle body. These locations are on the sill flangeof the vehicle body.

NOTE:• Rear jack locations are between a pair of down-facing

tabs on the sill flange of the vehicle side body.

• Front jack locations are on the sill flange of the vehicleside body, and align with front door edges.

Squeezing Winch Retainer Tabs6


Jack Location


CAUTION!

Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking onlocations other than those indicated in Step 5.

6. Place the wrench on the jack screw and turn to theright until the jack head is properly engaged in thedescribed location. Do not raise the vehicle until you aresure the jack is securely engaged.

7. Raise the vehicle by turning the jack screw to the right,using the swivel wrench. Raise the vehicle only until thetire just clears the surface and enough clearance isobtained to install the spare tire. Minimum tire liftprovides maximum stability.

WARNING!

Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can makethe vehicle less stable. It could slip off the jack andhurt someone near it. Raise the vehicle only enoughto remove the tire.

8. Remove the wheel lug nuts, for vehicles with wheelcovers, remove the cover from the wheel by hand. Do notpry the wheel cover off. Then pull the wheel off the hub.

9. Install the compact spare tire. Lightly tighten the lugnuts. To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack,do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle has beenlowered.

NOTE:• Do not install the wheel cover on the compact spare.

• Do not use a hammer or force to install the wheelcovers.

6


10. Lower the vehicle by turning the jack screw to theleft.

11. Finish tightening the lug nuts. Push down on thewrench while tightening for increased leverage. Alternatelug nuts until each nut has been tightened twice. Thecorrect wheel nut tightness is 95 ft lbs (130 N·m). If indoubt about the correct tightness, have them checkedwith a torque wrench by your authorized dealer or at aservice station.

12. Lower the jack to its fully-closed position.

WARNING!

A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision orhard stop could endanger the occupants of the ve-hicle. Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire inthe places provided. Have the deflated (flat) tirerepaired or replaced immediately.

13. Place the deflated (flat) tire and compact spare tirecover assembly. in the rear cargo area. Do not stow thedeflated tire in the spare tire location. Have the full-sized tire repaired or replaced, as soon as possible.

14. Stow the cable and wheel spacer before driving thevehicle. Reassemble the winch handle extensions to forma “T” and fit the winch “T” handle over the drive nut.Rotate the nut to the right until the winch mechanismclicks at least three times.

15. Stow the jack, jack handle and winch handle tools.

16. Check the compact spare tire pressure as soon aspossible. Correct the tire pressure, as required.

Wheel NutsAll wheel nuts should be tightened occasionally, toeliminate the possibility of wheel studs being sheared orthe bolt holes in the wheels becoming elongated. This isespecially important during the first few hundred miles


of operation, and after each time a tire is changed, toallow the wheel nuts to become properly set. All nutsshould first be firmly seated against the wheel. The nutsshould then be tightened to recommended torque.Tighten the nuts to final torque in increments. Progressaround the bolt circle, tightening the nut opposite to thenut just previously tightened until final torque isachieved. Recommended torque is 95 ft lbs (130 N·m).

Secure The Spare Tire

1. Assemble the winch handle extensions to form a “T”and fit the winch “T” handle over the drive nut. Rotatethe nut to the left until the winch mechanism stopsturning freely. This will allow enough slack in the cable toallow you to pull the wheel spacer out from under thevehicle.

WARNING!

A loose compact spare tire/cover assembly, thrownforward in a collision or hard stop could endangerthe occupants of the vehicle. Always stow the com-pact spare tire with the cover assembly in the placeprovided.

CAUTION!

The winch mechanism is designed for use with thewinch “T” handle only. Use of an air wrench or otherpower tools is not recommended and can damage thewinch.

6


2. Assemble the winch handle extensions to form thespare tire hook, and pull the wheel spacer from under thevehicle.

3. Turn the compact spare tire so that the valve stem isdown, and place the tire into the spare tire/cover assem-bly. Slide the wheel spacer through the center of thewheel and spare tire/cover assembly, so that the tworetainer tabs snap out and engage the spare tire cover onthe opposite side.

CAUTION!

The compact spare tire/cover assembly must be usedwhen the compact spare tire is stored. Failure to usethis cover could drastically reduce the life of thecompact spare tire.

WARNING!

Verify that both retainer tabs of the wheel spacerhave been properly extended through the center ofthe wheel and spare tire/cover assembly. Failure toproperly engage both retainer tabs could result inloss of the spare tire and cover assembly, which willcause vehicle damage and may cause loss of vehiclecontrol.

4. Using the winch “T” handle, rotate the drive nut to theright until the compact spare tire/cover assembly isdrawn into place against the underside of the vehicle.

5. Continue to rotate the nut to the right until you hearthe winch mechanism click three times. It cannot beovertightened. Check under the vehicle to ensure thecompact spare tire/cover assembly is positioned cor-rectly against the underside of the vehicle.


CAUTION!

The winch mechanism is designed specifically tostow a compact spare tire only. Do not attempt to usethe winch to stow the full size flat tire, or any otherfull-size tire. Vehicle damage may result.

JUMP-STARTING PROCEDUREDo not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get itstarted. Vehicles equipped with an automatic transmis-sion cannot be started this way. Also, there is a greaterrisk of an accident when a vehicle is being pushed ortowed. If the vehicle has a discharged battery, boostercables may be used to obtain a start from a boosterbattery or the battery in another vehicle. This type of startcan be dangerous if done improperly, so follow thisprocedure carefully.

WARNING!

• Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan when-ever the hood is raised. It can start anytime theignition switch is on. You can be hurt by the fan.

• Remove any metal jewelry such as watch bands orbracelets that might make an inadvertent electricalcontact. You could be seriously injured.

• Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution that cancause serious burns; do not allow battery fluid tocontact eyes, skin or clothing. Wear safety glassesand protect your eyes at all times. If acid splashesin eyes or on skin, flush contaminated area imme-diately with large quantities of water.

(Continued)

6


WARNING! (Continued)• A battery generates hydrogen gas which is flam-

mable and explosive. Keep flame or spark awayfrom the vent holes. Do not lean over battery whenattaching clamps or allow the clamps to touch eachother.

• Do not use a booster battery or any other boostersource that has a greater than 12 Volt system, i.e.,do not use a 24 Volt power source.

When jump-starting, proceed as follows:

1. Wear eye protection and remove any metal jewelry,such as watch bands or bracelets, that might make aninadvertent electrical contact.

2. When a boost is provided by a battery in anothervehicle, park that vehicle within booster cable reach anddo not let the vehicles touch. Set the parking brake, placethe automatic transmission shift lever into PARK andturn the ignition switch to the OFF position for bothvehicles.

WARNING!

Do not permit vehicles to touch each other as thiscould establish a ground connection and personalinjury could result.

3. Turn off the heater, radio and all unnecessary electricalloads.

4. Connect one end of a jumper cable to the positiveterminal of the discharged battery. Connect the other endof the same cable to the positive terminal of the boosterbattery.


5. Connect the other cable, first to the negative terminalof the booster battery, and then to the engine of thevehicle with the discharged battery. Make sure there is agood contact on the engine.

WARNING!

• Do not connect the cable to the negative post of thedischarged battery. The resulting electrical sparkcould cause the battery to explode and could resultin personal injury.

• During cold weather when temperatures are be-low the freezing point, electrolyte in a dischargedbattery may freeze. Do not attempt jump-startingbecause the battery could rupture or explode andcause personal injury. Battery temperature must bebrought above freezing point before attempting ajump-start.

6. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the boosterbattery. Let the engine idle a few minutes, then start theengine in the vehicle with the discharged battery.

7. When removing the jumper cables, reverse the abovesequence exactly. Be careful of the moving belts and fan.

WARNING!

Any procedure other than the jump-starting processlisted could result in:• Personal injury caused by electrolyte squirting out

the battery vent.• Personal injury or property damage due to battery

explosion.

6


CAUTION!

Any procedure other than above could result indamage to the charging system of the booster vehicleor of the immobilized vehicle.

FREEING A STUCK VEHICLEIf your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand or snow, itcan often be moved by a rocking motion. Turn yoursteering wheel right and left to clear the area around thefront wheels. Then move the shift lever back and forthbetween REVERSE and DRIVE. Using minimal accelera-tor pedal pressure to maintain the rocking motion, with-out spinning the wheels, is most effective.

CAUTION!

• When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by moving be-tween 1st and REVERSE, do not spin the wheelsfaster than 15 mph (24 km/h), or drivetrain damagemay result.

• Revving the engine or spinning the wheels too fastmay lead to transmission overheating and failure.It can also damage the tires. Do not spin thewheels above 30 mph (48 km/h).

NOTE: To improve the vehicle’s traction when startingoff in deep snow, sand or gravel, it may be desirable toswitch the Electronic Stability Control (ESC) to “PartialOff” mode. For further information on ESC refer to“Electronic Brake Control System” in Section 5.


WARNING!

Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces gener-ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause damage, oreven failure, of the axle and tires. A tire couldexplode and injure someone. Do not spin your vehi-cle’s wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or forlonger than 30 seconds continuously without stop-ping when you are stuck and do not let anyone neara spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.

TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE

Towing With The Ignition KeyYour vehicle may be towed under the following condi-tions:

• The shift lever must be in NEUTRAL.

• The distance to be traveled must not exceed 100 miles(160 km).

• The towing speed must not exceed 44 mph (72 km/h).

CAUTION!

Exceeding these towing limits may cause a transmis-sion gear failure.

If the transmission is inoperative, or if the vehicle is to betowed more than 100 miles (160 km), the vehicle must betowed with the front wheels off the ground.

CAUTION!

• Do not attempt to tow this vehicle from the frontwith sling-type towing equipment. Damage to thefront fascia will result.

• Always use wheel lift equipment when towingfrom the front. The only other approved method oftowing is with a flatbed truck.

(Continued)

6


CAUTION! (Continued)• Do not tow the vehicle from the rear. Damage to

the rear sheet metal, liftgate and fascia will occur.• Do not push or tow this vehicle with another

vehicle as damage to the bumper fascia and trans-mission may result.

• If the vehicle being towed requires steering, theignition switch must be in the ON position, not inthe LOCK or ACC positions.

If it is necessary to use the accessories while being towed(wipers, defrosters, etc.), the key must be in the ONposition, not the ACC position. Make certain the trans-mission remains in NEUTRAL.

Towing Without The Ignition KeySpecial care must be taken when the vehicle is towedwith the ignition in the OFF position. The only approvedmethod of towing without the ignition key is with aflatbed truck. Proper towing equipment is necessary toprevent damage to the vehicle.

Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle (FlatTowing With All Four Wheels On The Ground)Flat towing of vehicles equipped with an automatictransmission, is only permitted within the limitationsdescribed in this section.

Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle WithA Tow DollyThe manufacturer does not recommend that you tow afront wheel drive vehicle on a tow dolly. Vehicle damagemay occur.


MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

CONTENTS

� Engine Compartment — 3.3/3.8L . . . . . . . . . . 413

� Engine Compartment — 4.0L . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414

� Onboard Diagnostic System — OBD II . . . . . . 415

▫ Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message . . . . . . . . . . . 415

� Emissions Inspection And MaintenancePrograms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416

� Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417

� Dealer Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418

� Maintenance Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418

▫ Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419

▫ Engine Oil Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422

▫ Engine Air Cleaner Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422

▫ Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423

▫ Maintenance-Free Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425

▫ Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . 426

▫ Body Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429

▫ Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429

7

▫ Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431

▫ Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436

▫ Automatic Transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 438

▫ Appearance Care And Protection FromCorrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441

▫ Cleaning The Instrument Panel Cupholders . . 446

� Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447

▫ Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) . . . 447

� Vehicle Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 455

� Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 455

� Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 456

▫ High Intensity Discharge Headlamps(HID) — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 456

▫ Quad Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 457

▫ Front Park/Turn Signal Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . 457

▫ Front Side Marker Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 458

▫ Fog Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 458

▫ Rear Tail, Stop, Turn Signal, Side MarkerAnd Backup Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 459

▫ Center High-Mounted Stop Lamp(CHMSL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 460

▫ License Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 460

� Fluids And Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 461

� Fluids, Lubricants And Genuine Parts . . . . . . . 462

▫ Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 462

▫ Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 463

412 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 3.3/3.8L

1 — Air Cleaner Filter 7 — Engine Oil Fill2 — Automatic Transmission Dipstick (3.3L Only) 8 — Engine Oil Dipstick3 — Brake Fluid Reservoir 9 — Coolant Pressure Cap4 — Battery 10 — Washer Fluid Reservoir5 — Totally Integrated Power Module 11 — Power Steering Fluid Reservoir6 — Engine Coolant Reservoir

7

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 413

ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 4.0L

1 — Power Steering Fluid Reservoir 7 — Engine Oil Dipstick2 — Air Cleaner Filter 8 — Engine Oil Fill3 — Brake Fluid Reservoir 9 — Coolant Pressure Cap4 — Battery 10 — Washer Fluid Reservoir5 — Totally Integrated Power Module6 — Engine Coolant Reservoir


ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD IIYour vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated onboarddiagnostic system called OBD II. This system monitorsthe performance of the emissions, engine, and automatictransmission control systems. When these systems areoperating properly, your vehicle will provide excellentperformance and fuel economy, as well as engine emis-sions well within current government regulations.

If any of these systems require service, the OBD II systemwill turn on the “Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL).” Itwill also store diagnostic codes and other information toassist your service technician in making repairs. Al-though your vehicle will usually be drivable and notneed towing, see your authorized dealer for service assoon as possible.

CAUTION!

• Prolonged driving with the MIL on could causefurther damage to the emission control system. Itcould also affect fuel economy and driveability.The vehicle must be serviced before any emissionstests can be performed.

• If the MIL is flashing while the engine is running,severe catalytic converter damage and power losswill soon occur. Immediate service is required.

Loose Fuel Filler Cap MessageIf the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuelfiller cap is loose, improperly installed, or damaged, a“gASCAP” message will display in the odometer or a“CHECK GASCAP” message will be displayed in theElectronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). Refer to“Electronic Vehicle Information Center” in Section 4 of

7


this manual. Tighten the gas cap until a �clicking� soundis heard. This is an indication that the gas cap is properlytightened.

Press the odometer reset button to turn the message off.If the problem persists, the message will appear the nexttime the vehicle is started. This might indicate a damagedcap. If the problem is detected twice in a row, the systemwill turn on the MIL. Resolving the problem will turn theMIL light off.

EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCEPROGRAMSIn some localities, it may be a legal requirement to passan inspection of your vehicle’s emissions control system.Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration.

For states that require an Inspection and Mainte-nance (I/M), this check verifies the “Malfunction

Indicator Light (MIL)” is functioning and is not on whenthe engine is running, and that the OBD II system isready for testing.

Normally, the OBD II system will be ready. The OBD IIsystem may not be ready if your vehicle was recentlyserviced, recently had a dead battery or a battery replace-ment. If the OBD II system should be determined notready for the I/M test, your vehicle may fail the test.

Your vehicle has a simple ignition key-actuated test,which you can use prior to going to the test station. Tocheck if your vehicle’s OBD II system is ready, you mustdo the following:

1. Insert your ignition key into the ignition switch.

2. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position, but do notcrank or start the engine.

3. If you crank or start the engine, you will have to startthis test over.


4. As soon as you turn the ignition switch to the ONposition, you will see the MIL symbol come on as part ofa normal bulb check.

5. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two things willhappen:

a. The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and thenreturn to being fully illuminated until you turn OFFthe ignition or start the engine. This means that yourvehicle’s OBD II system is not ready and you shouldnot proceed to the I/M station.

b. The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fullyilluminated until you turn OFF the ignition or start theengine. This means that your vehicle’s OBD II systemis ready and you can proceed to the I/M station.

If your OBD II system is not ready, you should see yourauthorized dealer or repair facility. If your vehicle wasrecently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement,

you may need to do nothing more than drive yourvehicle as you normally would in order for your OBD IIsystem to update. A recheck with the above test routinemay then indicate that the system is now ready.

Regardless of whether your vehicle’s OBD II system isready or not, if the MIL is illuminated during normalvehicle operation you should have your vehicle servicedbefore going to the I/M station. The I/M station can failyour vehicle because the MIL is on with the enginerunning.

REPLACEMENT PARTSUse of genuine MOPAR� parts for normal/scheduledmaintenance and repairs is highly recommended to en-sure the designed performance. Damage or failurescaused by the use of non-MOPAR� parts for maintenanceand repairs will not be covered by the manufacturer’swarranty.

7


DEALER SERVICEYour authorized dealer has the qualified service person-nel, special tools, and equipment to perform all serviceoperations in an expert manner. Service Manuals areavailable which include detailed service information foryour vehicle. Refer to these manuals before attemptingany procedure yourself.

NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions controlsystems may void your warranty and could result in civilpenalties being assessed against you.

WARNING!

You can be badly injured working on or around amotor vehicle. Only do service work for which youhave the knowledge and the proper equipment. Ifyou have any doubt about your ability to perform aservice job, take your vehicle to a competent me-chanic.

MAINTENANCE PROCEDURESThe pages that follow contain the required maintenanceservices determined by the engineers who designed yourvehicle.

Besides those maintenance items specified in the fixedmaintenance schedule, there are other components whichmay require servicing or replacement in the future.

CAUTION!

• Failure to properly maintain your vehicle or per-form repairs and service when necessary couldresult in more costly repairs, damage to othercomponents or negatively impact vehicle perfor-mance. Immediately have potential malfunctionsexamined by an authorized Chrysler Group LLCdealership or qualified repair center.

(Continued)


CAUTION! (Continued)• Your vehicle has been built with improved fluids

that protect the performance and durability ofyour vehicle and also allow extended maintenanceintervals. Do not use chemical flushes in thesecomponents as the chemicals can damage yourengine, transmission, power steering or air condi-tioning. Such damage is not covered by the NewVehicle Limited Warranty. If a flush is neededbecause of component malfunction, use only thespecified fluid for the flushing procedure.

Engine Oil

Checking Oil LevelTo assure proper engine lubrication, the engine oil mustbe maintained at the correct level. Check the oil level atregular intervals, such as every fuel stop. The best time to

check the engine oil level is about five minutes after afully warmed engine is shut OFF or before starting theengine after it has sat overnight.

Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground willimprove the accuracy of the oil level readings. Maintainthe oil level between the MIN and MAX markings on thedipstick. Adding one quart of oil when the reading is atthe MIN mark will result in a MAX reading on theseengines.

CAUTION!

Overfilling or underfilling will cause oil aeration, orloss of oil pressure. This could damage your engine. 7


Change Engine OilThe oil change indicator system will remind you that it istime to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” in Section 8 forinformation on this system.

NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil changeintervals exceed 6,000 miles (10 000 km) or six months,whichever occurs first.

Engine Oil SelectionFor best performance and maximum protection under alltypes of operating conditions, the manufacturer onlyrecommends engine oils that are API certified and meetthe requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS-6395.

American Petroleum Institute (API) Engine OilIdentification Symbol

This symbol means that the oil hasbeen certified by the AmericanPetroleum Institute (API). Themanufacturer only recommendsAPI Certified engine oils.

CAUTION!

Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as thechemicals can damage your engine. Such damage isnot covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.


Engine Oil Viscosity (SAE Grade) — 3.3L & 3.8LGasoline EnginesSAE 5W-20 engine oil is recommended for all operatingtemperatures. This engine oil improves low temperaturestarting and vehicle fuel economy. Your engine oil fillercap also shows the recommended engine oil viscosity foryour vehicle.

For information on engine oil filler cap location, refer to“Engine Compartment” in this section.

Lubricants that do not have both the engine oil certifica-tion mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade number,should not be used.

Engine Oil Viscosity (SAE Grade) — 4.0L GasolineEnginesSAE 10W-30 engine oil is preferred for all operatingtemperatures. Your engine oil filler cap also shows therecommended engine oil viscosity for your vehicle.

For information on engine oil filler cap location, refer to“Engine Compartment” in this section.

Lubricants that do not have both the engine oil certifica-tion mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade number,should not be used.

Synthetic Engine OilsYou may use synthetic engine oils provided the recom-mended oil quality requirements are met, and the recom-mended maintenance intervals for oil and filter changesare followed.

Materials Added to Engine OilThe manufacturer strongly recommends against the addi-tion of any additives (other than leak detection dyes) tothe engine oil. Engine oil is an engineered product and itsperformance may be impaired by supplemental additives.

7


Disposing of Used Engine Oil and Oil FiltersCare should be taken in disposing of used engine oil andoil filters from your vehicle. Used oil and oil filters,indiscriminately discarded, can present a problem to theenvironment. Contact your authorized dealer, servicestation, or governmental agency for advice on how andwhere used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded inyour area.

Engine Oil FilterThe engine oil filter should be replaced at every engineoil change.

Engine Oil Filter SelectionThe manufacturer’s engines have a full-flow type oilfilter. Use a filter of this type for replacement. The qualityof replacement filters varies considerably. Only highquality filters should be used to assure most efficientservice. MOPAR� engine oil filters are a high quality oilfilter and are recommended.

Engine Air Cleaner FilterRefer to the “Maintenance Schedule” in Section 8 for theproper maintenance intervals.

WARNING!

The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) canprovide a measure of protection in the case of enginebackfire. Do not remove the air induction system (aircleaner, hoses, etc.) unless such removal is necessaryfor repair or maintenance. Make sure that no one isnear the engine compartment before starting thevehicle with the air induction system (air cleaner,hoses, etc.) removed. Failure to do so can result inserious personal injury.


Engine Air Cleaner Filter SelectionThe quality of replacement engine air cleaner filters variesconsiderably. Only high quality filters should be used toassure most efficient service. MOPAR� engine air cleanerfilters are a high quality filter and are recommended.

Exhaust SystemThe best protection against carbon monoxide entry intothe vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaustsystem.

Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaustsystem, when exhaust fumes can be detected inside thevehicle, or when the underside or rear of the vehicle isdamaged, have a competent mechanic inspect the com-plete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken,damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Openseams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumesto seep into the passenger compartment. In addition,

inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raisedfor lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.

WARNING!

Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbonmonoxide (CO) which is colorless and odorless.Breathing it can make you unconscious and caneventually poison you. To avoid breathing CO, referto “Exhaust Gas” in the Safety Tips section of thismanual.

CAUTION!

The catalytic converter requires the use of unleadedfuel only. Leaded gasoline will destroy the effective-ness of the catalyst as an emissions control deviceand may seriously reduce engine performance andcause serious damage to the engine.

7


Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic con-verter will not require maintenance. However, it is im-portant to keep the engine properly tuned to assureproper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalystdamage.

CAUTION!

Damage to the catalytic converter can result if yourvehicle is not kept in proper operating condition. Inthe event of engine malfunction, particularly involv-ing engine misfire or other apparent loss of perfor-mance, have your vehicle serviced promptly. Contin-ued operation of your vehicle with a severemalfunction could cause the converter to overheat,resulting in possible damage to the converter and thevehicle.

NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions controlsystems can result in civil penalties being assessedagainst you.

WARNING!

A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park overmaterials that can burn. Such materials might begrass or leaves coming into contact with your exhaustsystem. Do not park or operate your vehicle in areaswhere your exhaust system can contact anything thatcan burn.

In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioningengine operation, a scorching odor may indicate severeand abnormal catalyst overheating. If this occurs, thevehicle should be stopped, the engine shut OFF and thevehicle allowed to cool. Thereafter, service, including atune-up to manufacturer’s specifications, should be ob-tained immediately.


To minimize the possibility of catalyst damage:

• Do not shut OFF the engine or interrupt the ignitionwhen the transaxle is in gear and the vehicle is inmotion.

• Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing thevehicle.

• Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wiresdisconnected or removed, such as when diagnostictesting, or for prolonged periods during very roughidling or malfunctioning operating conditions.

Maintenance-Free BatteryThe top of the maintenance-free battery is permanentlysealed. You will never have to add water, nor is periodicmaintenance required.

WARNING!

• Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and canburn or even blind you. Do not allow battery fluidto contact your eyes, skin or clothing. Do not leanover a battery when attaching clamps. If acidsplashes in eyes or on skin, flush the area imme-diately with large amounts of water.

• Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keepflame or sparks away from the battery. Do not usea booster battery or any other booster source withan output greater than 12 volts. Do not allow cableclamps to touch each other.

• Battery posts, terminals and related accessoriescontain lead and lead compounds. Wash handsafter handling.

7


CAUTION!

• It is essential when replacing the cables on thebattery that the positive cable is attached to thepositive post and the negative cable is attached tothe negative post. Battery posts are marked posi-tive (+) and negative (-) and are identified on thebattery case. Cable clamps should be tight on theterminal posts and free of corrosion.

• If a “fast charger” is used while the battery is inthe vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery cablesbefore connecting the charger to the battery. Donot use a “fast charger” to provide starting voltage.

Air Conditioner MaintenanceFor best possible performance, your air conditionershould be checked and serviced by an authorized dealerat the start of each warm season. This service shouldinclude cleaning of the condenser fins and a systemperformance check. Drive belt tension should also bechecked at this time.

CAUTION!

Do not use chemical flushes in your air conditioningsystem as the chemicals can damage your air condi-tioning components. Such damage is not covered bythe New Vehicle Limited Warranty.


WARNING!

• Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricantsapproved by the manufacturer for your air condi-tioning system. Some unapproved refrigerants areflammable and can explode, injuring you. Otherunapproved refrigerants or lubricants can causethe system to fail, requiring costly repairs. Refer toSection 3 of the Warranty Information book, lo-cated on the DVD, for further warranty informa-tion.

• The air conditioning system contains refrigerantunder high pressure. To avoid risk of personalinjury or damage to the system, adding refrigerantor any repair requiring lines to be disconnectedshould be done by an experienced repairman.

Refrigerant Recovery and RecyclingR-134a air conditioning refrigerant is a hydrofluoro-carbon (HFC) that is endorsed by the EnvironmentalProtection Agency and is an ozone-saving product. How-ever, the manufacturer recommends that air conditioningservice be performed by an authorized dealer, or otherauthorized service facility, using recovery and recyclingequipment.

NOTE: Use only manufacturer-approved A/C SystemSealers, Stop Leak Products, Seal Conditioners, Compres-sor Oil, or Refrigerants.

7


A/C Air Filter — If EquippedRefer to the “Maintenance Schedule” in Section 8 for theproper maintenance intervals.

WARNING!

Do not remove the A/C air filter while the blower isoperating or personal injury may result.

The A/C air filter is located in the fresh air inlet behindthe glove box. Perform the following procedure to re-place the filter:

1. Open the glove compartment and remove all contents.

2. Push in on the sides of the glove compartment andlower the door.

3. Pivot the glove compartment downward.

4. Disengage the two retaining tabs that secure the filtercover to the HVAC housing, and remove the cover.

5. Remove the A/C air filter by pulling it straight out ofthe housing.

6. Install the A/C air filter with the arrow on the filterpointing toward the floor. When installing the filtercover, make sure the retaining tabs fully engage thecover.

A/C Air Filter Replacement


CAUTION!

The A/C air filter is labeled with an arrow to indicateairflow direction through the filter. Failure to prop-erly install the filter will result in the need to replaceit more often.

7. Rotate the glove compartment door back into position.

Body LubricationLocks and all body pivot points, including such items asseat tracks, door hinge pivot points and rollers, liftgate,tailgate, sliding doors and hood hinges, should be lubri-cated periodically with a lithium-based grease, such asMOPAR� Spray White Lube or equivalent, to assurequiet, easy operation and to protect against rust andwear. Prior to the application of any lubricant, the partsconcerned should be wiped clean to remove dust andgrit; after lubricating excess oil and grease should beremoved. Particular attention should also be given to

hood latching components to ensure proper function.When performing other underhood services, the hoodlatch, release mechanism and safety catch should becleaned and lubricated.

The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice ayear, preferably in the Fall and Spring. Apply a smallamount of a high quality lubricant such as MOPAR�Lock Cylinder Lubricant or equivalent directly into thelock cylinder.

Windshield Wiper BladesClean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and thewindshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and amild nonabrasive cleaner. This will remove accumula-tions of salt or road film.

Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periodsmay cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always usewasher fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirtfrom a dry windshield.

7


Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice fromthe windshield. Keep the blade rubber out of contact withpetroleum products such as engine oil, gasoline, etc.

NOTE: Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depend-ing on geographical area and frequency of use. Poorperformance of blades may be present with chattering,marks, water lines or wet spots. If any condition ispresent please proceed to clean wiper blades with humidcloth removing any debris that may be affecting itsfunction.

Adding Washer FluidThe fluid reservoir for the windshield washers and therear window washer is shared. It is located in the enginecompartment and should be checked at regular intervals.Fill the reservoir with windshield washer solvent (notradiator antifreeze) and operate the system for a fewseconds to flush out any residual water.

The washer fluid reservoir will hold a full gallon of fluidwhen the Low Washer Fluid Light illuminates.

WARNING!

Commercially available windshield washer solventsare flammable. They could ignite and burn you. Caremust be exercised when filling or working aroundthe washer solution.

After the engine has warmed, operate the defroster for afew minutes to reduce the possibility of smearing orfreezing the fluid on the cold windshield. MOPAR� AllWeather Windshield Washer Solution or equivalent, usedwith water as directed on the container, aids cleaningaction, reduces the freezing point to avoid line clogging,and is not harmful to paint or trim.


Cooling System

WARNING!

• When working near the radiator cooling fan, dis-connect the fan motor lead or turn the ignitionswitch to the OFF position. The fan is temperaturecontrolled and can start at anytime the ignitionswitch is in the ON position.

• You or others can be badly burned by hot enginecoolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. Ifyou see or hear steam coming from under thehood, do not open the hood until the radiator hashad time to cool. Never try to open a coolingsystem pressure cap when the radiator is hot.

Coolant ChecksCheck the engine coolant (antifreeze) protection every12 months (before the onset of freezing weather, whereapplicable). If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or

rusty in appearance, the system should be drained,flushed and refilled with fresh coolant. Check the front ofthe A/C condenser for any accumulation of bugs, leaves,etc. If dirty, clean by gently spraying water from a gardenhose vertically down the face of the condenser.

Check the coolant recovery bottle tubing for brittle rub-ber, cracking, tears, cuts and tightness of the connectionat the bottle and radiator. Inspect the entire system forleaks.

With the engine at normal operating temperature (butnot running), check the cooling system pressure cap forproper vacuum sealing by draining a small amount ofengine coolant (antifreeze) from the radiator drain cock.If the cap is sealing properly, the engine coolant (anti-freeze) will begin to drain from the coolant recoverybottle. DO NOT REMOVE THE COOLANT PRESSURECAP WHEN THE COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT.

7


Cooling System — Drain, Flush and RefillIf the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or contains aconsiderable amount of sediment, clean and flush with areliable cooling system cleaner. Follow with a thoroughrinsing to remove all deposits and chemicals. Properlydispose of the old engine coolant (antifreeze) solution.

Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” in Section 8 for theproper maintenance intervals.

Selection of CoolantUse only the manufacturer’s recommended engine cool-ant (antifreeze). Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants and GenuineParts” in this section for the correct fluid type.

CAUTION!

• Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other thanspecified Hybrid Organic Additive Technology(HOAT) engine coolant (antifreeze), may result inengine damage and may decrease corrosion pro-tection. If a non-HOAT engine coolant (antifreeze)is introduced into the cooling system in an emer-gency, it should be replaced with the specifiedengine coolant (antifreeze) as soon as possible.

• Do not use water alone or alcohol based enginecoolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use addi-tional rust inhibitors or anti-rust products, as theymay not be compatible with the radiator enginecoolant (antifreeze) and may plug the radiator.

• This vehicle has not been designed for use withPropylene Glycol-based engine coolant (anti-freeze). Use of Propylene Glycol-based enginecoolant (antifreeze) is not recommended.


Adding CoolantYour vehicle has been built with an improved enginecoolant (antifreeze) that allows extended maintenanceintervals. This engine coolant (antifreeze) can be used upto five years or 102,000 miles (170 000 km) beforereplacement. To prevent reducing this extended mainte-nance period, it is important that you use the sameengine coolant (antifreeze) throughout the life of yourvehicle. Please review these recommendations for usingHybrid Organic Additive Technology (HOAT) enginecoolant (antifreeze).

When adding engine coolant (antifreeze), a minimumsolution of 50% recommended MOPAR� Antifreeze/Coolant Five Year/100,000 Mile Formula HOAT (HybridOrganic Additive Technology), or equivalent, in watershould be used. Use higher concentrations (not to exceed70%) if temperatures below �34°F (�37°C ) are antici-pated.

Use only high purity water such as distilled or deionizedwater when mixing the water/engine coolant (antifreeze)solution. The use of lower quality water will reduce theamount of corrosion protection in the engine coolingsystem.

Please note that it is the owner’s responsibility to main-tain the proper level of protection against freezing ac-cording to the temperatures occurring in the area wherethe vehicle is operated.

NOTE: Mixing engine coolant (antifreeze) types willdecrease the life of the engine coolant (antifreeze) andwill require more frequent coolant changes.

Cooling System Pressure CapThe cap must be fully tightened to prevent the loss ofengine coolant (antifreeze), and to ensure that enginecoolant (antifreeze) will return to the radiator from thecoolant recovery bottle.

7


The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is anyaccumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces.

WARNING!

• The warning words “DO NOT OPEN HOT” onthe cooling system pressure cap are a safety pre-caution. Never add engine coolant (antifreeze)when the engine is overheated. Do not loosen orremove the cap to cool an overheated engine. Heatcauses pressure to build up in the cooling system.To prevent scalding or injury, do not remove thepressure cap while the system is hot or underpressure.

• Do not use a pressure cap other than the onespecified for your vehicle. Personal injury or en-gine damage may result.

Disposal of Used CoolantUsed ethylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) isa regulated substance requiring proper disposal. Checkwith your local authorities to determine the disposalrules for your community. To prevent ingestion by ani-mals or children, do not store ethylene glycol-basedengine coolant (antifreeze) in open containers or allow itto remain in puddles on the ground. If ingested by a childor pet, seek emergency assistance immediately. Clean upany ground spills immediately.

Coolant LevelThe coolant bottle provides a quick visual method fordetermining that the coolant level is adequate. With theengine cold, the level of the engine coolant (antifreeze) inthe coolant recovery bottle should be between the rangesindicated on the bottle.


The radiator normally remains completely full, so there isno need to remove the radiator cap unless checking forengine coolant (antifreeze) freeze point or replacing theengine coolant (antifreeze). Advise your service atten-dant of this. As long as the engine operating temperatureis satisfactory, the coolant bottle only needs to be checkedonce a month.

When additional engine coolant (antifreeze) is needed tomaintain the proper level, it should be added to thecoolant bottle. Do not overfill.

Points to Remember

NOTE: When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles (afew kilometers) of operation, you may observe vaporcoming from the front of the engine compartment. This isnormally a result of moisture from rain, snow, or highhumidity accumulating on the radiator and being vapor-ized when the thermostat opens, allowing hot enginecoolant (antifreeze) to enter the radiator.

If an examination of your engine compartment shows noevidence of radiator or hose leaks, the vehicle may besafely driven. The vapor will soon dissipate.

• Do not overfill the coolant recovery bottle.

• Check the engine coolant (antifreeze) freeze point inthe radiator and in the coolant recovery bottle. Ifengine coolant (antifreeze) needs to be added, contentsof the coolant recovery bottle must also be protectedagainst freezing.

• If frequent engine coolant (antifreeze) additions arerequired, or if the level in the coolant recovery bottledoes not drop when the engine cools, the coolingsystem should be pressure tested for leaks.

• Maintain engine coolant (antifreeze) concentration at50% HOAT engine coolant (antifreeze) (minimum)and distilled water for proper corrosion protection ofyour engine, which contains aluminum components.

7


• Make sure that the radiator and coolant recoverybottle overflow hoses are not kinked or obstructed.

• Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your vehicle isequipped with air conditioning, also keep the front ofthe condenser clean.

• Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winteroperation. If replacement is ever necessary, installONLY the correct type thermostat. Other designs mayresult in unsatisfactory coolant performance, poor gasmileage, and increased emissions.

BrakesIn order to assure brake system performance, all brakesystem components should be inspected periodically.Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” in Section 8 for theproper maintenance intervals.

WARNING!

Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure andpossibly an accident. Driving with your foot restingor riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormallyhigh brake temperatures, excessive lining wear, andpossible brake damage. You would not have your fullbraking capacity in an emergency.

Master Cylinder — Brake Fluid Level CheckThe fluid level in the master cylinder should be checkedwhen performing underhood services, or immediately ifthe “Brake System Warning Light” indicates system failure.

Clean the top of the master cylinder area before removingthe cap. Add fluid to bring the level up to the top of the“FULL” mark on the side of the master cylinder reservoir.

Overfilling of fluid is not recommended because it maycause leaking in the system.


Add enough fluid to bring the level up to the require-ments described on the brake fluid reservoir. With discbrakes, fluid level can be expected to fall as the brakepads wear. However, low fluid level may be caused by aleak and a checkup may be needed.Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake fluid. Re-fer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in thissection for the correct fluid type.

WARNING!

• Use only manufacturer’s recommended brakefluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and GenuineParts” in this section for the correct fluid type.Using the wrong type of brake fluid can severelydamage your brake system and/or impair its per-formance. The proper type of brake fluid for yourvehicle is also labeled on the original factoryinstalled hydraulic master cylinder reservoir.

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)• To avoid contamination from foreign matter or

moisture, use only new brake fluid or fluid thathas been in a tightly closed container. Keep themaster cylinder reservoir cap secured at all times.Brake fluid in a open container absorbs moisturefrom the air resulting in a lower boiling point.This may cause it to boil unexpectedly during hardor prolonged braking, resulting in sudden brakefailure. This could result in a accident.

• Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result inspilling brake fluid on hot engine parts, causingthe brake fluid to catch fire. Brake fluid can alsodamage painted and vinyl surfaces, care should betaken to avoid its contact with these surfaces.

(Continued)

7


WARNING! (Continued)• Do not allow petroleum based fluid to contami-

nate the brake fluid. Brake seal components couldbe damaged, causing partial or complete brakefailure. This could result in an accident.

Automatic TransaxleThe automatic transaxle and differential assembly arecontained within a single housing.

The fluid level in the automatic transaxle should bechecked whenever the vehicle is serviced. Operation withan improper fluid level will greatly reduce the life of thetransaxle and the fluid.

All four–speed transaxles are equipped with a conven-tional filler tube and dipstick. If fluid is added, it shouldbe added through the filler tube.

All six–speed transaxles are equipped with a cappeddipstick tube. It is sealed and should not be tamperedwith. Your authorized dealer has the necessary tools toensure that the fluid level is set properly.

Selection of LubricantIt is important that the proper lubricant is used in thetransaxle to assure optimum transaxle performance. Useonly the manufacturer’s recommended transmissionfluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts” inthis section for the correct fluid type. It is important thatthe transmission fluid be maintained at the prescribedlevel using the recommended fluid. No chemical flushesshould be used in any transaxle; only the approvedlubricant may be used.


CAUTION!

Using a transmission fluid other than the manufac-turer’s recommended fluid may cause deteriorationin transaxle shift quality and/or torque convertershudder. Using a transmission fluid other than themanufacturer’s recommended fluid will result inmore frequent fluid and filter changes. Refer to“Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts” in this sec-tion for the correct fluid type.

Fluid Level Check — 3.8L and 4.0L Engines withSix-Speed Automatic Transaxle — If EquippedThe six-speed automatic transaxle is a sealed unit and hasno dipstick. See your authorized dealer to have thetransaxle fluid checked or serviced.

Fluid Level Check — 3.3L Engine with Four-SpeedAutomatic Transaxle — If EquippedThe dipstick is located just behind the radiator on thelower right side.

To properly check the automatic transaxle fluid level, thefollowing procedure must be used:

1. The vehicle must be on level ground.

2. The engine should be running at curb idle speed for aminimum of 60 seconds.

3. Fully apply the parking brake.

4. Place the shift lever momentarily into each gear posi-tion, ending with the shift lever in PARK. Wipe the areaaround the dipstick clean to eliminate the possibility ofdirt entering the transaxle.

7


5. Remove the dipstick and determine if the fluid is hotor warm. Hot fluid is approximately 180°F (82°C), whichis the normal operating temperature after the vehicle hasbeen driven at least 15 miles (24 km). The fluid cannot becomfortably held between the fingertips. Cold is whenthe fluid is below 80°F (27°C).

6. Wipe the dipstick clean and reinsert until seated.Remove the dipstick and note reading.

a. If the fluid is hot, the reading should be in thecrosshatched area marked “HOT” (between the uppertwo holes in the dipstick).

b. If the fluid is cold, the fluid level should be betweenthe lower two holes in the area marked “COLD”.

If the fluid level indicates that it is low, add sufficientfluid to bring it to the proper level.

CAUTION!

Do not overfill. Dirt and water in the transaxle cancause serious damage. To prevent dirt and water fromentering the transaxle after checking or replenishingfluid, make certain that the dipstick cap is reseatedproperly.

Fluid and Filter ChangesRefer to the “Maintenance Schedule” in Section 8 for theproper maintenance intervals.

If the transaxle is disassembled for any reason, the fluidand filter should be changed.

Special AdditivesAutomatic Transmission Fluid (ATF) is an engineeredproduct and its performance may be impaired by supple-mental additives. Therefore, do not add any fluid addi-tives to the transaxle. The only exception to this policy is


the use of special dyes to aid in detecting fluid leaks. Inaddition, avoid using transaxle sealers as they mayadversely affect seals.

CAUTION!

Do not use chemical flushes in your transmission asthe chemicals can damage your transmission compo-nents. Such damage is not covered by the NewVehicle Limited Warranty.

Appearance Care and Protection from Corrosion

Protection of Body and Paint from CorrosionVehicle body care requirements vary according to geo-graphic locations and usage. Chemicals that make roadspassable in snow and ice, and those that are sprayed ontrees and road surfaces during other seasons, are highlycorrosive to the metal in your vehicle. Outside parking,which exposes your vehicle to airborne contaminants,

road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated, extremehot or cold weather and other extreme conditions willhave an adverse effect on paint, metal trim, and under-body protection.

The following maintenance recommendations will enableyou to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosionresistance built into your vehicle.

What Causes Corrosion?Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal ofpaint and protective coatings from your vehicle.

The most common causes are:

• Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation

• Stone and gravel impact

• Insects, tree sap and tar

• Salt in the air near seacoast localities

• Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants

7


Washing

• Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your ve-hicle in the shade using MOPAR� Car Wash or equiva-lent, or a mild car wash soap, and rinse the panelscompletely with clear water.

• If insects, tar or other similar deposits have accumu-lated on your vehicle, use MOPAR� Super Kleen Bugand Tar Remover or equivalent to remove.

• Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as MOPAR�Cleaner Wax or equivalent to remove road film, stainsand to protect your paint finish. Take care never toscratch the paint.

• Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffingthat may diminish the gloss or thin out the paintfinish.

CAUTION!

Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials suchas steel wool or scouring powder, which will scratchmetal and painted surfaces.

Special Care

• If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drivenear the ocean, hose off the undercarriage at least oncea month.

• It is important that the drain holes in the lower edgesof the doors and rocker panels be kept clear and open.

• If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint,touch them up immediately. The cost of such repairs isconsidered the responsibility of the owner.

• If your vehicle is damaged due to an accident orsimilar cause which destroys the paint and protective


coating, have your vehicle repaired as soon as pos-sible. The cost of such repairs is considered the respon-sibility of the owner.

• If you carry special cargo such as chemicals, fertilizers,de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such materials are wellpackaged and sealed.

• If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads, considermud or stone shields behind each wheel.

• Use MOPAR� Touch Up Paint or equivalent onscratches as soon as possible. Your authorized dealerhas touch up paint to match the color of your vehicle.

Wheel and Wheel Trim CareAll wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum andchrome-plated wheels, should be cleaned regularly witha mild soap and water to prevent corrosion. To removeheavy soil and/or excessive brake dust, use MOPAR�Wheel Cleaner or equivalent or select a nonabrasive,

non-acidic cleaner. Do not use scouring pads, steel wool,a bristle brush, or metal polishes. Only MOPAR� orequivalent is recommended. Do not use oven cleaner.Avoid automatic car washes that use acidic solutions orharsh brushes that may damage the wheels protectivefinish.

Stain Repel Fabric Cleaning Procedure — IfEquippedStain Repel seats may be cleaned in the following man-ner:

• Remove as much of the stain as possible by blottingwith a clean, dry towel.

• Blot any remaining stain with a clean, damp towel.

• For tough stains, apply MOPAR� Total Clean orequivalent, or a mild soap solution to a clean, dampcloth and remove the stain. Use a fresh, damp towel toremove soap residue.

7


• For grease stains, apply MOPAR� Multi-PurposeCleaner or a equivalent high quality cleaner to a clean,damp cloth and remove the stain. Use a fresh, damptowel to remove soap residue.

• Do not use any harsh solvents or any other form ofprotectants on Stain Repel products.

Interior Care

Instrument Panel SurfacesThe instrument panel cover has a low glare surface,which minimizes reflections in the windshield. Do notuse protectants or other products which may causeundesirable reflections. Use soap and warm water torestore the low glare surface.

Cleaning Interior TrimInterior trim should be cleaned starting with a dampcloth, a damp cloth with MOPAR� Total Clean or equiva-lent, then MOPAR� Spot & Stain Remover or equivalent

if absolutely necessary. Do not use harsh cleaners orArmorall. Use MOPAR� Total Clean or equivalent toclean vinyl upholstery

Cleaning Leather UpholsteryMOPAR� Total Clean or equivalent is specifically recom-mended for leather upholstery.

Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regularcleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small particles of dirtcan act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholsteryand should be removed promptly with a damp cloth.Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft clothand MOPAR� Total Clean or equivalent. Care should betaken to avoid soaking your leather upholstery with anyliquid. Please do not use polishes, oils, cleaning fluids,solvents, detergents, or ammonia-based cleaners to cleanyour leather upholstery. Application of a leather condi-tioner is not required to maintain the original condition.


WARNING!

Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes.Many are potentially flammable, and if used inclosed areas they may cause respiratory harm.

Cleaning HeadlightsYour vehicle has plastic headlights that are lightweightand less susceptible to stone breakage than glass head-lights.

Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and thereforedifferent lens cleaning procedures must be followed.

To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses andreducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry cloth. Toremove road dirt, wash with a mild soap solution fol-lowed by rinsing.

Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents, steelwool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses.

Glass SurfacesAll glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basiswith MOPAR� Glass Cleaner or equivalent or any com-mercial household-type glass cleaner. Never use an abra-sive type cleaner. Use caution when cleaning the insiderear window equipped with electric defrosters or theright rear quarter window equipped with the radioantenna. Do not use scrapers or other sharp instrumentsthat may scratch the elements.

When cleaning the rearview mirror, spray cleaner on thetowel or rag that you are using. Do not spray cleanerdirectly on the mirror.

Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster LensesThe lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle aremolded in clear plastic. When cleaning the lenses, caremust be taken to avoid scratching the plastic.

7


1. Clean with a wet soft rag. A mild soap solution may beused, but do not use high alcohol content or abrasivecleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean with a clean damprag.

2. Dry with a soft tissue.

Seat Belt MaintenanceDo not bleach, dye or clean the seat belts with chemicalsolvents or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the fabric.Sun damage can also weaken the fabric.

If the seat belts need cleaning, use a mild soap solution orlukewarm water. Do not remove the belts from the car towash them.

Replace the seat belts if they appear frayed or worn, or ifthe buckles do not work properly.

Cleaning the Instrument Panel Cupholders

RemovalPull the flexible liner from the cupholder drawer startingat one edge to ease removal.

CleaningThe liner is top shelf dishwasher safe, or you may followthe cleaning procedure below.

Soak the liner in a mixture of medium hot tap water andone teaspoon of mild liquid dish soap. Let soak forapproximately 30 minutes. After 30 minutes, pull theliner from the water and dip it back into the water aboutsix times. This will loosen any remaining debris. Rinsethe liner thoroughly under warm running water. Shakethe excess water from the liner and dry the outer surfaceswith a clean soft cloth.


InstallationPlace the liner into the cupholder drawer and press theliner into place so that the retention tabs seat into thecorresponding openings in the drawer.

FUSES

Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM)The Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) is locatedin the engine compartment near the battery. Refer to theapplicable “Engine Compartment” illustration in thissection. This center contains cartridge fuses and mini-fuses. A label that identifies each component may beprinted or embossed on the inside of the cover.

CAUTION!

• When installing the Totally Integrated PowerModule cover, it is important to ensure the cover isproperly positioned and fully latched. Failure todo so may allow water to get into the IntegratedPower Module, and possibly result in a electricalsystem failure.

• When replacing a blown fuse, it is important touse only a fuse having the correct amperage rating.The use of a fuse with a rating other than indicatedmay result in a dangerous electrical system over-load. If a properly rated fuse continues to blow, itindicates a problem in the circuit that must becorrected.

7


The numbers inside the TIPM cover correspond to thefollowing table.

FUSES/TIPM

Cavity CartridgeFuse

Mini-Fuse Description

J1 40 AmpGreen

— Power Folding Seat

J2 30 AmpPink

— Power LiftgateModule

J3 30 AmpPink

— Rear Door Module(RR Door Node)

J4 25 AmpNatural

— Driver Door Node

J5 25 AmpNatural

— Passenger Door Node

J6 40 AmpGreen

— Anti-Lock Brake Sys-tem (ABS) Pump/ESP

FUSES/TIPM



J7 30 AmpPink

— Anti-Lock Brake Sys-tem (ABS) Valve/ESP

J8 40 AmpGreen

— Power Memory Seat(If Equipped)

J9 40 AmpGreen

— PZEV Motor/FlexFuel

J10 30 AmpPink

— Headlamp WashRelay/ManifoldTuning Valve

J11 30 AmpPink

— Power Sliding DoorModule/ThatchumRelay Lock Feed

J13 60 AmpYellow

— Ignition Off Draw(IOD) — Main

J14 40 AmpGreen

— Rear WindowDefogger


FUSES/TIPM



J15 30 AmpPink

— Rear Blower

J17 40 AmpGreen

— Starter Solenoid

J18 20 AmpBlue

— Powertrain ControlModule (PCM) TransRange

J19 60 AmpYellow

— Radiator Fan

J20 30 AmpPink

— Front Wiper LO/HI

J21 20 AmpBlue

— Front/Rear Washer

J22 25 AmpNatural

— Sunroof Module

FUSES/TIPM



M1 — 15 AmpBlue

Center High MountedStop Light (CHMSL)/Brake Switch

M2 — — —M3 — 20 Amp

YellowSpare Fuse

M4 — 10 AmpRed

Trailer Tow

M5 — 25 AmpNatural

Inverter

M6 — 20 AmpYellow

Power Outlet #1(ACC), Rain Sensor

M7 — 20 AmpYellow

Power Outlet #2(BATT/ACC SELECT)

7


FUSES/TIPM



M8 — 20 AmpYellow

Front Heated Seat(If Equipped)

M9 — 20 AmpYellow

Rear Heated Seat(If Equipped)

M10 — 15 AmpBlue

Ignition Off Draw —Vehicle EntertainmentSystem (IOD-VES),Satellite Digital AudioReceiver (SDARS),DVD, Hands-FreeModule (HFM), Uni-versal Garage DoorOpener (UGDO),Vanity Lamp(VANITY LP), Stream-ing Video Module

FUSES/TIPM



M11 — 10 AmpRed

(Ignition Off Draw)IOD-HVAC/ATC

M12 — 30 AmpGreen

Amplifier (AMP)/Radio

M13 — 20 AmpYellow

Ignition Off Draw—Cabin CompartmentNode (IOD-CCN),SIREN, Clock Module(CLK MOD),Multi-FunctionControl Switch(MULTIFCTN SW)/ITM


FUSES/TIPM




Spare Fuse


Rear View Mirror(RR VW MIR), CabinCompartment Node(CCN), Multi-Function ControlSwitch (MULTIFTCNSW), Tire PressureMonitor (TPM), GlowPlug Module (GLWPLG MOD) — ExportDiesel Only, Assy-Shifter (Hall Effect),Acoustic NoiseCancellation (ANC)

FUSES/TIPM



M16 — 10 AmpRed

Occupant RestraintController/OccupantClassification Module(ORC/OCM)

M17 — 15 AmpBlue

Left Tail/License/Park Lamp (LT-TAIL/LIC/PRK LMP), Run-ning Lamps

M18 — 15 AmpBlue

Right Tail/Park/RunLamp (RT-TAIL/PRK/RUN LMP)


Auto Shut Down(ASD #1 and #2)

7


FUSES/TIPM



M20 — 15 AmpBlue

Cabin CompartmentNode Interior Light(CCN INT LIGHT),Switch Bank (SWBANK), Steering Con-trol Module (SCM),Switch Steering Wheel


Auto Shut Down(ASD #3)

M22 — 10 AmpRed

Right Horn(RT HORN (HI/LOW)

M23 — 10 AmpRed

Left Horn (LT HORN(HI/LOW)


Rear Wiper(REAR WIPER)

FUSES/TIPM




Fuel Pump (FUELPUMP), Diesel LiftPump (DSL LIFTPUMP) — ExportOnly

M26 — 10 AmpRed

Power Mirror Switch(PWR MIRR SW),Driver WindowSwitch(DRVR WIND SW)

M27 — 10 AmpRed

Ignition Switch (IGNSW), Window Module(WIN MOD), PEM,Steering Column Lock


FUSES/TIPM



M28 — 10 AmpRed

Next Generation Con-troller (NGC), PCM,Transmission Feed(TRANS FEED), TCM

M29 — 10 AmpRed

Occupant Classifica-tion Module (OCM)

M30 — 15 AmpBlue

Rear Wiper Module(RR WIPER MOD),Power Folding Mirror(PWR FOLD MIR),J1962 Diagnostic Feed

FUSES/TIPM




Back-Up Lamps(B/U LAMPS)

M32 — 10 AmpRed

Occupant RestraintController (ORC), TTEUROPE

M33 — 10 AmpRed

Next Generation Con-troller (NGC), GlobalPowertrain EngineController (GPEC),TCM

7


FUSES/TIPM



M34 — 10 AmpRed

Park Assist (PRKASST), Heater Ventila-tion, Air ConditioningModule (HVACMOD), HeadlampWash (HDLP WASH),Compass (COMPAS),IR Sensor, RearCamera, Lamp DoorFT Drv/Pass, LampFlashlight, AHLM,Relay Diesel CabinHeater, Rad FanDiesel

M35 — 10 AmpRed

Heated Mirrors

FUSES/TIPM




Power Outlet #3(BATT)

M37 — 10 AmpRed

Anti-Lock Brake Sys-tem (ABS), ElectronicStability Program(ESP), Stop LampSwitch (STP LP SW),Fuel Pump Rly HiControl


Door Lock/UnlockMotors (LOCK/UNLOCK MTRS),Liftgate Lock/UnlockMotors

The heated mirrors, lower instrument panel power outletand removable floor console, when in the front position


are fused with self-resetting fuses that are only service-able by an authorized dealer. The power seats are fusedby a 30 Amp circuit breaker located under the driver’sseat. The power windows are fused by a 25 Amp circuitbreaker located under the instrument panel near thesteering column. If you experience temporary or perma-nent loss of these systems, see your authorized dealer forservice.

VEHICLE STORAGEIf you are leaving your vehicle dormant for more than21 days, you may want to take steps to protect yourbattery. You may do the following:

• Remove the 20 Amp mini-fuse in the Totally Inte-grated Power Module (TIPM) labeled Ignition-OffDraw (IOD).

• Or, disconnect the negative cable from the battery.

• Anytime you store your vehicle, or keep it out ofservice for two weeks or more, run the air conditioningsystem at idle for about five minutes in the fresh airand high blower setting. This will ensure adequatesystem lubrication to minimize the possibility of com-pressor damage when the system is started again.

REPLACEMENT BULBS

LIGHT BULBS — Interior Bulb NumberCenter & Rear Dome Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 578Center & Rear Reading Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 578Front Door Courtesy Lamp. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 578Front Header Reading Lamps — If Equipped . . . . . 578Instrument Cluster Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PC74Liftgate Lamp(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 578Overhead Console Reading Lamps . . . . . . . . . . PC579Removable Console Lamp — If Equipped . . . . . . . 194Visor Vanity Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6501966

7


NOTE: For lighted switches, see your authorized dealerfor replacement instructions.

All of the interior bulbs are glass wedge base or glasscartridge types. Aluminum base bulbs are not approvedand should not be used for replacement.

LIGHT BULBS — Exterior Bulb NumberBackup, Tail, Stop Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3157Center High-Mounted Stop Lamp . . . LED (See Note 1)Fog Lamp — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PSX24WPark/Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . PY27 / 7W or 3757AFront Side Marker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . W5WHeadlamp — (Low and High Beam Halogen) . . . . H11Headlamp (HID — If Equipped) Low Beam . . . . . D1SLicense . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168

Note 1: The Center High-Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL)uses LED lamps that are not serviceable separately. TheCHMSL must be replaced as an assembly, see yourauthorized dealer.

BULB REPLACEMENT

High Intensity Discharge Headlamps (HID) — IfEquippedThe headlamps are a type of high voltage discharge tube.High voltage can remain in the circuit even with theheadlamp switch off and the key removed. Because ofthis, you should not attempt to service a headlamp bulbyourself. If a headlamp bulb fails, take your vehicle toan authorized dealer for service.


WARNING!

A transient high voltage occurs at the bulb sockets ofHigh Intensity Discharge (HID) headlamps when theheadlamp switch is turned ON. It may cause seriouselectrical shock or electrocution if not serviced prop-erly. See your authorized dealer for service.

NOTE: On vehicles equipped with High Intensity Dis-charge (HID) headlamps, when the headlamps areturned on, there is a blue hue to the lamps. This dimin-ishes and becomes more white after approximately10 seconds, as the system charges.

Quad Headlamps

1. Raise the hood to access the high or low beam bulbs atthe rear of the headlamp housing.

2. Release the two tabs on the side of the connector andremove the connector from the bulb.

3. Twist the headlamp bulb and pull the bulb from theheadlamp housing.

4. Install the new headlamp bulb and twist until lockedinto the headlamp housing.

CAUTION!

Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oilcontamination will severely shorten bulb life. If thebulb comes in contact with an oily surface, clean thebulb with rubbing alcohol.

5. Reconnect the wiring connector to the bulb.

Front Park/Turn Signal Lamp

1. Raise the hood to access the rear of the headlamphousing.

2. Twist the turn signal socket and remove from theheadlamp housing, then pull the bulb out.

7


3. Push the new bulb into the socket and reinstall thesocket by twisting until locked into the headlamphousing.

Front Side Marker Lamp

1. Raise the hood to access the rear of the headlamphousing.

NOTE: Access is somewhat limited. You may have toremove the inner fender well or remove the headlamphousing for bulb replacement.

2. Twist the socket and remove from the headlamphousing, then pull the bulb out.

3. Push the new bulb into the socket and reinstall thesocket by twisting until locked into the headlamphousing.

Fog Lamp

NOTE: Access to the fog lamp bulb is from the rear ofthe fascia. On the left rear side of the fascia, remove thepush pin and lower the hinged access door on the airdam.

1. From behind the bumper fascia, or the access panel onthe air dam, twist the bulb counterclockwise, and removebulb.

CAUTION!

Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oilcontamination will severely shorten bulb life. If thebulb comes in contact with an oily surface, clean thebulb with rubbing alcohol.

2. Disconnect wire harness from the bulb.


3. Reconnect the wiring harness to the new bulb andreinstall the bulb by twisting clockwise.

Rear Tail, Stop, Turn Signal, Side Marker andBackup Lamp

1. Raise the liftgate.

2. Remove the tail lamp assembly by removing the twoscrews from the inboard side. Use a fiber stick or similartool to gently pry the light on the outboard side todisengage the two ball studs.

NOTE:• If a screwdriver is used, make sure a soft material is

placed between the vehicle body and tool so not toscratch the paint.

Tail Lamp Housing Fastener Removal7


• The PRY location is best closest to the studs whiledislodging them separately.

3. Twist the socket and remove it from the lamp assembly.

4. Pull the bulb to remove it from the socket.

5. Replace the bulb, reinstall the socket, and reattach thelamp assembly.

Center High-Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL)The CHMSL uses LED lamps that are not serviceableseparately. The CHMSL must be replaced as an assembly,see your authorized dealer.

License LampThe license plate lamp is located under the tailgate lightbar and above the license plate.

1. Using a small screwdriver, press inward the lockingtab on the outboard side of the lamp assembly and pulldown on the lamp assembly for removal.

2. Twist and remove the socket from the lamp assemblyand pull the bulb out to remove.

3. Push the bulb into the socket, twist the socket into thelamp assembly and reinstall the lamp assembly into placeensuring the locking tab is secure.

Bulb Location

1 — Stop, Tail, Turn Signal Bulb Combo2 — Backup Bulb


FLUIDS AND CAPACITIES

U.S. MetricFuel (Approximate) 20 Gallons 76 LitersEngine Oil with Filter3.3L and 3.8L Engine (SAE 5W-20, API Certified) 5 Quarts 4.7 Liters4.0L Engine (SAE 10W-30, API Certified) 5.5 Quarts 5.2 LitersCooling System *3.3L, 3.8L, and 4.0L Engine (MOPAR� Engine Coolant/Antifreeze 5 Year/100,000 Mile Formula or equivalent)

13.4 Quarts 12.6 Liters

* Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level. Add 2.9 Qts (2.8 L) if equipped with a rearheater.

7


FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE PARTS

Engine

Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part

Engine Coolant MOPAR� Antifreeze/Coolant Five Year/100,000 Mile Formula HOAT(Hybrid Organic Additive Technology) or equivalent.

Engine Oil (3.3L and 3.8L Engines)Use API Certified SAE 5W-20 Engine Oil, meeting the requirementsof Chrysler Material Standard MS-6395. Refer to your oil filler cap forcorrect SAE grade.

Engine Oil (4.0L Engine)Use API Certified SAE 10W-30 Engine Oil, meeting the requirementsof Chrysler Material Standard MS-6395. Refer to your oil filler cap forcorrect SAE grade.

Engine Oil Filter MOPAR� Engine Oil Filter or equivalent.Spark Plugs (3.3L and 3.8L Engines) RE14PLP5 (Gap 0.050 in [1.27 mm])Spark Plugs (4.0L Engine) ZFR5LP-13G (Gap 0.050 in [1.27 mm])Fuel Selection (3.3L and 3.8L Engines) 87 OctaneFuel Selection (4.0L Engine) 87 Octane Acceptable — 89 Recommended


Chassis

Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine PartAutomatic Transaxle MOPAR� ATF+4 Automatic Transmission Fluid or equivalent.

Brake Master CylinderMOPAR� DOT 3 and SAE J1703 should be used or equivalent. IfDOT 3 brake fluid is not available, then DOT 4 is acceptable. Useonly recommended brake fluids.

Power Steering Reservoir MOPAR� Power Steering Fluid +4, MOPAR� ATF+4 Automatic Trans-mission Fluid or equivalent.

7


MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES

CONTENTS

� Emissions Control System Maintenance . . . . . . 466

� Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 466

▫ Required Maintenance Intervals . . . . . . . . . . 468

8

MAINTENANCE

SCHEDULES

EMISSIONS CONTROL SYSTEM MAINTENANCEThe Scheduled Maintenance services listed in bold typemust be done at the times or mileages specified to ensurethe continued proper functioning of the emissions controlsystem. These and all other maintenance services in-cluded in this manual, should be done to provide bestvehicle performance and reliability. More frequent main-tenance may be needed for vehicles in severe operatingconditions, such as dusty areas and very short tripdriving.

Inspection and service should also be done anytime amalfunction is suspected.

NOTE: Maintenance, replacement or repair of the emis-sions control devices and systems on your vehicle may beperformed by any automotive repair establishment orindividual using any automotive part that has beencertified pursuant to U.S. EPA or in the State of Califor-nia, California Air Resources Board regulations.

MAINTENANCE SCHEDULEThe oil change indicator system will remind you that it istime to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.

On Non-EVIC equipped vehicles, CHAngE OIL willflash in the instrument cluster odometer and a singlechime will sound, indicating that an oil change is neces-sary.

On Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) equippedvehicles, Oil Change Required will be displayed in theEVIC and a single chime will sound, indicating that an oilchange is necessary.

Based on engine operation conditions, the oil changeindicator message will illuminate. This means that ser-vice is required for your vehicle. Have your vehicleserviced as soon as possible, within the next 500 miles(805 km).

8

MAINTENANCE

SCHEDULES

466 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES

NOTE:• The oil change indicator message will not monitor the

time since the last oil change. Change your vehicle’soil if it has been six months since your last oil change,even if the oil change indicator message is NOTilluminated.

• Change your engine oil more often if you drive yourvehicle off-road for an extended period of time.

• Under no circumstances should oil change intervalsexceed 6,000 miles (10 000 km) or six months, which-ever comes first.

Your authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicatormessage after completing the scheduled oil change. If thisscheduled oil change is performed by someone other

than your dealer, the message can be reset by referring tothe steps described under “Oil Change Required” in “UseFactory Settings” of the EVIC section in this manual orunder “Odometer/Trip Odometer” in the “InstrumentCluster Descriptions section of this manual.

At Each Stop For Fuel

• Check the engine oil level about five minutes after afully warmed engine is shut OFF. Checking the oillevel while the vehicle is on level ground will improvethe accuracy of the oil level reading. Add oil onlywhen the level is at or below the ADD, SAFE or MINmark.

• Check the windshield washer solvent and add ifrequired. 8

MAINTENANCE

SCHEDULES

MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 467

Once A Month

• Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear ordamage.

• Inspect the battery and clean and tighten the terminalsas required.

• Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir, thebrake master cylinder, the power steering and thetransaxle and add as needed.

• Check all lights and other electrical items for correctoperation.

At Each Oil Change

• Change the engine oil filter.

• Inspect the brake hoses and lines.

CAUTION!

Failure to perform the required maintenance itemsmay result in damage to the vehicle.

Required Maintenance IntervalsRefer to the Maintenance Schedules on the followingpages for the required maintenance intervals.

8

MAINTENANCE

SCHEDULES


6,000 Miles (10,000 km) or6 Months Maintenance ServiceSchedule❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil

filter.❏ Rotate tires.

Odometer Reading Date

Repair Order # Dealer Code

Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer

12,000 Miles (20,000 km) or 12 Months Maintenance ServiceSchedule❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.❏ Rotate tires.❏ If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the

engine air cleaner filter, replace if necessary.❏ Replace the air conditioning filter.❏ Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary.❏ Inspect the CV Joints. Perform the first inspection at 12,000 miles (20 000 km) or

12 months.❏ Inspect the exhaust system. Perform the first inspection at 12,000 miles (20 000 km) or

12 months.❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for

damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.




8

MAINTENANCE

SCHEDULES


18,000 Miles (30,000 km) or18 Months MaintenanceService Schedule❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil






engine air cleaner filter, replace if necessary.❏ Replace the air conditioning filter.❏ Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary.❏ Inspect the CV Joints.❏ Inspect the exhaust system.❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for





8

MAINTENANCE

SCHEDULES



filter.❏ Rotate tires.❏ Replace the engine air cleaner filter.





engine air cleaner filter, replace if necessary.❏ Replace the air conditioning filter.❏ Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary.❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for





8

MAINTENANCE

SCHEDULES













8

MAINTENANCE

SCHEDULES







60,000 Miles (100,000 km) or 60 Months Maintenance ServiceSchedule❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.❏ Rotate tires.❏ Replace the engine air cleaner filter.❏ Replace the air conditioning filter.❏ Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary.❏ Change the automatic transaxle fluid & filter if using your vehicle for any of the following:

police, taxi, fleet or frequent trailer towing.❏ Flush and replace the engine coolant at 60 months if not done at 102,000 miles

(170 000 km).❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for





8

MAINTENANCE

SCHEDULES













8

MAINTENANCE

SCHEDULES



filter.❏ Rotate tires.❏ Replace the engine air cleaner filter.❏ Inspect and replace the PCV Valve if

necessary.†










8

MAINTENANCE

SCHEDULES



filter.❏ Rotate tires.❏ Replace the ignition cables (3.3L and

3.8L engines).❏ Replace the spark plugs (3.3L, 3.8L,

and 4.0L engines).❏ Replace the timing belt (4.0L engine).❏ Flush and replace the engine coolant if

not done at 60 months.










8

MAINTENANCE

SCHEDULES







120,000 Miles (200,000 km) or 120 Months Maintenance ServiceSchedule❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.❏ Rotate tires.❏ Replace the engine air cleaner filter.❏ Replace the air conditioning filter.❏ Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary.❏ Inspect the CV Joints.❏ Inspect the exhaust system.❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for

damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.❏ Replace accessory drive belt(s).❏ Change the automatic transaxle fluid & filter.




8

MAINTENANCE

SCHEDULES













8

MAINTENANCE

SCHEDULES


138,000 Miles (230,000 km) or 138 Months Maintenance ServiceSchedule❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.❏ Rotate tires.




8

MAINTENANCE

SCHEDULES









filter.❏ Rotate tires.❏ Replace the engine air cleaner filter.




8

MAINTENANCE

SCHEDULES


† This maintenance is recommended by the manufac-turer, but is not required to maintain emissions warranty.

WARNING!

• You can be badly injured working on or around amotor vehicle. Do only service work for which youhave the knowledge and the right equipment. Ifyou have any doubt about your ability to performa service job, take your vehicle to a competentmechanic.

• Failure to properly inspect and maintain yourvehicle could result in a component malfunctionand effect vehicle handling and performance. Thiscould cause an accident

8

MAINTENANCE

SCHEDULES


IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE

CONTENTS

� Suggestions For Obtaining Service For YourVehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 485

▫ Prepare For The Appointment . . . . . . . . . . . 485

▫ Prepare A List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 485

▫ Be Reasonable With Requests . . . . . . . . . . . . 485

� If You Need Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 485

▫ Chrysler Group LLC Customer Center . . . . . 486

▫ Chrysler Canada Inc. Customer Center . . . . . 486

▫ In Mexico Contact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 486

▫ Customer Assistance For The Hearing OrSpeech Impaired (TDD/TTY) . . . . . . . . . . . . 487

▫ Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 487

� Warranty Information (U.S. Vehicles Only) . . . . 488

� MOPAR� Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 488

� Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 488

▫ In The 50 United States AndWashington, D.C. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 488

▫ In Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 489 9

� Publication Order Forms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 489

� Department Of Transportation Uniform TireQuality Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 491

▫ Treadwear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 491

▫ Traction Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 491

▫ Temperature Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 492

484 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE

SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FORYOUR VEHICLE

Prepare For The AppointmentIf you’re having warranty work done, be sure to have theright papers with you. Take your warranty folder. Allwork to be performed may not be covered by thewarranty. Discuss additional charges with the servicemanager. Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle’sservice history. This can often provide a clue to thecurrent problem.

Prepare A ListMake a written list of your vehicle’s problems or thespecific work you want done. If you’ve had an accidentor work done that is not on your maintenance log, let theservice advisor know.

Be Reasonable With RequestsIf you list a number of items and you must have yourvehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation with

the service advisor and list the items in order of priority.At many authorized dealers, you may obtain a rentalvehicle at a minimal daily charge. If you need a rental, itis advisable to make these arrangements when you callfor an appointment.

IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCEThe manufacturer and its authorized dealers are vitallyinterested in your satisfaction. We want you to be happywith our products and services.

Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer.We strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to anauthorized dealer. They know your vehicle the best, andare most concerned that you get prompt and high qualityservice. The manufacturer’s authorized dealers have thefacilities, factory-trained technicians, special tools, andthe latest information to ensure the vehicle is fixedcorrectly and in a timely manner. 9

IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 485

This is why you should always talk to an authorizeddealer’s service manager first. Most matters can be re-solved with this process.

• If for some reason you are still not satisfied, talk to thegeneral manager or owner of the authorized dealer-ship. They want to know if you need assistance.

• If an authorized dealership is unable to resolve theconcern, you may contact the manufacturer’s customercenter.

Any communication to the manufacturer’s customer cen-ter should include the following information:

• Owner’s name and address

• Owner’s telephone number (home and office)

• Authorized dealership name

• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)

• Vehicle delivery date and mileage

Chrysler Group LLC Customer CenterP.O. Box 21–8004Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004Phone: (800) 992-1997

Chrysler Canada Inc. Customer CenterP.O. Box 1621Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6Phone: (800) 465–2001

In Mexico contact:Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240Sante Fe C.P. 05109Mexico, D. F.In Mexico City: 5081-7568Outside Mexico City: 1-800-505-1300


Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or SpeechImpaired (TDD/TTY)To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, themanufacturer has installed special TDD (Telecommuni-cation Devices for the Deaf) equipment at its customercenter. Any hearing or speech impaired customer, whohas access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter(TTY) in the United States, can communicate with themanufacturer by dialing 1–800–380–CHRY.Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that requireassistance can use the special needs relay service offeredby Bell Canada. For TTY teletypewriter users, dial 711and for Voice callers, dial 1 800 855-0511 to connect witha Bell Relay Service operator.

Service ContractYou may have purchased a service contract for a vehicleto help protect you from the high cost of unexpectedrepairs after the manufacturer’s New Vehicle LimitedWarranty expires. The manufacturer stands behind only

the manufacturer’s service contracts. If you purchased amanufacturer’s service contract, you will receive PlanProvisions and an Owner Identification Card in the mailwithin three weeks of the vehicle delivery date. If youhave any questions about the service contract, call themanufacturer’s Service Contract National Customer Hot-line at 1-800-521-9922.

The manufacturer will not stand behind any servicecontract that is not the manufacturer’s service contract. Itis not responsible for any service contract other than themanufacturer’s service contract. If you purchased a ser-vice contract that is not a manufacturer’s service contract,and you require service after the manufacturer’s NewVehicle Limited Warranty expires, please refer to thecontract documents, and contact the person listed inthose documents.

We appreciate that you have made a major investmentwhen you purchased the vehicle. An authorized dealer

9


has also made a major investment in facilities, tools, andtraining to assure that you are absolutely delighted withthe ownership experience. You’ll be pleased with theirsincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or relatedconcerns.

WARNING!

Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and certainvehicle components contain, or emit, chemicalsknown to the State of California to cause cancer andbirth defects, or other reproductive harm. In addi-tion, certain fluids contained in vehicles and certainproducts of component wear contain, or emit, chemi-cals known to the State of California to cause cancerand birth defects, or other reproductive harm.

WARRANTY INFORMATION (U.S. Vehicles Only)See the Warranty Information Booklet, located on theDVD, for the terms and provisions of Chrysler GroupLLC warranties applicable to this vehicle.

MOPAR� PARTSMOPAR� fluids, lubricants, parts, and accessories areavailable from an authorized dealer. They are recom-mended for your vehicle in order to help keep the vehicleoperating at its best.

REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS

In the 50 United States and Washington, D.C.If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that couldcause a crash or cause injury or death, you shouldimmediately inform the National Highway Traffic SafetyAdministration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying themanufacturer.


If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open aninvestigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists ina group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedycampaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved inindividual problems between you, your authorizeddealer, and the manufacturer.

To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto SafetyHotline toll free at 1–888–327–4236 (TTY: 1–800–424–9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to:Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE.,West Building, Washington, D.C. 20590. You can alsoobtain other information about motor vehicle safety fromhttp://www.safercar.gov.

In CanadaIf you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect, youshould contact the Customer Service Department imme-diately. Canadian customers who wish to report a safetydefect to the Canadian government should write to:

Transport Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect Investigationsand Recalls, 2780 Sheffield Road, Ottawa, Ontario K1B3V9.

PUBLICATION ORDER FORMSTo order the following manuals, you may use either thewebsite or the phone numbers listed below. Visa, Mas-tercard, American Express, and Discover orders are ac-cepted. If you prefer mailing your payment, please callfor an order form.

NOTE: A street address is required when orderingmanuals (no P.O. Boxes).

• Service Manuals

These comprehensive Service Manuals provide the in-formation that students and professional techniciansneed in diagnosing/troubleshooting, problem solving,maintaining, servicing, and repairing Chrysler GroupLLC vehicles. A complete working knowledge of the

9


vehicle, system, and/or components is written instraightforward language with illustrations, diagrams,and charts.

• Diagnostic Procedure Manuals

Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with dia-grams, charts and detailed illustrations. These practi-cal manuals make it easy for students and techniciansto find and fix problems on computer-controlled ve-hicle systems and features. They show exactly how tofind and correct problems the first time, using step-by-step troubleshooting and drivability procedures,proven diagnostic tests and a complete list of all toolsand equipment.

• Owner’s Manuals

These Owner’s Manuals have been prepared with theassistance of service and engineering specialists to

acquaint you with specific Chrysler Group LLC ve-hicles. Included are starting, operating, emergencyand maintenance procedures as well as specifications,capabilities and safety tips.

Call toll free at:

• 1–800–890–4038 (U.S.)

• 1–800–387–1143 (Canada)

Or

Visit us on the Worldwide Web at:

• www.techauthority.com


DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORMTIRE QUALITY GRADESThe following tire grading categories were established bythe National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. Thespecific grade rating assigned by the tire’s manufacturerin each category is shown on the sidewall of the tires onyour vehicle.

All passenger car tires must conform to Federal safetyrequirements in addition to these grades.

TreadwearThe Treadwear grade is a comparative rating, based onthe wear rate of the tire when tested under controlledconditions on a specified government test course. Forexample, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-halftimes as well on the government course as a tire graded100. The relative performance of tires depends upon theactual conditions of their use, however, and may depart

significantly from the norm due to variations in drivinghabits, service practices, and differences in road charac-teristics and climate.

Traction GradesThe Traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B,and C. These grades represent the tire’s ability to stop onwet pavement, as measured under controlled conditionson specified government test surfaces of asphalt andconcrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction perfor-mance.

WARNING!

The traction grade assigned to this tire is based onstraight-ahead braking traction tests, and does notinclude acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, orpeak traction characteristics.

9


Temperature GradesThe temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heatand its ability to dissipate heat, when tested undercontrolled conditions on a specified indoor laboratorytest wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause thematerial of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, andexcessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. Thegrade C corresponds to a level of performance, which allpassenger car tires must meet under the Federal MotorVehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A repre-sent higher levels of performance on the laboratory testwheel, than the minimum required by law.

WARNING!

The temperature grade for this tire is established fora tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded.Excessive speed, under-inflation, or excessive load-ing, either separately or in combination, can causeheat buildup and possible tire failure.


INDEX

10

Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . 433Adding Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369Adding Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430Additives, Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364Adjustable Pedals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner Filter) . . . 422Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287Air Conditioning Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287Air Conditioning Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306,428Air Conditioning, Operating Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . 306Air Conditioning, Rear Zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292,301Air Conditioning Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426Air Conditioning System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287,295,426Air Conditioning System, Zone Control . . . . . . . . 291Air Pressure, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65,73Airbag Deployment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74Airbag Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65,71,77,97,227

Airbag Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76Airbag, Side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66,70,72,73Airbag, Window (Side Curtain) . . . . . . . . . . . 67,70,73Alarm Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224Alarm (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16Alterations/Modifications, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7Antenna, Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . . . . 432,433,461

Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434Anti-Lock Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224Anti-Theft System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441Ashtray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196Auto Down Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38Auto Up Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38,189Automatic Dimming Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104Automatic Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33,34Automatic Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) . . . . . . . . . 295

494 INDEX

Automatic Transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314Adding Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439Fluid Level Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439Interlock System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315Selection Of Lubricant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 438,463Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316Special Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440

Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 438,440Adding Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439,440Fluid and Filter Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440Fluid Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440Fluid Level Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439Fluid Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 438,463

Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405Keyless Transmitter Replacement (RKE) . . . . . . . 25Saving Feature (Protection) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154

Belts, Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97Blind Spot Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108Body Mechanism Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429B-Pillar Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339Brake Assist System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330Brake Control System, Electronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329Brake Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 463Brake, Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436

Fluid Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223

Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436Brake/Transmission Interlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315Break-In Recommendations, New Vehicle . . . . . . . . 95Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 456Bulbs, Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98,455

Calibration, Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235,242Camera, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176 10

INDEX 495

Capacities, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 461Caps, Filler

Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369Oil (Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325Radiator (Coolant Pressure) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433

Car Washes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442Carbon Monoxide Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96,365Cargo Compartment

Luggage Carrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209Cargo (Vehicle Loading) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202Caution, Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50,365Cellular Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108,286Center High Mounted Stop Light . . . . . . . . . . . . 460Chains, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350Changing A Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393Chart, Tire Sizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336Check Engine Light(Malfunction Indicator Light) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226,416

Checking Your Vehicle For Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95Checks, Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82,84Child Restraint Tether Anchors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87Child Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44Child Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87Clean Air Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362Cleaning

Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443Climate Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249,250,253,262Coat Hook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202Coin Holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203Cold Weather Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312Compact Disc (CD) Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232,235,241Compass Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235,242Compass Variance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234,242

496 INDEX

Computer, Trip/Travel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240Connector

UCI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) . . . . . . . . . 273

Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203Console, Floor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203Console, Overhead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178Console, Removable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207Contract, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 487Coolant Pressure Cap (Radiator Cap) . . . . . . . . . . 433Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431

Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433Coolant Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 461Coolant Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431,434Disposal of Used Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434Drain, Flush, and Refill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434Points to Remember . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435Pressure Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433

Radiator Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433Selection of Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . 432,461,462

Cruise Control (Speed Control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194,446Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 485

Daytime Running Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154Dealer Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418Defroster, Rear Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208Defroster, Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97,289,299Diagnostic System, Onboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415Dimmer Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150Dipsticks

Automatic Transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439Oil (Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325

Disabled Vehicle Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409

10

INDEX 497

DisposalAntifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422

Domelight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30Door Locks, Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33Door Opener, Garage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181Driving

On Slippery Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321Through Flowing, Rising,or Shallow Standing Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322

DVD Player (Video Entertainment System™) . . . . 282

E-85 Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366Electric Remote Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106Electrical Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190Electronic Brake Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329

Brake Assist System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330Electronic Stability Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331

Electronic Speed Control (Cruise Control) . . . . . . 164Electronic Stability Program (ESP) . . . . . . . . . . . . 331Electronic Vehicle InformationCenter (EVIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176,236Emergency, In Case of

Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393,396Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392

Emission Control System Maintenance . . . . . . 416,466Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413,414

Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422Block Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313Break-In Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95Checking Oil Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413,414Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 462Cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50,96,365

498 INDEX

Flooded, Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361,461Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419,461,462Oil Change Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420Oil Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422Oil Filler Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421Oil Filter Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422Oil Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420,461Oil Synthetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311Temperature Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227

Enhanced Accident Response Feature . . . . . . . . . . 74Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50,96,365,423Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96,423Express Down Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22Extender, Seat Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64Exterior Folding Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106Exterior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98

Fabric Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 444Filler Location Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232Filters

Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306,428Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422,462Engine Oil Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422

FlashersHazard Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98,222

Flash-To-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156Flat Tire Stowage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402Flexible Fuel Vehicles

Cruising Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366,367Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368 10

INDEX 499

Flooded Engine Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312Floor Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203Fluid Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 461Fluid Leaks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98Fluid Level Checks

Automatic Transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325

Fluids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 462Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts . . . . . . . . . . 462Fog Light Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 458Fog Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154,226,458Fold in Floor (Stow �n Go) Seating . . . . . . . . . . . 126Freeing A Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361

Adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364Clean Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362

Filler Cap (Gas Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232,369Filler Door (Gas Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219Octane Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 462Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361,461Tank Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 461

Fuel, Flexible . . . . . . . . . . . . . See Flexible Fuel VehiclesFuel System Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364Fueling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447

Garage Door Opener (HomeLink�) . . . . . . . . . . . 181Gas Cap (Fuel Filler Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . 369,371,415Gasoline, Clean Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362Gasoline (Fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361Gasoline, Reformulated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362

500 INDEX

GaugesCoolant Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226

Gearshift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16,26,360Glass Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445Grocery Bag Retainer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137Gross Axle Weight Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372,375Gross Vehicle Weight Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372,375

Hands-Free Phone (uconnect�) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108Hazard

Driving Through Flowing, Rising,or Shallow Standing Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322

Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151

Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445Lights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156Time Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153

Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107Heated Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287Heater, Engine Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313High Beam/Low Beam Select (Dimmer) Switch . . 156Hitches

Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379HomeLink� (Garage Door Opener) Transmitter . . . 181Hood Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147Hook, Coat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202

Ignition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12,14

Ignition Key Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 10

INDEX 501

Illuminated Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18Immobilizer (Sentry Key) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14Infant Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82,84Information Center, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236Inside Rearview Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219Instrument Panel and Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217Instrument Panel Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 444Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445Integrated Power Module (Fuses) . . . . . . . . . . . . 447Interior Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 444Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149,150Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4

Jack Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394Jack Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405

Key, Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16Key, Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15Key, Sentry (Immobilizer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14Key-In Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14Keyless Entry System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12Knee Bolster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65

Lane Change Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156Lap/Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52LATCH(Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren) . . . . . . . 87Latches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98

Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147Lead Free Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361Leaks, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98Life of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46Light Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98

502 INDEX

Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98,149Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65,71,77,97,227Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224Anti-Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224Automatic Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152Back-Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 459Battery Saver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154Brake Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 455,456Center Mounted Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 460Daytime Running . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154Dimmer Switch, Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150Engine Temperature Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222Exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98Fog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154,226,458Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392Headlight Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151Headlights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153High Beam Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226

High Beam/Low Beam Select . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156Illuminated Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149,150License . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 460Lights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153Low Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine) . . . . . . . . 226Oil Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151,457Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179Rear Servicing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 459Rear Tail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 459Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226Security Alarm (Theft Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 455,456Service Engine Soon (Malfunction Indicator) . . . 226Side Marker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 458,459SmartBeams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156 10

INDEX 503

Theft Alarm (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPMS) . . . . . . . . . . . 220Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98,457,459Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219Warning (Instrument Cluster Description) . . . . . 219

Load Leveling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209Loading Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202,371,373

Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339

LocksDoor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30

Lower Anchors and Tether forCHildren (LATCH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87Lubrication, Body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429Luggage Rack (Roof Rack) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209Lumbar Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120

Maintenance Free Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425Maintenance Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418

Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 466Maintenance, Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190Malfunction Indicator Light (Check Engine) . . 226,416Manual, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 489Map/Reading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179Memory Feature (Memory Seat) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143Memory Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107,143Mini-Trip Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232,240Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104

Automatic Dimming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104Electric Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106Exterior Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143Outside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104Vanity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108

Modifications/Alterations, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7Monitor, Tire Pressure System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352

504 INDEX

Mopar Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417,488Multi-Function Control Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155

Navigation System (uconnect� gps) . . . . . . . . . . . 176New Vehicle Break-In Period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95

Occupant Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50,70,74Occupant Restraints (Sedan) . . . . . . . . . . . 66,67,70,73Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231Oil Change Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230,232,239Oil Change Indicator, Reset . . . . . . . . . . . 230,232,239Oil, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419,462

Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 461Change Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422,462Filter Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422Identification Logo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420

Materials Added to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421Recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420,461Synthetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421Viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421,461

Onboard Diagnostic System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415,416Opener, Garage Door (HomeLink�) . . . . . . . . . . . 181Operator Manual (Owner’s Manual) . . . . . . . . . . . . 4Outside Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104,105Overhead Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178Overhead Travel Information Center . . . . . . . . . . 178Overheating, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228,392Owner’s Manual (Operator Manual) . . . . . . . . . 4,489

Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23Park Sense System, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325Parking On Hill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326Pedals, Adjustable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162Personal Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243 10

INDEX 505

Pets, Transporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91Phone, Cellular . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108Phone, Hands-Free (uconnect�) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108Placard, Tire and Loading Information . . . . . . . . . 339Power

Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32Lift Gate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet) . . . . . . . . . . 190Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121Sliding Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324,325Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36Windows, Express Down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22

Power Steering Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 463Pregnant Women and Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64Preparation for Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395

PretensionersSeat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58

Programmable Electronic Features . . . . . . . . . . . . 243

Radial Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346Radiator Cap (Coolant Pressure Cap) . . . . . . . 431,433Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286Radio Remote Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284Radio, Satellite (uconnect� studios) . . . . . . . . 278,282Rear Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292,301Rear Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176Rear Cross Path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114Rear Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292Rear Park Sense System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167Rear Window Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104Reclining Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118Recreational Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389,410Reminder, Seat Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

506 INDEX

Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19Remote Sound System (Radio) Controls . . . . . . . . 284Remote Starting System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27Removable Floor Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 488Resetting Oil Change Indicator . . . . . . . . . 230,232,239Restraint, Head . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123Restraints, Child . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82,87Restraints, Infant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82Rocking Vehicle When Stuck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408Roof Rack (Luggage Rack) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209Rotation, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351

Safety Checks Inside Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97Safety Checks Outside Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98Safety Defects, Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 488

Safety, Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50,96Safety Information, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334Safety Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95Satellite Radio Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279Satellite Radio (uconnect� studios) . . . . . . . . . 278,282Schedule, Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 466Seat Belt Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50,97

Adjustable Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage . . . . . . . . 57And Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82,84Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64Front Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97Pretensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

10

INDEX 507

Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118Easy Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129Fold in Floor (Stow �n Go) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122Lumbar Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121Reclining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118Stow �n Go (Fold in Floor) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126Tilting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129

Security Alarm (Theft Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16Selection of Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . 432,462Sentry Key (Immobilizer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14Sentry Key Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16Sentry Key Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15Service Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 485Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 487

Service Engine Soon Light(Malfunction Indicator) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226Service Manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 489Setting the Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249,250,253,262Settings, Personal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52Side Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72Signals, Turn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98,155,222,457,459Sirius Backseat TV™ (uconnect� studios) . . . . . . . 282Sliding Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40Slippery Surfaces, Driving On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321SmartBeams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156Snow Chains (Tire Chains) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346,394Speed Control (Cruise Control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222

508 INDEX

Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311Cold Weather . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312Engine Fails to Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27

Starting and Operating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311Starting Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311Steering

Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324,325Tilt Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161

Steering Wheel MountedSound System Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197,455Storage Bin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197Storage, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305,455Storing Your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 455Stow �n Go (Fold in Floor) Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126Sun Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187Sunglasses Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179

Sunroof Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190Supplemental Restraint System - Airbag . . . . . . . . 65Synthetic Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421System, Remote Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27

Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226Temperature Control, Automatic (ATC) . . . . . . . . 295Temperature Gauge, Engine Coolant . . . . . . . 227,393Tether Anchor, Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87Tilt Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161Tire and Loading Information Placard . . . . . . . . . 339Tire Identification Number (TIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334Tire Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98,343,491

Aging (Life of Tires) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348Air Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393 10

INDEX 509

Compact Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346Flat Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343High Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393,396Life of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348Load Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339,340Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) . . . . . . . . . . . 352Pressure Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220Quality Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 491Radial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334,343Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347

Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348Tongue Weight/Trailer Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375

Disabled Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380Recreational . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389,410Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380

Traction Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329Traction Control Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375

Cooling System Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389Hitches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379Minimum Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383Trailer and Tongue Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386

Trailer Towing Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380Trailer Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380Transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314

Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314

510 INDEX

Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314Selection of Lubricant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 438,463

Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 438Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 438Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 438,463

Transmitter Battery Service(Remote Keyless Entry) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25Transmitter, Garage Door Opener (HomeLink�) . . 181Transmitter, Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) . . . . . . . . 19Transporting Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348Trip Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155,222,457,459

UCI Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273uconnect� (Hands-Free Phone) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108Umbrella Holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199Uniform Tire Quality Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 491

Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) Connector . . . 273Universal Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181Unleaded Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361Upholstery Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 444

Vanity Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108Variance, Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234,242Vehicle Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . 6Vehicle Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340,371,373Vehicle Modifications/Alterations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7Vehicle Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305,455Video Entertainment System™(Rear Seat Video System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282Voice Recognition System (VR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108

Warning Flasher, Hazard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392Warning Lights(Instrument Cluster Description) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219 10

INDEX 511

Warnings and Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6Warranty Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 488Washer, Adding Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430Washing Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442Water

Driving Through . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322Wheel and Wheel Trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443Wheel and Wheel Trim Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443Wheel Nut Torque . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40,190Window Fogging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305

Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36Rear Vent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35

Windows, Express Down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22Windshield Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97Windshield Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429

Zone Control (Temperature Control) . . . . . . . . . . 291

512 INDEX

chrysler canada owners - 3 understanding the features of …owners.mopar.ca/en/manuals/2010/town and...

Documents